Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
www.wiringmanual.com Automation
Motor Applications
Moeller series Power Management
1 3 5 1.13 1.21
+ I >
CB M -Q1
L1 L1 T1 1.14 1.22 4.43
L2 T2 4.44 4.13
L2 M I I I
L3 T3 4.14
L3 2 4 6
H1 H4 4.43 1.13
1 3 5 -Q1 -Q1
4.44 1.14
-Q11
2 4 6
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4
A1 24 V
PE -Q11 0V
A2 DC
U V W PE
X1
U V W PE
M
3~
1 H3 H2 4
H1 H4 -M1
X1 X2
All brand and product names are trade marks
or registered trademarks of the owner concerned
Subject to alteration.
:G\)R
0m
\DA <R<A7 Ac? m
<?D\ ')h<$)T ^
@ Ti<\$:)T 5
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT X
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT V
A')j EE
m;E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
7)
0m
D)??)R <T \DA m;^
m;a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Moeller is Eaton
0m
) && & &"& " &
& ""& $
& &!$ & '$&
& " && $ "$"( '" "
$"(
$ $ &$ " &
"
)
&' & *$& $ "'
& $"$ $
&
, & ('$ &"$"" & &
" #"$ "$ "" " "'
&$
) &
&'"$ & &
& '"
$&&+ ") " $"(
$ )
+' & & &
"$ $ & "&
("+ + ( $&"$ " &"' &
'"
"
&
$
' " *
&$ +'" $ "& ) & & &$& ("
$ & $)&
' ) " "' &
"( +' )& &
& +'" + )"
m;^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power supply quality
m;5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power supply quality
!!1 "'* * (& #& )+#
'## & ###
.- " ")"
'( (
"" + #&" "'
& " )"
. * ' "'
#'"# #)&
&" #)&
*/ / -*( "&# & &)" ")"
/ 0( #&"+ # "#'&
(*-' ((
#
&"" +
&"&
/* ' &""
" " "!'
+ &""
'%-( " ) !'& &"#&&
!'& "&"# &'"#&"# &
(**0 (
#
'" # "#'& ("&# "&
'%-0 '" #" "&" #&&# "!'
+
(&#
'# "
### & & ###
#+#& ")# & !'&
" ''0 . * # &# #& ("+ #"& & )& &
"( #
"
(* '* (-( )&
)" #'# #&" &"#
/. ' -(-0
"# *
# " *# "
-( 0 '
#'" #
+
'#
'
&
( """# ("& ")"
7' ;#') %=7%/7 '% 1'#:7 '%1, 1'#:7 '%1 /%, ' ; < 7 %7 / /%
)/':71 % 1/; 1 # 17 #'< '/ /-:17 )/':7 7#' )#1 ; 1 7
/)/1%7 =$)#1 /'$ ':/ =7%1 ; <<<,7'%,'$5)'</-:# 7>,
m;3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton Medium Voltage Systems
''0 (/*'
1 71 %$ 1>1 )/ $/> 1< 7/ 1
7 /17 17 % 7/%1$ 77 % #7/ #
://%7 /'$ 7 1:))#> %7<'/" 7' 7
% :17'$/, $)'/7% ' 7
17/7 )'1 7 '% ' 7 1:177 '% %
71 1< 7/ < 7 % 7 1>17$ /
71 7 7 77 #>':7 '%17/:7 '%
% ')/7 '% $:17 1 % '/
$= $:$ ; # # 7> % /# # 7>, '/ -*(
7 1 /1'% 7'%.1 )'/7'# ' %#:1
7
'$)7 177 '%/> #7/ # %/> 1 '$ % % 1
1< 7/ :% 7 < 7 1 %# '/ ':# )%1# #$%7 ' $'/% 1' 7>,
:1/ % '</)/7 0 /# # % '%17%7 %/> 1:))#> 1
1< 7/ :% 7 < 7 /$';# /: 7 %/1 % % $)'/7% ;/> >, /'$
/"/1 1< 71 % '%77'/1, 7 17%)' %7 ' %/> '$)% 1 %
7 %:17/> 7 1 $%1 77 7 )'</
17/ :7 '% %7<'/" $:17 ') < 7
'0 (/*' ;/ %/1 % $%, 7 '1 < 7':7
7'% 1 ;#') :% ;/1# $':#/ 1> % 77 17> % ')/7 '%#
1'%/> 1< 7/ :%/ 7
/# # 7> )#> 1 % %7 /'#,
% / )/':7 1/ 1, 7 1 1: 7# '/
:1 % 1:))#> %7<'/"1 :1 %11 )/$ <<<,7'%,'$
11 %/17/:7:/ )/'!71 %:17/ # <<<,7'%,'$5#7/ #
))# 7 '%1 % '/ 17/:7:/1 /#7 %
7' /%<#1 1: 1 < % /$1 %
m;X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
What's new in this edition?
jGDR\ \D \:) iDR?' @R>)\ A' \D DR\: @)R<$
0m
:) ik \D T2) @$:<A)
m;V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Competence and Experience from a Single Source
iiiJi<R<A7@Ac?J$D@
0m
The Wiring Manual has been classic for Its contents are also available online at
over 50 years and is probably the most www.wiringmanual.com.
popular publication of the company. The online version combines the proven
Worldwide distribution has given it new expertise with the latest Internet
impetus in recent years. The 2005 edition technology. For example, full text searches
was translated for the first time into nine are also possible.
languages:
A special page with links to all the different
English, language versions available is provided as
French, a service to users from all over the world.
Italian, www.eaton.com/moeller/support
Spanish, (Wiring Manual)
Dutch,
Russian,
Czech,
Romanian,
Swedish
m;*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Competence and Experience from a Single Source
iiiJ\DAJ$D@ . \:) RD'c$\T D2 \:) D)??)RS T)R<)T
0m
Eaton offers you a range of products and Information about the European
services that can be optimally combined activities of Eaton,
with one another. Visit our website on the Publications in the press, specialist
Internet. You will find there everything press,
about Eaton, such as: References,
Up-to-date information about Eaton Exhibition dates and events,
products, Technical support in the Eaton Support
The addresses of the Eaton sales offices Portal.
and representatives worldwide,
m;B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Support Portal
You can also find a link to the Eaton After You can send your queries directly to the
0m Sales Service via the Support Portal Technical Support/pre-sales service by
( Section After Sales Service, e-mail. Simply select the e-mail form that
page 0-12). meets your requirements to the Eaton
experts.
m;Em
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton Online Catalog
:) )22<$<)A\ ik \D ')\<?)' GRD'c$\ <A2DR@\<DA
0m
From detailed product information right up :) )R$: \DD?T
to the enquiry for your products by email or Several search options are available to
fax from your Eaton product supplier. All enable the right access for any product
this and more you can find in the Eaton search.
Online Catalog. The product group tree structure enables
simple searching in just a few clicks of
the mouse
Selection tools provide logical filters in
product groups containing several
products
A powerful search function with a
proposal list ensures above-average
search results
A number of links to additional product
information and all aspects of it enable you
to ensure optimum use of the product:
This gives you fast access to new Application examples and project design
innovations as well as extensive notes,
information on the current Eaton ranges. Approvals
Industrial switchgear, Instructional leaflets,
Drives, Manuals,
Automation systems, drives, Software etc.
Power distribution systems.
Create a comprehensive data sheet for a Choose Your Online Catalog on the
product and save it as a PDF document or Internet.
print it out. http://ecat.moeller.net/?locale=en_EN
m;EE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
After Sales Service
As close as you wish DcA\<A7 A' $D@@<TT<DA<A7 TcGGDR\
0m Contact us if you require fast and
)Rh<$) G)$<?<T\T
competent support in installing and
Gain the benefit of our Service personnel.
commissioning tasks.
Comprehensive expertise linked with long
term experience and modern equipment DAh)RT<DAT A' )jGAT<DAT
help you find the solution to your tasks. Whether with controllers, circuit-breakers
or other components, we can bring your
\)R<? $:R$\)R<T\<$
machines and plants up to the latest
Components, cards and spare parts of our
state-of-the-art.
product range are available for your use.
ATG)$\<DA A' @<A\)AA$)
D7<T\<$T
The legal requirements and regulations
Personnel and material are furnished
demand the regular testing of electrical
according to your requirements,
equipment in order to ensure its proper
professionally and on time.
condition. Further information is available
from our website.
)?G?<A)
www.eaton.com/moeller/aftersales
D\?<A) The After Sales Service therefore offers
You will receive competent and quick appropriate services for circuit-breakers
telephone assistance round the clock in and low-voltage distribution boards.
the event of unscheduled machine stops
We support you in the inspection and
and plant down-times, system faults and
maintenance of the circuit-breakers and
device break-downs.
low-voltage distribution boards supplied by
)?G ')T> us, determine the condition of your
During business hours, you will receive systems and carry out the necessary work.
support for commissioning, application If required, thermography or network
queries right through to fault analysis, analysis are also carried out with this work.
which can also be carried out using remote
diagnostics.
Specialists are available in the areas of
automation, drives, low-voltage power
distribution or switchgear.
AT<\) )Rh<$)
RDc!?)T:DD\<A7 DAT<\)
Qualified technicians and specialists can
visit you in order to rectify faults quickly
and reliably.
m;Ea
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
After Sales Service
)Rh<$) T)@<ART
Tailored service seminars that meet your
A?<A) )Rh<$) 0m
individual requirements to train up your A?<A) \RDc!?)T:DD\<A7
personnel. We can provide special assistance if you
wish to analyse and rectify faults on
:)R@D7RG:k products. You can carry out interactive
Thermography gives us an efficient way of troubleshooting via the Internet with direct
analysing your electrical systems and access to our Service-database.
controls during operation.
; R)Lc)A\?k T>)' c)T\<DAT
)\iDR> A?kT<T There are some questions about our
Network analysis provides clear products that our customers very often
information about the specific state of your ask. You can benefit from the answers. You
networks without the need for lengthy and can read the FAQ with the corresponding
expensive fault retrieval. answers on all aspects of automation.
cT @DA<\DR<A7 DiA?D'T
Please enquire whether we can inspect You're at the right place here if you require
the communication networks of your updates, software, documentation and
systems with the latest technical declarations of conformity. Visit the Eaton
equipment. Download Center to obtain all the
information you require.
)G<RT
<R)$\ )j$:A7) DA\$\
In the event of a fault, the direct exchange
D\?<A) 2DR 2c?\T
service for selective products In the event of a fault contact your local
considerably reduces the downtime of representative
your production plant.
www.eaton.com/moeller/aftersales
)G<RT or the After Sales Service directly
The repair of products in our Service
+49 (0) 180 522 3822, 24/7 (round the clock)
Center is an inexpensive alternative for
fault rectification.
)?G ')T>
Tel.: +49 (0) 228 602 3640
:R) GR\TZ)G?$)@)A\ ')h<$)T
We reduce maintenance costs with (Mon. Fri. 08:00 16:00 CET).
selected spare parts and devices for )@<?
current/discontinued product lines. AfterSalesEGBonn@eaton.com
A\)RA)\
www.eaton.com/moeller/aftersales
m;E^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Photovoltaics in residential buildings
T<A7 TD?R )A)R7k T2)?k . D?c\<DAT 2RD@ \DA
0m
2) G:D\DhD?\<$ TkT\)@T Apart from the PV panels, a grid-connected
system consists of one or several inverters
and switching devices, for operation,
maintenance and protection in the event of
a fault such as:
a DC string protective device,
DC switch-disconnector
DC surge protection
PV inverter
Residual current device (RCD),
AC surge protection
and xComfort system (optional).
The PV panels are connected in series (as
S[Q:B5
a string) in order to provide the required
HQE[(#[:i( &(i:#( input DC voltage for the inverter.
.cS( Sj:[#8
&:S#EBB(#[EQ Two or several strings are connected in
parallel to increase the power of the
Sj:[#8 system. For safety reasons, all electrical
&:S#EBB(#[EQ
equipment must be isolated, protected and
ScQ5(
HQE[(#[:EB secured with switching devices which
must likewise be protected with
:Bi(Q[(Q enclosures. All these important protective
devices can be sourced directly from
(S:&c> #cQQ(B[ Eaton.
&(i:#(
2) <TD?\<DA& Ti<\$:<A7 A' GRD\)$\<A7J
([(Q Q(&:B5
:B#EA(Q HB(>
In order to feed the generated electricity
into the public grid or even to use it,
inverters are required to convert the DC
Photovoltaic systems use solar cells to current of the solar cells in the AC current.
convert solar energy into electrical energy. The frequency and voltage values are
If the system is connected to the grid, the adjusted to the grid parameters at hand.
generated electricity is fed directly into it. Also here, Eaton offers reliable protective
Unlike grid independent systems the and grid isolation devices such as inverters
complicated temporary storage of from 1500 to 4000 W for indoor use and from
electricity is not required, however, the 4000 to 4600 W for outdoor applications.
generated DC current has to be converted
to AC.
m;E5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Photovoltaics in residential buildings
A'DDR cT)
DAh)R\<A7 TD?R )A)R7k )22<$<)A\?k
The ISG series with degree of protection 0m
IP43 is designed for indoor installation.
c\'DDR cT)
The ISG series with degree of protection
IP65 is designed for both indoor and
outdoor applications.
G)$<2<$\<DAT
All power inverters are designed for
ambient temperatures from -20 to +55 C.
Optimum operation is achieved at ambient
air temperatures between 0 and +40 C.
:) GDi)R D2 \:) TcA . cT)' DG\<@??k
The total output of a photovoltaic system
R<';$DAA)$\)' GDi)R <Ah)R\)RT 2RD@ E3mm
not only depends on the total area of the PV
\D 5Xmm
panels, their alignment and the inclination
Each photovoltaic installation is as
angle of the modules.
individual as the requirements of its user.
Components such as inverters play an
Eaton therefore offers a complete line of
important part in the efficiency of the
single-phase power inverters from 1500 to
system. Eaton inverters ensure you have
4600 W:
the maximum output.
Suitable for moncrystalline and
polycrystalline PV generators.
)Lc<R)@)A\T& \:) <TD?\<DA 7G
Maintenance free, highly reliable and
very easy to install. Ti<\$:;'<T$DAA)$\DR
Integrated LCD display simplifies The IEC 60364-7-712 standard stipulates
operation. the installation of a switch-disconnector
Optimum efficiency with maximum between the PV generator and the inverter.
power point tracking (MPPT). Eaton offers enclosed and open
Fan-free thanks to natural convection switch-disconnectors for DC voltages up to
cooling. 1000V. In accordance with the regulations
High performance compared to size. of VDI 6012 they can be used as separate
switching points, so that a faulty inverter
Particularly quiet and low pollution
can be completely de-energized safely. All
operation.
switch-disconnectors switch two poles
Standard RS232 ENS interface in
and are therefore also suitable for
accordance with VDE0126-1-1/DK5940.
ungrounded systems. All switches are TV
Compact elegant modern design.
certified.
m;E3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Photovoltaics in residential buildings
0m
m;EX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Photovoltaics in residential buildings
as well as having the ability to send trip
indications via auxiliary contacts to thus 0m
avoid any losses in yield. A further feature
of the DC string circuit-breaker is the
variable tripping range for short-circuit
currents: it reacts already from 1.05 1.3
times the residual current. Eaton offers
both fuse switch-disconnectors as well as
string circuit-breakers that can be
combined easily with other components as
required.
cT) Ti<\$:;'<T$DAA)$\DRT i<\:
<A\)7R\)' T:DR\;$<R$c<\ GRD\)$\<h) ')h<$)
The task of the FCFDC10DISOL fuse
switch-disconnector for the ASFLC10-SOL
<@G?) <AT\??\<DA cylindrical fuse cartridges for fuse sizes 10
Fireman's switches are installed in direct x 38 is to protect PV panels from
proximity to the PV modules and inserted in short-circuit currents. A flash function can
the DC cable directly after the entry point optionally be used to indicate a blown fuse.
into the building between the panels and \R<A7 $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
the power inverter. The PV modules are The Eaton PKZ-SOL string circuit-breakers
disconnected automatically using are the fuseless alternative for protection
undervoltage releases in the fireman's against short-circuit currents. Its variable
switch, when the AC voltage of the building tripping range enables optional settings to
is isolated either by the fire brigade or the the actual short-circuit current of a string.
local utility company or on site via a PV-OFF A thermal release responds already at 1.05
switch. ... 1.3 times the current, whilst the magnetic
release responds at 6 times the current.
;T\R<A7 GRD\)$\<DA Non-enclosed string circuit-breakers are
If a PV installation has three or more designed for installation in customized
strings, a string protection device using DC generator terminal boxes.
fuses or DC string circuit-breakers is
recommended. These protect the PV
panels from leakage and feedback
currents that can occur on faulty strings,
and prevent the feedback of good panels to
panels with short-circuits. Compared to
fuses, string circuit-breakers have the
advantage that they are immediately
operational again after the fault is rectified
m;EV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Photovoltaics in residential buildings
TcR7) GRD\)$\<DA
0m
cR7) GRD\)$\<h) ')h<$)T 2DR <7<\? R)T<'c? $cRR)A\ ')h<$)
GG?<$\<DAT With the development of digital technology
The Eaton SPPT2PA surge arrester is a new level of precision was achieved that
specially developed for photovoltaic enables the avoidance of nuisance
applications and offers protection from tripping. This can occur for example with
transient overvoltages that can occur permanent residual currents of electrical
through the indirect effect of lightning. devices or temporary faults caused by
Eaton offers types for both grounded and storms. Here too, Eaton is also one step
non-grounded systems in which the use of ahead:
a spark gap ensures galvanic isolation. The Eaton is the first company worldwide to
units can be supplied pre-wired as ready to offer a digital residual current device. The
use connection units. continuous status monitoring of the
installation allows unwanted and annoying
A$R)T<A7 !c<?'<A7 T2)\k A' $D@2DR\ disconnections to be considerably
AC switching devices for buildings, such as reduced, thus guaranteeing optimum
miniature circuit-breakers and residual system availability. Three LEDs use the
current devices offer maximum safety. "traffic light" principle to indicate when a
differential current has reached the 30%
Eaton products of the xPole series combine warning threshold. In this way,
all functional, mounting and safety countermeasures can be taken in the
benefits: intelligent design solutions installation before the situation gets worse.
exclude the possibility of mounting faults. The installation user is thus provided with
They even offer optimum safety for the end increased safety with greater
user: convenience.
Personnel protection in the form of residual
current devices and protection of the D@!<A\<DA Ti<\$:
electrical installation in the form of The benefits of MCBs and RCDs combined
overvoltage protection and MCBs. The in a single device this is the Eaton
portfolio is rounded off with an extensive combination switch. It saves space, whilst
range of intelligent switching devices such ensuring complete safety: reliable fire and
as remote switches, restart devices and personnel protection (30 mA) with enough
others. space for flexible generous cabling.
The surge current proof design prevents
unwanted disconnection and selective
types enable the selective disconnection
of faulty system sections.
m;E*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Photovoltaics in residential buildings
<A<\cR) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Regardless of whether plug terminal
<R)?)TT @DA<\DR<A7 D2 <AT\??\<DA
A' T<@G?) )A)R7k @A7)@)A\
0m
connections or screw terminals are
required, Eaton has the right MCB for A)R7k @)TcR<A7 T)ATDR cG \D EX A'
residential buildings and for industrial DD@ A7)R
applications. Extensive accessories such Convenient monitoring of electricity
as auxiliary contacts, shunt releases, generation from your living room modern
restart devices and intelligent busbar home automation makes this possible.
solutions enable a host of applications and With xComfort, Eaton is offering the Room
automation solutions. Manager with integrated energy
management software (Energy Manager)
<T\R<!c\<DA TkT\)@T for a powerful solution.
From the compact distribution board to the
The connection of the Eaton energy sensor
meter cabinet and the data network
with the inverter enables the electrical
cabinet, Eaton offers a complete product
energy currently fed into the grid to be
portfolio. All applications can thus be
measured.
covered for the infrastructure in residential
and non-residential buildings as well as in This data is then transferred wirelessly to
the industrial sector. the Room-Manager which is installed in
one of the living areas. Here, the user of the
cR7) GRD\)$\<DA system can view values such as energy
Lightning strikes and overvoltages not only (kWh), power (kW), voltage (V) and amps
pose a risk for electrical installations but (A) on a display.
also for their operators. Eaton offers an
extensive range of surge protective
devices. Attachable auxiliary contacts also
enable the monitoring of device functions.
m;EB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Photovoltaics in residential buildings
0m
m;am
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Photovoltaics in residential buildings
0m
D@2DR\& T2)\k A' )A)R7k @A7)@)A\ Entering the price per unit of measure
Wireless home automation enables makes it is possible to calculate the costs
lighting management, shade control, for a consumption cycle quickly and
monitoring and danger warnings, as well simply, for example for a bath or a washing
as energy saving control concepts for machine cycle.
heating, cooling and ventilation. More consumption and cost control is
Eaton's xComfort and Energy Manager offered by a function that reads the history
thus offer transparency, comfort and of the previous 24 hours right through to the
safety combined: last 12 months from the archive and shows
Consumption control it as a value or a trend on the display. It is
Cost saving also possible to output a warning message
Reduction of CO2 emission as soon as a user-defined limit value is
exceeded. All this makes Eaton's energy
EU regulations stipulate that the actual
management software a useful tool for
energy consumption must be clearly visible
identifying possible savings and reducing
to end consumers. The Eaton Room
electricity costs for private system users.
Manager covers this requirement by
displaying and controlling the energy
consumption of specific electrical or gas
devices in the entire home.
m;aE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
jA)R7k . 2) )A)R7k '<T\R<!c\<DA cG \D 3mmm
0m
The modular system consists of perfectly 4 internal partitioning, and which take
fitting function modules that are type European and local (DIN, VDE, CEI, NF,
tested to IEC/EN 61439 with Form 1 to Form UNE) installation practice into account.
xEnergy provides the panel builder with a This practically oriented system platform
flexibly combinable product range for enables individual project design,
power distribution systems up to 5000 A. maximum flexibility and fast production in
The operation of the system couldn't be the workshop. On the one hand, this saves
simpler, despite its complexity. The time, money and space, whilst type tested
modular design enables the creation of mounting units offer a higher level of
intelligent combinations. safety. The modular system can
furthermore be extended with little effort to
Switching and protective devices, as well
meet future requirements.
as the associated mounting technology
and extensive housing components are
perfectly matched and form both a
technical as well as an economic unit.
m;aa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
The panel builder is provided with efficient Dimensions: Height 2000 mm
tools for tasks ranging from planning to Width 425, 600, 800, 850, 1000, 1100, 1200, 0m
quotations, right through to ordering. The 1350 mm
entire range is supplied in functional flat Depth 400, 600, 800, 1000 mm
packs or as pre-assembled switch
cabinets.
kT\)@ 2)\cR)T% h<?!?) \)$:AD?D7<)T
Rated operational voltage 400 to 690 V AC Fixed mounting
Rated operational current 630 to 5000 A
Removable compartments
Rated short-time withstand current to
100kA (1 s) Withdrawable compartments
Main busbar current to 5000 A
Dropper bar current up to 2000 A
Sheet steel housing for combination and
separate mounting
Degree of protection to IP31 and IP55
Colour RAL 7035
Internal separation up to Form 4
jA)R7k HDi)RI
Incoming units/feeder units, outgoers
and couplings with NZM or IZM
circuit-breakers up to 5000 A
Circuit-breakers in fixed mounting or
withdrawable units
3 or 4 pole circuit-breakers
Internal separation up to Form 4
Cable connection from top or bottom
Incomer system for drill-free cable
connection
m;a^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
jA)R7k H<j)'I $D@GR\@)A\ ')T<7A
0m Outgoers with PKZ or NZM
circuit-breakers up to 630 A
Circuit-breakers in fixed mounting or
withdrawable units
3- or 4-pole circuit-breakers
Outgoers with SL fuse-strip units up to
630 A
Individual outgoers, e.g. controllers,
motor starters, small energy outgoers,
Internal separation up to Form 3 or Form 4
Cable connection from top or bottom
m;a5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
jA)R7k H<\:'Ri!?)I
i<\:'Ri!?) $D@GR\@)A\ ')T<7A 0m
Outgoers with PKZ and NZM
circuit-breakers up to 630 A
Outgoers for motor starters up to 250 kW
Empty drawer-units for every application
Uniform, straightforward operation for all
drawer-unit sizes
No special tool required
Flexible assembly with plug-in contacts
(incoming and outgoing)
Withdrawable modules exchangeable
whilst live
Unambiguous position indication for
Operation, Test, De-energized
Straightforward maintenance, minimal
downtime
Internal separation up to Form 4
Cable connection from top or bottom
m;a3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
j\? '';DA !DR'
0m
The xVtl side-by-side distribution system is Typical uses are as power distribution
designed to take switchgear for systems in utility buildings or as control
applications up to 2500 A. panel enclosures in industry. This is where
the xVtl can demonstrate the benefits of its
rugged design.
The xVtl is a stable, side-by-side mountable also recommended for harsher conditions
distributor made of sheet steel that is also such as wind energy systems, or in
best suited for stand-alone installation. It industry, in a foam-type polyurethane
protects persons from coming into direct sealing design. Abrasion-proof protection
contact with conducting parts and even against corrosion is guaranteed thanks to
from possible electric shock, and reliably structured paint finish using a powder
fends off damaging exterior influences. It coating RAL 7035.
carries out these functions according to Overall, the technical design of the xVtlL
the specific requirements, with protection complies with the IEC/EN 62208 and
degrees of IP40 or IP55. While the former is EN 60529 standards, as well as with
suited to diverse uses in functional
buildings such as schools or hospitals, it is
m;aX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
IEC 60439-1, as long as it is used as a Rated short-time withstand current to
low-voltage energy distribution system. 65 kA (1 s) 0m
Sheet steel housing for combination and
kT\)@ 2)\cR)T%
separate mounting
Common platform with xEnergy: Several
design elements such as mounting Degree of protection to IP40 and IP55
frames, bottom and top plates, as well as Colour RAL 7035
side and rear panels can be used for both Internal separation up to Form 2
xVtl and xEnergy. Dimensions:
Installation mounting systems : Profi+, EP Height 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000 mm
and IVS Width 425, 600, 800, 850, 1000, 1100, 1200,
Rated operational voltage 415 V AC 1350 mm
Rated operational current to 2500 A Depth 400, 600, 800 mm
m;aV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
j\? Tc!'<T\R<!c\<DA TkT\)@
0m Installation mounting systems Profi+, EP
and IVS
Mounting modules for
for NZM
NH switch-disconnectors
Low-voltage h.b.c. fuse switch
disconnectors
Busbar mounting fuses
Modular installation devices
Individual devices
m;a*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
D'c?R Ti<\$:7)R TkT\)@T S
0m
The MODAN is a type-tested modular
power distribution system in compliance
with IEC/EN 61439-1. It is used wherever
large amounts of energy have to be
distributed safely and reliably or where
motor controllers have to be integrated into
processes.
MODAN combines the greatest possible
flexibility with safety and reliability, as well
as profitability for the long term.
Straightforward engineering, effective
commissioning and fault-free operation by
the modular construction using Eaton
products for switching, protection, control
and visualization.
Full and comprehensive integration of the
primary control is implemented on the basis
of networked functional groups.
For personnel and system protection, the
arc fault protection system ARCON can be
integrated without problems.
S . Di)R
Operating voltage 400 to 690 V AC
Rated operational current 630 to 6300 A
Short-circuit strength to 100 kA (1 s)
Connection from top and bottom for
cables and busbars (LX, LD, BD)
Internal partitioning up to Form 4b
m;aB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
S . )@Dh!?)
0m Section for up to 15 removable
compartments for power outgoers and
motor starters or
Section for up to 27 fuse combination
units
Flexible surface mounting using plug-in
contacts
Plug-in modules exchangeable whilst
live
Straightforward maintenance and
reduced downtime
)@Dh!?) $D@GR\@)A\T
Power outgoers up to 630 A
Motor starters up to 90 kW
Module is for plugging in, i. e. the
incoming unit is removable
m;^m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
S . <\:'Ri!?)
Section for up to 30 drawer units for
0m
power outgoers and motor starters
High packing density
Uniform, straightforward operation for all
drawer-unit sizes
No special tool required
Withdrawable modules exchangeable
whilst live
Straightforward maintenance and
minimal downtime
Internal partitioning up to Form 4b
m;^E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
S R$ 2c?\ GRD\)$\<h) TkT\)@
0m
Maximum personnel and system safety, responds when light and current signals
especially during continuous production are present. A tripping signal is applied to
processes, made possible using the the quenching device and to the feeder
ARCON arc-fault protection system. The circuit-breakers. The fault arc is quenched
system offers protection from 6 to 100 kArms in less than 2 ms. The system can be put
arc fault current. back into operation as soon as the fault is
Detection of the arc faults is by light and eliminated and the quenching device is
current sensors. The evaluation unit renewed.
*
*C
*
Current transformer
ARC-SL... linear light sensor
Electronic evaluation unit (slave)
ARC-EL3
Electronic evaluation unit (master)
ARC-EM S . c)A$:<A7 ')h<$)
ARC-AT quenching device
m;^a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
:))\ T\))? i??;@DcA\<A7 )A$?DTcR) i<\: @DcA\<A7 G?\)
0m
The robust CS enclosure series with solid removed without any tools. Wall fixing
sheet steel is used wherever a particularly brackets enable the switch cabinet to be
effective protection against direct contact mounted on a wall.
with live parts or the protection of all The PHZ-A comfort rotary handle with
installed equipment from harmful external locked position indication clearly shows on
influences is required. Thanks to its high the outside whether the cylinder is in the
degree of protection to IP 66 (UL/CSA opened or closed position. The comfort
Types 1, 12) with a continuous foam rotary handle can be retrofitted quickly,
polyurethane gasket, water, oil or dirt is without the need to remove the standard
prevented from penetrating inside the lock - thus eliminating the need for the use
enclosure. This makes the CS enclosure of rotary levers.
particularly suitable for subdistribution
The galvanized sheet steel mounting plate
boards in control panels in industrial and
with a maximum thickness of 3 mm ensures
utility buildings, as well as for machine
the safe installation of the switchgear and
building applications.
basic EMC protection.
The stable sheet steel enclosure meets the
The CS enclosure can be turned through
requirements of impact resistance
180, so that the cables can be fed in either
category IK09 to EN 62262. Impact resistant
via the top or bottom. The large flange plate
metal locks provide additional safety. The
openings allow the fitter more flexible
hinge pins with quick change technology
handling.
enable the door hinge to be replaced
quickly since each metal pin can be
m;^^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
The foam gasket of the flange plate saves Their powder coated surface provides an
0m users the time required for gluing in foam abrasion and corrosion resistant
rubber seals. Both flange and mounting protection. As a special service, Eaton also
plates are incorporated in the grounding offers individual solutions tailored to
concept, thus eliminating the need for an customer specifications.
additional protective ground connection.
m;^5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
T)Rh<$) '<T\R<!c\<DA TkT\)@ The IVS service distribution board up to
630 A is primarily used for the safe and 0m
economical power supply in industrial,
building and commercial applications.
The range therefore includes wall and
standard enclosures, each with protection
to IP30 and IP54.
The mounting space with an even division
into standard 250 x 375 mm sections
ensures a particularly clear design.
Planning, ordering and mounting are thus
simplified accordingly.
The link between the enclosure and the
mounting units is the mounting system
with insulated support brackets. The
mounting system can be lifted out of the
enclosure after the plates have been
removed and the screws released.
A number of mounting units that are
tailored to original Eaton switching and
protective devices allow for time saving
and simple mounting.
Insulated covers are used for protecting
the mounting units from direct contact.
m;^3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
\)R@<A? Copper conductors can be inserted quickly
0m into the box terminals from above without
bending.
The Eaton terminals are designed for
copper strips or busbars as well as copper
conductors. Each terminal pair is moulded
in a plastic Duroplast shell. Each of the 6
sizes is available from stock as a 1-pole,
3-pole, 4-pole or 5-pole terminal
combination.
The connection terminal consists of a
combination of several very stable terminal Accessories such as the transparent
blocks. It is used for connecting two or plastic cover, auxiliary conductor
several conductors. terminals or conversion kits also enable
the creation of your own terminal variants.
A very wide range is available as standard
with 6 sizes and terminal capacities from 16
to 3 x 240 mm (160 to 1000 A).
m;^X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
<ATc?\)' '<T\R<!c\<DA !DR'T& \D\??k <ATc?\)'
0m
m;^V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\DA <R<A7 Ac?
Eaton power distribution equipment
Xm< !cT!R TkT\)@ 2DR \:) iDR?'
0m @R>)\
The SASY60i modular busbar system from The larger clearances and creepage
Eaton is designed for effective power distances required in compliance with the
distribution in the control panel. UL 508A in America have been considered
Thanks to the innovative mounting in the construction of the busbar
technology feeder and outgoing components.
circuit-breakers can be mounted quickly When used in North America, the insulated
and compactly. SASY60i is safe and bottom plate must be mounted under the
reliable. system. Components approved for IEC
In conjunction with the latest generation of such as NH fuse switch-disconnectors or
Eaton motor protective circuit-breakers D busbar mounting fuses can also suitable
and other circuit-breakers, the SASY 60i for perfectly matched fitting.
provides a universal, UL certified solution As SASY60i requires few system
for switching, controlling, protecting and components the new Eaton busbar system
distributing energy. Together with the also reduces the stock-keeping and
appropriate switching and protective ordering required.
devices, the busbar system is designed for These benefits naturally also apply to
worldwide use. Eaton's SASY185i and SASY Compact
busbar systems.
m;^*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
7)
; ; kT\)@\<$ h<Tc?<l\<DA A'
$DA\RD? E;B5
D2\iR) E;E^m
E;E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
DAA)$\ 'DAQ\ i<R) The length of a SmartWire-DT network can
The main part of a control system for a be extended up to 600 meters. Up to 99
stations can be connected.
1E
machine is these days carried out by a PLC.
Typically the PLC is mounted in a control You can use the SmartWire-DT technology
panel at a central position in the system. flexibly. The connection via standard
The control of the switchgear is carried out fieldbus systems (e.g. PROFIBUS,
via special cables from the input and CANopen) enables SWD gateways to be
output terminals of the PLC for the control used on the controller platforms of many
and return signals. With a decentralized manufacturers. Another option is the use of
configuration the switchgear and the Eaton automation components (e.g. XV100
remote input/output system are connected visualization system) with an integrated
in the same way. SmartWire-DT interface.
The SmartWire-DT communication system
replaces the control wiring previously
required between the PLC inputs/outputs
and the switching devices. In this way, the
inputs/outputs of the PLC are relocated to
the switching devices. Pluggable
communication modules are used for this
task. The communication is implemented
via an 8-pole ribbon cable. Special device
plugs are used for connecting the
communication modules to the cable. The
switchgear is supplied on the control
circuit side by the connection cable.
The SmartWire-DT system
reduces the time required for the control
wiring and wiring test,
saves space in the control cabinet
because cable ducts are unnecessary
and
reduces the number of inputs/outputs
required at the PLC.
E;a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
hD?c\<DA <A \:) Ti<\$:!DR'
)2DR) D'k
1E
E;^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
F a
0 W
1E W
U
U
Fo
]
)
] C
F)
F3
F0 FU
Fa
FF
F]
F]
U FW
U
U
U
U
aa a]
ao aa a0
aF a0
a3
a3 aa
3o
0 U
U
0 U
FC U
aW
a)
aU aU
0 ]C
aC
]F
]o
]F
a] a0
a) a0 ]a
]W
]0
])
]3
]]
]3
0 U
]3 U
U ]U
0
E;5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
1 Programmable logic controller PLC 29 SmartWire-DT card for function
2 SmartWire-DT gateway elements, base-fixing
3 Data plugs Sub-D 9 pole 30 SmartWire-DT LED elements for base
4 SmartWire-DT HMI-PLC fixing 1E
5 SmartWire-DT blade terminal 8 pole 31 SmartWire-DT function elements for
6 SmartWire-DT ribbon cable 8 pole base fixing
7 SmartWire-DT device plug 8 pole 32 SmartWire-DT universal station for
8 SmartWire-DT I/O modules base fixing
9 SmartWire-DT connection for NZM 33 SmartWire-DT adapter for
10 NZM circuit-breaker ribbon/round cable for top-hat rail
11 SmartWire-DT contactor module mounting
12 DILM contactor 34 SmartWire-DT PKE module
13 SmartWire-DT contactor modules with (motor-protective circuit-breaker)
Manual-0-Automatic switch 35 PKZ12, PKE32 motor-protective
14 PKZM0 motor-protective circuit-breaker
circuit-breaker 36 PKE 65 motor-protective
15 SC motor-starter combination circuit-breaker
16 SmartWire-DT PKE module (motor 37 Network termination for 8 pole ribbon
starter) cable
17 Motor-starter combination with PKE 38 DS7 soft starter
electronic motor-protective 39 SmartWire-DT round cable, 8-pole
circuit-breaker 40 SmartWire-DT planning and ordering
18 DS7 Softstarter with PKE electronic aid, SWD-Assist
motor-protective circuit-breaker
19 SmartWire-DT powerfeed module
20 SmartWire-DT universal station, front
fixing
21 SmartWire-DT LED elements, front
fixing
22 RMQ-Titan fixing adapters for front
mounting
23 RMQ-Titan indicator light
24 SmartWire-DT function elements for
front fixing
25 SmartWire-DT operating elements
26 SmartWire-DT control panel cable
entry for ribbon to round cable
27 SmartWire-DT plug connector
28 RMQ-Titan surface mounting enclosure
E;3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
$D@@cA<$\<DA h< @R\<R);
Motor-starter combinations fitted with PKE
1E can transfer the following information via
SmartWire-DT:
I_max Maximum motor current (relative): shows the single-phase
current (single-phase load) or the maximum current in the
appropriate phase (three-phase load).
Thermal image of the Shows the temperature curve of the motor; stated in %,
motor Overload warning function possible
Type of trip block display Shows the type of trip block currently in use.
Display of set Overload Shows the currently set value for the overload release.
value
Display of time-lag class Shows the currently set time-lag class (Class 520).
value
PKE switching state Shows the currently set ON/OFF switching state.
display
DILM contactor Shows the currently set ON/OFF switching state.
switching state
Trip indication overload Shows a differentiated Overload fault indication.
Trip indication Shows a differentiated Short-circuit fault indication.
short-circuit
Trip indication Phase Shows a differentiated Phase failure fault indication.
failure
Trip indication Test Shows a differentiated Tripping via test function fault
indication.
ZMR function Overload relay function: When the ZMR function is set, the
contactor disconnects in the event of an overload. The PKE
motor-protective circuit-breaker remains switched on
(ON setting).
The contact is reset with the MANUAL/AUTO function via
PKE-SWD-32.
E;X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
h)R?D' R)?k 2cA$\<DA HI
The ZMR function enables the motor to be Ac? @D')
switched off by the connected contactor in
the event of an overload. To do this the PKE In "manual" ZMR operating mode, the 1E
sends the switch off command for the retriggering of the contactor must be
contactor to the PKE-SWD-32 via the data acknowledged beforehand.
cable of the PKE32-COM.
The trip in response to a motor overload c\D@\<$ @D')
occurs if the thermal motor image of the In "automatic" ZMR mode, the contactor is
PKE reaches 110 %. ready to reclose immediately after the
This value remains set until the thermal thermal image drops below 100 %.
motor image has gone below the 100 % A7)R1
level and the operational readiness of the If the switch on command for the contactor
contactor is restored. is sent in "automatic" ZMR mode, the motor
The reclosing readiness of the contactor starts up automatically after the thermal
can be selected by the two manual and motor image falls below 100 %.
automatic operating modes of the ZMR Never disconnect the communication link
function. between the PKE-SWD-32 and the PKE trip
The ZMR function can only be used in block after an overload with the ZMR
position "A" of the 1-0-A switch. function activated, as this can cause the
In the event of a phase unbalance and contactor to switch on if a switch
activated ZMR function, the value of the command is present.
thermal motor image is raised from 100 %
to 110 % after a trip.
The switched off contactor's readiness to
reclose is restored when the value falls
below 100 %.
The ZMR function must not be activated
with reversing starters since this operation
does not ensure the disconnection of the
second contactor in the event of an
overload.
E;V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
T\R\)R i<\:
motor protective circuit-breaker can be
The DOL starters are assembled from a connected to these two feedback inputs
(e.g. NHI-E--PKZ0 standard auxiliary
1E
PKZM0 and a DILM7 to DILM32 contactor.
The connection to SmartWire-DT is contact, AGM2--PKZ0 differential
implemented with the DIL-SWD-32-.. trip-indicating auxiliary contact).
module. This is fitted directly on the Figure, page 1-10
contactor and connected via the SWD
device plug with the SWD communication )h)RT<A7 T\R\)R i<\:
cable.
The reversing starters are made up of a
PKZM0 motor-protective circuit-breaker
and two DILM7 to DILM32 contactors. A
DIL-SWD-32- SmartWire-DT module is
a fitted to each contactor and connected to
the SWD communication cable via the
SWD external device plug.
39)a90
In addition to contactor control, two
feedback signals can be sent to the
N F0
E;B
1E
E;Em
T\R\)RT i<\:
F AQ[:Q(9
a
] ) )
F ] 0 FLF] FLaF
ONP O
6P
9F
FLF3 FLaa 3L3]
3L33 3LF]
3LF3
a 3 W
3L3] FLF]
F ] 0 9F 9F
3L33 FLF3
9FF
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
a 3 W
o F a ] 3
SmartWire-DT communication system
F a3
9FF o
a
F
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
]
9F
)h)RT<A7 T\R\)R i<\:
F AQ[:Q(9 AQ[:Q(9 AQ[:Q(9
a
] ) ) )
F ] 0 FLF] FLaF
ONP O
6P
9F
FLF3 FLaa 3L3]
aF aF
3L33 3LF]
9Fa 9FF
3LF3 aa aa
a 3 W
3L3] FLF]
F ] 0 F ] 0 9F 9F
3L33 FLF3
9FF 9Fa
a 3 W a 3 W
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
o F a ] 3 o F a ] 3
F a3 F a3
SmartWire-DT communication system
9FF o 9Fa o
a a
F
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
]
9F
E;EE
1E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
T\R\)R i<\:
The auxiliary contact for the electrical
The DOL starters are assembled from a enable X3-X4 is connected at the factory
with a link. If electrical locks are envisaged
1E
PKE12/ PKE32 with the PKE-XTUA- trip
block and a DILM7 to DILM32 contactor. in the application, the link can be removed
The connection to SmartWire-DT is and a potential-free contact can be
implemented with the PKE-SWD-32 connected.
module. This is fitted to the contactor and The auxiliary contact for the electrical
connected to the SWD communication enable can be used on the PKE-SWD-32 for
cable via the SWD device plug. safety-related control sections (e.g. safety
shutdown of the drive).
Figure, page 1-14
N F0
E
N F0
E;Ea
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
)h)RT<A7 T\R\)R i<\:
The reversing starters are made up from a The auxiliary contact for the electrical
PKE12/PKE32 with a PKE-XTUA- trip
block and two contactors DILM7 to
enable X3-X4 can be used on the
PKE_SWD-32 for safety-related control
1E
DILM32. The PKE-SWD-32 is fitted on one sections. The wiring sets DILM12-XRL and
of the two contactors of the reversing PKZM0-XRM12 must not be used for the
starter. Unlike DOL starters, the control of assembly of the reversing starters.
the second contactor for reversing starters The A2 connections of the contactors must
must be implemented with a SmartWire-DT not be bridged.
contactor module (DIL-SWD-32-). Both
Figure, page 1-15
SWD modules are then connected to the
SWD communication cable via the SWD
device plug.
The "Enable" X3-X4 auxiliary contact is
factory fitted with a link. For the electrical
interlocking of the two contactors this link
is removed and the auxiliary breaker
(contacts 21-22) of the other contactor is
linked in as a potential-free contact.
E;E^
1E
E;E5
T\R\)RT i<\:
F AQ[:Q(9
a
] ) )
F ] 0
9F
a 3 W
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
F ] 0 Fo
9FF
a 3 W
SmartWire-DT communication system
] 3
F a3
9FF o
a
F
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
]
9F
)h)RT<A7 T\R\)R i<\:
F AQ[:Q(9 AQ[:Q(9
a
] ) ) )
F ] 0
9F
a 3 W
aF aF
9Fa Fo 9FF
aa aa
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
F ] 0 F ] 0
9FF 9Fa ] 3 o F a ] 3
a 3 W a 3 W
SmartWire-DT communication system
F a3 F a3
9FF o 9Fa o
a a
99]a
99]a9LLL
F
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
]
9F
E;E3
1E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
\R;')?\ T\R\)R
<\: @R\<R); @D'c?)T 2DR <\: @R\<R); $DA\$\DR @D'c?) A'
5;3E \<@<A7 R)?k
1E They control the contactors so that the
terminals A1-A2 of the contactors do not The SWD contactor module for DILM
have to be wired. A return signal is also controls the mains contactor Q11 so that
given back to the SmartWire-DT system via the terminals A1-A2 do not have to be
the SWD contactor modules for DILM. wired. A return signal is also given back to
The terminals X3-X4 are supplied with a the SmartWire-DT system via the SWD
bridging connection. For the electrical protective module for DILM.
interlocking of the two contactors this The control and the changeover between
bridge is removed and the auxiliary breaker star contactor and delta contactor have
(contacts 21-22) of the other contactor is the same wiring and function as the
linked in as a potential-free contact. conventional star-delta starter assembly.
Figure, page 1-18 Figure, page 1-20
<\: @R\<R); Z;@D'c?)
3;;5a
The SmartWire-DT I/O module actuates the
contactor Q11 via the digital relay output
Q0. The further procedure is the same as
that of a conventional star-delta starter.
The inputs of the SmartWire-DT I/O module
are used to implement return signals to the
SmartWire-DT system.
Figure, page 1-19
E;EX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
<\:
A' @D'c?)T 2DR <\:
& @D'c?)T 2DR @<AT
The star-delta starters are made up from a $DA\$\DR A' 5;3E \<@<A7 R)?k
PKE12/PKE32 with a PKE-XTUA- trip The star-delta starters are made up from a
block and three contactors DILM7 to PKE12/PKE32 with a PKE-XTUA- trip 1E
DILM32. The PKE-SWD-32 is fitted to the block and three contactors DILM7 to
mains contactor of the star-delta starter. DILM32. The PKE-SWD-32 is fitted to the
The star and delta contactor is actuated mains contactor of the star-delta starter.
with SmartWire-DT contactor modules The star-delta contactor is actuated in a
(DIL-SWD-32-). conventional circuit. The PKE-SWD-32
All SWD modules are then connected to module is connected to the SWD
the SWD communication cable via the communication cable via the SWD device
SWD device plug. plug. The wiring sets DILM12-XRL and
PKZM0-XRM12 can be used for the
The "Enable" X3-X4 auxiliary contact is
assembly of a star-delta starter.
factory fitted with a link. For the electrical
interlocking of the star and delta contactor Figure, page 1-22
this link is removed and the auxiliary NC
contact (contacts 21-22) of the other
contactor is linked in as a potential-free
contact.
The auxiliary contact for the electrical
enable X3-X4 can be used on the
PKE_SWD-32 for safety-related control
sections.
The wiring sets DILM12-XRL and
PKZM0-XRM12 must not be used for the
assembly of a star-delta starter.
The A2 terminals of star and delta
connections must not be bridged.
Figure, page 1-21
E;EV
1E
E;E*
\R ')?\ T\R\)R i<\: ^ @R\<R); $DA\$\DR @D'c?)T
F AQ[:Q(9 AQ[:Q(9 AQ[:Q(9 AQ[:Q(9
a ) ) ) )
]
F ] 0
9F
a 3 W
FL0]
9F
FL03
o F a ] 3
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
F ] 0 F ] 0 F ] 0 a3
9FF 9Fa 9F] 9FF o
a 3 W a 3 W a 3 W
SmartWire-DT communication system
99]a aF
9F]
aa
o F a ] 3
a3
F F F a a a 9Fa o
F
99]a9LLL
aF
9Fa
F F F aa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
o F a ] 3
9F a3
]
9F] o
a a a
99]a9LLL
@R\<R); T\R;')?\ T\R\)R i<\: 3;;5a Z @D'c?)
F
oF
a FL0]
9F
] FL03
F ] 0 FL0] F]
9F 9a
FL03 F3 AQ[:Q(9 AQ[:Q(9
) )
6
6
6 Na3
a 3 W
0U WU F] F] F] G 9FF
9F 9F G b ^ b 9Fa
0) W) F3 F3 F3
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
F ] 0 F ] 0 F ] 0 ^ 9F]
9FF 9Fa 9F]
a 3 W a 3 W a 3 W
aa aa FL0]
SmartWire-DT communication system
F F F a a a
F N
o
F
a
] N
F F F
F F F
9FF 9F 9F] 9Fa 9a o F
a a a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
F] F3 a] a3
9F
]
oa
a a a
E;EB
1E
1E
E;am
\R ')?\ T\R\)R i<\: @R\<R); $DA\$\DR @D'c?) A' 5;3E \<@<A7 R)?k
F
oF
a
] FL0]
9F
FL03
F ] 0
9F F]
9FF
F3
F) a)
AQ[:Q(9 AQ[:Q(9 FU FU
) ) 9F 9F
a 3 W
aa aa
FL0]
9F 9Fa 9F]
aF aF
FL03
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
o F a ] 3
F ] 0 F ] 0 F ] 0 a3 F F F
9FF 9Fa 9F] 9FF o 9F 9F] 9Fa
a 3 W a 3 W a 3 W a a a
SmartWire-DT communication system
oa
F F F a a a
F
F F F
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
9F
]
a a a
\R ')?\ T\R\)R i<\:
A' @D'c?)T 2DR
F AQ[:Q(9 AQ[:Q(9 AQ[:Q(9 AQ[:Q(9
a ) ) ) )
]
F ] 0
9F
a 3 W AQ[:Q(9
Fo
FL0]
9F
FL03
o F a ] 3
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
F ] 0 F ] 0 F ] 0 a3
9FF 9Fa 9F] 9FF o
a 3 W a 3 W a 3 W
SmartWire-DT communication system
99]a aF
9F]
aa
o F a ] 3
a3
F F F a a a 9Fa o
F
99]a9LLL
aF
9Fa
F F F
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
aa
o F a ] 3
9F a3
]
9F] o
a a a
99]a9LLL
E;aE
1E
1E
E;aa
\R ')?\ T\R\)R i<\:
& @D'c?) 2DR @<AT $DA\$\DR A' 5;3E \<@<A7 R)?k
F
oF
a
] FL0]
9F
F ] 0 FL03
9F
F]
9FF
F3
F) a)
AQ[:Q(9 AQ[:Q(9 FU FU
) ) 9F 9F
a 3 W
Fo
aa aa
9Fa 9F]
aF aF
o F a ] 3
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
F ] 0 F ] 0 F ] 0 a3 F F F
9FF 9Fa 9F] 9FF o 9F 9F] 9Fa
a 3 W a 3 W a 3 W a a a
SmartWire-DT communication system
99]a
oa
F F F a a a
F
F F F
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
9F
]
a a a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
$<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
The NZM-XSWD-704 SmartWire-DT
module is used for querying a
circuit-breaker with an electronic release G
1E
(NZM2, 3, 4) via a PLC, i.e. the On/Off/Trip
position of the switch and the actual
currents. An optionally installed remote
operator can also be actuated via the
Q:H
module. The NZM-XSWD-704 is fitted on a
top-hat rail and is connected to the NZM
via a 2.0 m data cable. The auxiliary
contacts and the remote operator are
wired separately. The connection to the
SmartWire-DT ribbon cable is
implemented via the SWD device plug.
SmartWire-DT connection
]oWLa]oL]
Data cable NZM with NZM-XSWD-704
Auxiliary contacts in NZM
XMC energy metering device (external)
Remote operator b
G 4
^ a3
o
a3
F 9
oN
N%
aa9oF
o9
o 1
aa9Fo o
@ aoo A
F
o
o %
@ aoo A
Uo UF Ua U3
b
E;a^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
<?D\ )h<$)T These function elements are each
Simple pilot devices can be integrated available in two versions for front or base
directly in the SmartWire-DT fixing. Base fixing elements can be
1E communication system without any time combined to form remote operating and
consuming wiring. The function elements display devices using the M22-SWD-I
are snap fitted in the M22-A fixing adapter cards and the M22-I.. surface mounting
and then connected to the SWD enclosures to IP65.
communication cable via the SWD device
plug.
a ] F a ] F a ] F
,0''
0&M0+
MM00
'
MM00'
MM' MM00
E;a5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
<7<\? A' A?D7 T<7A? GRD$)TT<A7 Connection of digital actuators without
The following SWD modules are available integrated SWD functionality (signal
for processing digital or analog lights, timing relays ..)
input/output signals: Connection of any analog inputs/outputs 1E
EU5E-SWD-8DX 8 digital inputs
EU5E-SWD-4DX 4 digital inputs with
transmitter supply G
EU5E-SWD-4D4D 4 digital inputs and
4 digital outputs
EU5E-SWD-4D2R 4 digital inputs and
2 relay outputs 3 A
EU5E-SWD-X8D 8 digital outputs b
EU5E-SWD-4AX 4 analog inputs ^
0 10 V, 0 20 mA
EU5E-SWD-2A2A 2 analog inputs and
2 analog outputs
0 10 V, 0 20 mA
EU5E-SWD-4PT 4 temperature inputs 4
PT100, PT1000,
Ni1000
1
The modules are fitted directly on the
top-hat rail and then connected with the
SWD communication cable via the SWD
device plug. SmartWire-DT cable with external
device plug
The modules can be fitted directly in the
SmartWire-DT diagnostics LED
proximity of the sensors/actuators to be
Status display of inputs and outputs
connected. This also reduces the
(optional)
remaining wiring required.
Input/output terminals
The following applications are possible: External supply (optional)
Connection of AC contactors or high
rated contactors > DILM32 that do not
have a connection option for the
DIL-SWD- module. For this use the
EU5E-SWD-4D2R module.
Connection of auxiliary contacts to
modules with digital inputs
E;a3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
SmartWire-DT communication system
2)\k;R)?\)' GG?<$\<DAT
For most applications, disconnection in the )TcR)T 2DR :<7:)R T2)\k $\)7DRk
1E event of an emergency or the
disconnection by the opening of the
In many applications control systems with
a performance level of PL d or PL e
protective doors is also required in addition (PL = Performance Level) to
to normal operational switching. EN ISO 13849-1 are required. Control
The SmartWire-DT system is not designed systems with PL d can be set up using an
for the transfer of safety relevant signals. additional group contactor which is
Using the configuration described below, connected in series upstream of the motor
the SmartWire-DT system can however be feeders. The control voltage for the motor
used for safety relevant switch offs. contactors as well as for the group
contactor is switched off in an emergency
In an emergency the control voltage for the
via the safety relay. This redundant
contactor coils can be switched off via the
disconnection circuit enables the
enabling paths of the safety relay. By using
implementation of PL d control systems.
additional SmartWire-DT Power modules,
The safety relay used must comply with PL
contactor groups are made that can be
d or higher to achieve this safety category
switched off together in an emergency.
(e.g. ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC).
This type of circuit can be used to create
control systems up to PL c in accordance Further information on safety engineering
with EN ISO 13849-1 (PL = Performance for machines and plants is provided in the
Level). The safety relay in this example Eaton Safety Manual: www.eaton.eu/shb
must be PL c or higher (e.g.
ESR5-NO-41-24VAC-DC).
Figure, page 1-27
))'!$> $<R$c<\
The auxiliary contact integrated in the
contactor is a mirror contact according to
IEC/EC 60947-4-1. Using this contact the
state of the main contacts can be reliably
signalled. The mirror contact can be
included into the feedback circuit of the
safety relay so that the safety relay only
gives a new enable signal when the
contactor is open.
E;aX
$\c\<A7 $<R$c<\ 2DR T2)\k R)?)hA\ GG?<$\<DA
;
M
K
0; 0;
,VV V
0V; M
0V; M, V
M;
0V;
0VM 0VK 0V,
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
0
MM ;K MK
0
V; 0
V;
;, M,
M, V M, V M, V
SmartWire-DT communication system
0
VM 0
VK
J%RT :R%C0%%#%C
M;
0VM
MM 8 :8*1- 6CJ1C%0
0
V; ; M ; M K ;K MK KK ,;
ND
NJ :R%C 8 NJ
NJ
;
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
E;aV
1E
11
1-28
Mains circuit for safety relevant application
L1
L2
L3
PE
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q1 -Q2 -Q3 -Q4 -Q5
I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I>
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
Switching, control, visualization
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q11 2 4 6
-Q12 2 4 6
-Q13 2 4 6
-Q14 2 4 6
-Q15 2 4 6
SmartWire-DT communication system
PE
U V W PE U V W PE U V W PE U V W PE U V W PE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
U V W PE U V W PE U V W PE U V W PE U V W PE
1E
The international standard EN ISO 12100-1
Safety of machinery - Basic concepts,
general principles for design provides the
design engineer with detailed assistance
in the identification of hazards and the
resulting risks to be assessed.
This therefore lays down the technical
measures for the reduction of hazards.
The parts of machine control systems that
handle safety tasks are defined as the
safety-related parts of control systems
(SRP/CS). Safety-related control systems
comprise the entire safety function
consisting of the input level (sensor), the
The safety manual helps you by means of
logic (safety signal processing) and the
practical safety circuit examples and the
output level (actuator).
associated calculations to determine
For reducing risks by means of SRP/CS, safety performance in accordance with
Eaton offers the right components with EN ISO 13849-1 and IEC 62061.
safety technology in accordance with the
The Safety Manual is available online or in
most stringent requirements stipulated in
print:
the safety standards EN 954-1, EN ISO
13849-1 and EN IEC 62061. The appropriate Register at www.eaton.eu/shb and work
safety functions are used according to the online with the Safety Manual or
application area and in compliance with download the PDF version free of charge.
the required risk reduction. Order the current printed version from
Further information on the previous and the your wholesalers or your Eaton customer
new international safety standards as well service: PU05907001Z-EN,
as circuit examples for a wide range of Article no. 119906
applications are provided in the latest
version of the Eaton Safety Applications
Technical Guide PU05907001Z-EN.
E;aB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
The way to the safe machine
E;^m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
The way to the safe machine
D7<$ cA<\T \D )ATcR) T2)\k 2cA$\<DAT The ESR safety relays or the easySafety
Safety logic units enable the hardware control relay enable applications to be
required to be considerably reduced and implemented that meet the most stringent
primarily restricted to the sensor/actuator safety requirements in accordance with 1E
level. Eaton offers two logic series: international standards:
ESR5 Electronic safety relays Category 4 to EN 954-1
easySafety control relay suitable for Performance level PL e acc. to
safety circuits. EN ISO13849-1
Safety relays of the ESR5 series offer the Safety Integrity Level SIL CL 3 according
optimum solution for each application with to IEC 62061
tailored safety functions. The internal logic Safety Integrity Level SIL 3 according to
of the safety relay monitors the wired IEC 61508
safety circuits and activates the enable Eaton ensures the required level of
contacts in fault-free condition. personal or process protection using the
safety products approved by TV
The easySafety control relay offers a host
Rheinland for both simple and complex
of integrated safety relays in the form of
machines.
safety function blocks in a single device,
thus offering maximum flexibility in a
considerable space saving design.
easySafety is used for monitoring all
typical safety devices and also
implementing the control tasks required on
the machine.
E;^E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
The way to the safe machine
DA<\DR<A7 @Dh!?) 7cR' i<\: 3 cA$\<DA
Moving guards such as safety doors, gates The safety logic unit provides two separate
1E
and flaps can be used to provide protection input circuits for two-channel applications,
from accessible hazardous areas. The which monitor the sensor (such as the
position of moving guards is detected with position switch of an interlock device).
position switches or non-contacting After the input circuits are closed, the
contact sensors that are monitored and safety relay can be started by means of a
evaluated with a safety logic unit. A risk reset button. This activates the enable and
analysis supplies the necessary degree of signal current paths and switches on the
risk reduction by the guard. connected actuators. Positively driven
auxiliary contacts of the actuators are
used by the safety relay to diagnose
possible safety states.
( '
(
E;^a
Circuit example: Two-channel guard door monitoring with ESR5
24 V
L1 L1 0V
L2 L2 24V1
L3 L3 0V1
1
1
-F1 -F2
2
2
L1
L2
L3
-Q3
21
I> I> I>
-Q1
T1
T2
T3
21 22
The way to the safe machine
13
23
33
-Q2
A1
A2
22
S11
S33
S34
S12
21
ESR5-NO-21-24VAC-DC
-B1 -K11
Power
22
Switching, control, visualization
24 V AC/AC
K1
13
Logic
1
3
5
K2
-B2
2
4
6
-Q1
14
24 V DC
N/O
S21
S22
14
24
34
actuated
1
3
5
2
4
6
-Q2
A1
A1
PE
-Q1 -Q2
A2
A2
U1
V1
W1
PE
-X1
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
U
V
W
M PE
3
1-33
11
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
The way to the safe machine
\DGG<A7 <A $T) D2 )@)R7)A$k i<\: its interruption are implemented in the
)Tk2)\k program. The two contactors drop out, and
a restart is possible by pressing the START
1E The Emergency-stop function is an
additional protective measure and is not actuator. If the hazardous movement is
permissible as the sole means of stopped by pressing the Emergency-stop
protection. Machinery Directive actuator S4, the enable for outputs QS1 and
2006/42/EC stipulates however that every QS2 is removed and the contactors drop
machine must be provided with a device out. A restart is only possible after the
for stopping in an emergency (Emergency Emergency-stop actuator is reset and
stop). The degree of risk reduction by the enabled by pressing the RESET
Emergency stop device must be pushbutton. The drive can be braked
determined by means of a risk assessment. actively by using output QS4. However, this
If the immediate disconnection of the option is not included in the safety
power supply does not cause hazardous consideration since the frequency inverter
states, you can use an uncontrolled Stop does not support the safe braking
function in accordance with Stop category operation.
0 to EN ISO 13850.
2)\k \)$:A<$? TT)TT@)A\
( '
(
cA$\<DA
The Emergency-stop actuator S4 must be
in the enable position (NC contacts closed)
so that the enable signal can be issued via
the RESET pushbutton S3. Pressing the
START pushbutton S1 starts the hazardous
movement. The self-latching function and
E;^5
<R$c<\ )j@G?)% iD;$:AA)? @)R7)A$k;T\DG @DA<\DR<A7 i<\: )Tk2)\k
F
F
a
a
]
] Na3
o
F
a
]
a
a
F
F
93 9a 9F
F]
F]
aF
9F 9a 9]
aa
6
6
6
F3
F3
[Q[ [EH (S([
F
a
]
FF
aF
aF
FF
9F 93
aa
aa
F
]
0
Fa
9F
aF
F3
a
3
W
9F
9a
aa
F
]
0
a
3
W
9a
Na3 o o
F
a
]
3
0
W
U
)
C
Fo
FF
Fa
F]
F3
The way to the safe machine
9F
a3
BHc[ F3 l
F
F
F
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
F
F]
9F a
a
9F 9]
F ]
F3
a
a
a
3
F
a
]
39aaF9F
9a
a
3
W
)
c[Hc[ Fl (>m Y W 3l QBS:S[EQ Y o%0 3l (S[ :5B>
F a
F
a
0
F
a
]
F Na3 o F a ] 3 F a ] 3
a3
9F
N
9
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
Fa
F3
FF
F
F
F
F
F
F
9F
9F 9a 9]
a
a
a
F
F
F
]`
E;^3
1E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Timing relays
Electronic timing relays are used in Multifunction relays DILET70,
contactor control systems which require ETR 4-69/70
short reset times, high repetition accuracy, cA$\<DA EE (on-delayed)
1E high operating frequency, and a long cA$\<DA Ea (off-delayed)
component lifespan. Times between 0.05 s cA$\<DA EX (on- and off-delayed)
and 100 h can be easily selected and set. cA$\<DA aE(fleeting contact on
The switching capacity of electronic timing energization)
relays complies with the utilization cA$\<DA aa (fleeting contact on
categories AC-15 and DC-13. de-energization)
cA$\<DA 5a (flashing, pulse initiating)
In terms of the actuating voltages there are
cA$\<DA *E (pulse generating)
with timing relays the following
cA$\<DA *a (pulse shaping)
differences:
&
)RT<DA (DILET and ETR4) Multifunction relay ETR2-69(-D)
Universal devices:
cA$\<DA EE (on-delayed)
DC 24 to 240 V cA$\<DA Ea (off-delayed)
AC 24 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz cA$\<DA aE (fleeting contact on
)RT<DA (DILET and ETR4) energization)
AC devices: cA$\<DA aa (fleeting contact on
AC 346 to 440 V, 50/60 Hz de-energization)
a- (as modular installation device to cA$\<DA 5a (flashing, pulse initiating)
DIN 43880) cA$\<DA 5^ (flashing, pause initiating)
Universal devices: cA$\<DA *a (pulse initiating)
DC 24 to 48 V
Star-delta timing relays ETR4-51
AC 24 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz cA$\<DA 3E (on-delayed)
(ETR2-69-D: 12 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz)
The functions of each of the timing relays
With both DILET70 and ETR4-70 an external
are as follows:
potentiometer can be connected. Upon
DILET11, ETR4-11,ETR2-11 connection, both timing relays
cA$\<DA EE (on-delayed) automatically recognize that a
ETR2-12 potentiometer is fitted.
cA$\<DA Ea (off-delayed) The ETR4-70 has a special feature.
ETR2-21 Equipped with two changeover contacts
cA$\<DA aE (fleeting contact on which can be converted to two timing
energization) contacts 15-18 and 25-28 (A2-X1 linked) or
ETR2-42 one timing contact 15-18 and a
cA$\<DA 5a (flashing, pulse initiating) non-delayed contact 21-24 (A2-X1 not
ETR2-44 linked). If the link A2-X1 is removed, only
cA$\<DA 55 (flashing, two speeds; can be the timed contact 15-18 carries out the
set to either pulse initiating or pause functions described below.
initiating)
E;^X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Timing relays
cA$\<DA EE cA$\<DA EX
On-delayed On- and Off-delayed
;0M ;0M 1E
;+0;& ;0M
J ;
;+0;&
J J =M+0M&>
The actuating voltage Us is applied via an
actuating contact to the terminals A1 and The supply voltage Us is applied directly to
A2. the terminals A1 and A2. If the terminals Y1
After the set delay time the changeover and Y2 in the DILET70 are linked by a
contact of the output relay goes to the potential-free N/O contact, or in the case of
position 15-18 (25-28). of the ETR4-69/70 a potential is applied to
B1, after a set time t the changeover
cA$\<DA Ea contact goes to the position 15-18 (25-28).
If the connection Y1-Y2 is now interrupted,
Off-delayed
or B1 is separated from the potential, the
;0M changeover contact goes back to its
;0M original position 15-16 (25-26) after the
; same time t.
;+0;&
J =M+0M&>
cA$\<DA aE
After the supply voltage has been applied
to the terminals A1 and A2, the changeover Fleeting contact on energization
contact of the output relay remains in the
;0M
original position 15-16 (25-26). If the
terminals Y1 and Y2 in the DILET70 are ;+0;&
J =M+0M&>
linked by a potential-free N/O contact or, in
the case of the ETR4-69/70 or ETR2-69, a
After the voltage Us has been applied to A1
potential is applied to B1, the changeover
and A2, the changeover contact of the
contact changes without delay to the
output relay goes to position 15-18 (25-28)
position 15-18 (25-28).
and remains actuated for as long as the set
If the connection between the terminals fleeting contact time.
Y1Y2 is now interrupted, or B1 is
A fleeting pulse (terminals 1-2, 15-18) of
separated from the potential, once the set
defined duration is therefore produced
time has elapsed, the changeover contact
from a two-wire control process (voltage
returns to its original position 15-16
on A25/A28) by this function.
(25-26).
E;^V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Timing relays
cA$\<DA *a contact. After the set delay time has
Pulse shaping elapsed the changeover contact of the
output relay goes to position 15-18 (25-28)
1E ;0M and returns to its original position 15-16
;0M (25-26) after 0.5 s. This function is therefore
;
;+0;&
a fleeting pulse with a time delay.
J =M+0M&>
cA$\<DA aa
After the supply voltage has been applied
to A1 and A2, the changeover contact of Fleeting contact on de-energization
the output relay remains in the rest position ;0M
15-16 (25-26). If the terminals Y1 and Y2 in
;0M
the DILET70 are linked by a potential-free ;
N/O contact, or in the case of the ;+0;&
J =M+0M&>
ETR4-69/70 or ETR2-69, a potential is
applied to B1, the changeover contact The supply voltage Us is present directly at
changes without delay to the position 15-18 A1 and A2. If the terminals Y1 and Y2 of the
(25-28). DILET70 that have been shorted (DILET-70
If Y1Y2 is now opened again, or B1 is is potential-free) at any time beforehand are
kept with the potential, the changeover opened again, or with ETR4-69/70 or
contact remains actuated until the set time ETR2-69 the contact B1 becomes
has elapsed. If, instead, Y1Y2 remain potential-free again, the contact 15-18
closed or B1 is separated from the (25-28) closes for the duration of the set
potential for longer, the output relay time.
likewise changes back to its rest position
after the set time. An output pulse of cA$\<DA 5a
precisely defined duration is thus
Flashing, pulse initiating
produced in the pulse shaping function,
irrespective of whether the input pulse via ;0M
Y1Y2 or B1 is shorter or longer than the set ;+0;&
time. =M+0M&>
J J J J
1-39
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
EMR measuring and monitoring relays
Measurement and monitoring relays are changeover contacts allow for a direct
required for a wide range of applications. feedback.
With the new EMR range Eaton covers a
)?)$\)' !R<'7<A7 D2 T:DR\ $cRR)A\ G)>T
1E large number of requirements:
By using the selectable response delay of
general use, EMR...-I current monitoring between 0.05 and 30 s short current peaks
relay can be bridged.
space saving monitoring of the rotation
field, EMR...-F phase sequence relay
:T) @DA<\DR<A7 R)?k JJJ;
Protection against destruction or
damage of single system parts,
EMR-(A)W(N) phase monitoring relay
safe recognition of phase failure,
EMR...-A phase imbalance monitoring
relay
enhanced safety by open-circuit
principle, EMR...-N liquid level
monitoring relay
increase of the operational safety, TheEMR...-W phase monitoring relay
EMR...-R insulation monitoring relay monitors the voltage as well as the rotation
field rotation. This provides protection from
the destruction or damage of individual
JJJ; cRR)A\ @DA<\DR<A7 R)?k system parts. The minimum undervoltage
and also the maximum overvoltage can be
set here easily, within a defined range to
the required voltage.
An on-delayed or off-delayed function can
also be set. In the on-delayed position
short voltage drops can be bridged. The
off-delayed position allows for a fault
storage for the set time.
The EMR-I current monitoring relay is The delay time can be set between 0.1 und
suitable for the monitoring of AC as well as
10 s.
DC current. Pumps and drill machines can
be monitored for underload or overload. The relay activates with the correct
This is possible due to the selectable lower rotation field and voltage. After a drop-out
or upper threshold limit. the device does not reactive until the
voltage exceeds a 5 % hysteresis.
There are two versions each with three
measuring ranges (30/100/1000 mA,
1.5/5/15 A). The multi-voltage coil allows
universal use of the relay. The two auxiliary
E;5m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
EMR measuring and monitoring relays
JJJ; G:T) T)Lc)A$) R)?k detected even with a higher motor
feedback and an overload of the motor can
be prevented.
1E
JJJ; ?<Lc<' ?)h)? @DA<\DR<A7 R)?k
E;5E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
Switching, control, visualization
EMR measuring and monitoring relays
EMR...-R Insulation monitoring relay EMR...-AW(N) multifunctional
three-phase monitors
11
1-42
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
System overview &Relay, MFD-Titan
3mmZVmm $DA\RD? R)?kT f
F ] 1E
3
]
F
0
W
a U
)
9
E;5^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
System overview &Relay, MFD-Titan
*mm $DA\RD? R)?k
1E a
F ]
F a
F0
F0
3
0
W
U
F3
Fo
FF
C% Fa
Fo
F]
Fa
E;55
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
System overview &Relay, MFD-Titan
1 easy800 basic devices, expandable:
Digital inputs/outputs and
Bus systems, easyNet onboard
2 Remote text display 1E
3 Ethernet gateway
4 PROFIBUS-DP bus module
5 AS-Interface bus module
6 CANopen bus module
7 DeviceNet bus module
8 Output expansion
9, 10 I/O expansions
11 Coupling module for the remote
connection of a digital
input/output expansion
12 I/O expansion
13 easyControl compact PLC
14 easySafety control relay
15 MFD-Titan multi-function display
E;53
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
System overview &Relay, MFD-Titan
;<\A @c?\<;2cA$\<DA '<TG?k
1E
F
F a
F3
]
3
0
W
F]
F]
C
FF
)% Fo
Fo
E;5X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
System overview &Relay, MFD-Titan
1 MFD-Titan, consisting of:
Display/operating unit
Power supply unit/CPU module,
I/O module 1E
2 Ethernet gateway
3 PROFIBUS-DP bus module
4 AS-Interface bus module
5 CANopen bus module
6 DeviceNet bus module
7 Output expansion
8, 9, 10 I/O expansions
11 Coupling module for the remote
connection of a digital
input/output expansion
12 Compact PLC &Control
13 easySafety
easycontrol relays
14 easy 800 control relays
E;5V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
System overview &Relay, MFD-Titan
cA$\<DAT
f3mm A' fVmm H;I;*- A' *mm
1E
E;5*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
System overview &Relay, MFD-Titan
)@D\) '<TG?k& \)j\ '<TG?k 2DR )Tk R)?k
1E
E;5B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
Di)R TcGG?k $DAA)$\<DA
2DR ')h<$)T 2DR ')h<$)T
1E A
(
. ; @; . ; A@;
A@@@ V V
E;3m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
<7<\? <AGc\ $DAA)$\<DA D2 \:) ')h<$)T
F
1E
Foo B
YaU0 `
Foo B
F3ooU
YaU0 ` F =
F
G b ^ 4 1 X V *
Input signal via relay contact e.g. DILER D\)T
Input signal via RMQ-Titan pushbutton Due to the additional circuit the drop out
Input signal via position switch e.g. delay of the input is increased.
LS-Titan Length of input conductor without
Additional circuit with diode additional circuit 40 m, with additional
( Notes) circuit 100 m.
Increased input current Inputs I7, I8 already have an internal
Limiting the input current additional circuit.
Increasing the input current with
EASY256-HCI
EASY256-HCI upstream device with
internal additional circuit ( Notes)
E;3E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
<7<\? <AGc\ $DAA)$\<DA D2 \:) ')h<$)T
N
1E ,
G b ^ 4 1
Input signal via relay contact e.g. DILER D\)T
Input signal via RMQ-Titan pushbutton With conductor length consider also the
Input signal via position switch voltage drop.
e.g. LS-Titan Due to the high residual current do not
Proximity switch, three wire use two-wire proximity switches.
Proximity switch, four wire
E;3a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
A?D7 <AGc\T
Depending upon the device two or four 0 to Supplying loads such as motors, solenoid
10 V analog inputs are available.
The resolution is 10-bit = 0 to 1023.
valves or contactors and easy from the
same supply voltage may cause
1E
interference of the analog input signals
The following applies:
when switching. Connect therefore
I7 = IA01 inductive loads to be switched via the
EASY512-AB/DA/DC easy outputs to a separate supply
I8 = IA02
voltage, or use a suppressor circuit for
EASY719-AB/DA/DC motors and valves.
EASY721-DC
I11 = IA03 EASY819/820/821/822-DC
MFD-R16, MFD-R17,
I12 = IA04 MFD-T16, MFD-TA17
RA<A71
Incorrect connection may lead to
unwanted switching states. Analog signals
are more sensitive to interference than
digital signals, therefore the signal cables
should be carefully routed and connected.
Use shielded twisted pair cables to
prevent interference with the analog
signals.
For short cable lengths, ground the
shielding at both ends using a large
contact area. If the cable length is more
than around 30 m, grounding at both ends
can result in equalization currents
between the two grounding points and
thus in the interference of analog signals.
In this case, only ground the cable at one
end.
Do not lay signal lines parallel to power
cables.
E;3^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
DAA)$\<A7 GDi)R TcGG?k A' A?D7 <AGc\T 2DR )Tk- ')h<$)
1E
MVV0
A;M
V
V;
;
V;
; F &
E;35
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
A?D7 <AGc\ $DAA)$\<DAT \D )TkJJJZ JJJ DR ;JJJZJJJ
N
, 1E
3LLLao A
IoLLLao AJ
NLL
` 9o
c[
oLLLFo 9]0LLL00 ' 0oo
NFa o
NLLL o o
G b ^ 4
Setpoint potentiometer via separate D\)T
power supply and potentiometer 1 k, Pay attention to the differing number and
e.g. 1 k, 0.25 W designation of the analog inputs of each
Setpoint potentiometer with upstream device type.
resistor 1.3 k, 0.25 W, potentiometer Connect the 0 V of the or the MFD-Titan
1 k, 0.25 W (values for 24 V DC) with the 0 V of the power supply of the
Temperature monitoring via analog transmitter.
temperature sensor and transducer A 4(0) to 20 mA sensor and a resistor of
Sensor 4 to 20 mA with resistor 500 500 give the following approx. values:
4 mA 1.9 V,
10 mA 4.8 V,
20 mA 9.5 V.
Analog input 0 to 10 V,
resolution 10 bit, 0 to 1023.
E;33
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
DAA)$\<A7 \EmmZ<Emmm i<\: ;HI-
1E
D\)T
Cable length, shielded < 10 m.
E;3X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
DAA)$\<DA DG\<DAT 2DR \:) O
<7:;TG))' $DcA\)RP <AGc\T DA )Tk-Z ')h<$)T DR
;-Z;-
N N 1E
, ,
G b ^
E;3V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
DAA)$\<DA D2 R)?k Dc\Gc\T 2DR JJJ JJJJ
1E ; M ; M ; M ; M ; M
RD\)$\<h) )?)@)A\ @<A GD?) JJ Filament lamp, max. 1000 W at
230/240 V AC
Fluorescent tube, max. 10 x 28 W with
electronic upstream device,
1 x 58 W with conventional upstream
device at 230/240 V AC
8 A/B16 AC motor
Valve
DTT<!?) hD?\7) RA7)% Coil
24 to 250 V, 50/60 Hz
e.g. L1, L2, L3 phase to zero conductor
DTT<!?) hD?\7) RA7)%
12 to 300 V DC
E;3*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
DAA)$\<DA D2 \RAT<T\DR Dc\Gc\T 2DR JJJ JJJ
1E
9 D& J
D8%
3J8J
D&
Contactor coil with zener diode connected as close as possible to the
as suppressor circuit, inductance.
0.5 A at 24 V DC
If inductances are not suppressed, the
Valve with diode as suppressor following applies:
circuit, Several inductances should not be
0.5 A at 24 V DC
switched off simultaneously to avoid
Resistor, overheating the driver blocks in the worst
0.5 A at 24 V DC possible case. If in the event of an
emergency stop the +24 V DC power supply
Indicator light 3 or 5 W at 24 V DC,
Output dependent on device is to be switched off by means of a contact,
types and outputs and if this would mean switching off more
than one controlled output with an
D\)T
inductance, these inductances must be
Please note the following when switching provided with a suppressor circuit.
off inductive loads: Suppressed
inductances cause less interference in the
entire electrical system. It is generally
recommended that to the suppressor is
E;3B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
R??)? $DAA)$\<DA D\)T
The outputs may only be connected in
parallel within a group (Q1 to Q4 or Q5 to
1E Q8, S1 to S4 or S5 to S8); Q1 and Q3 or Q5,
Q7 and Q8. Parallel outputs must be
activated simultaneously.
if 4 outputs in parallel,
max. 2 A at 24 V DC
if 4 outputs in parallel,
max. 2 A at 24 V DC
Inductances without suppression
circuit max. 16 mH
12 or 20 W at 24 V DC
Output dependent on device types
and outputs
V
Resistor
E;Xm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
DAA)$\<DA D2 A?D7 Dc\Gc\T 2DR *am;;-& *aa;;-& ;-&
;-
N
1E
,
o
NLLL o o o F o F
G b
E;XE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
Z )jGAT<DA
)A\R? )jGAT<DA& cG \D 5m Z )\iDR><A7 h< )Tk)\& cG \D ^am Z
1E easy700, easy800, MFD(-AC)-CP8 can be
expanded via easy202, easy410, easy618 or
Up to eight stations can be interconnected
by expanding the inputs and outputs via
easy620. Up to 24 inputs and 16 outputs are easyNet. An expansion device can be
provided. An expansion is possible with added to each easy800 or MFD(-AC)-CP8
each basic unit, Section easy central A network length of up to 1000 m is
and remote expansion module, page 1-63. possible. There are two types of operation:
)@D\) )jGAT<DA& cG \D 5m Z A master (position 1, user address 1) and
easy700, easy800 and MFD-Titan can be up to 7 other modules. The program is
expanded via the coupling module contained in the master.
easy200-EASY with easy410, easy618 or A master (position 1, user address 1) and
easy620. The expansion unit can be up to 7 other intelligent or dumb
operated up to 30 m from the basic device. modules. Each intelligent module has a
There are a maximum of 24 inputs and 16 program.
outputs available. One expansion unit per Section easyNet, loop through the
basic device is possible, Section easy device network connection, page 1-64
central and remote expansion module,
page 1-63.
E;Xa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
)Tk $)A\R? A' R)@D\) )jGAT<DA @D'c?)
F a
F 9
LLL F 9 LLL )A\R? )jGAT<DA 1E
F 9 LLL F 9 LLL
easy700 easy202
easy800 easy410
easy618, easy620
F a N 9
F 9
LLL F 9 LLL )@D\) )jGAT<DA
@ ]o A
F 9 LLL F 9 LLL
N 9
F 9 LLL
MFD-AC-CP8 easy202
MFD-CP8 easy410
MFD-CP10 easy618, easy620
)@D\) )jGAT<DA
N 9
F 9 LLL
@ ]o A
F 9 LLL
N 9
EASY-LINK-DS
E;X^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
)Tk)\& O?DDG \:RDc7: \:) ')h<$)P A)\iDR> $DAA)$\<DA
1 1 1
easy800
2 2 3
easy800 easy800
easy618
easy620
3 3 8
MFD-AC-CP8 easy800
MFD-CP8 easy200 easy618
MFD-CP10 easy620
8 8 2
easy800 easy202
E;X5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
)Tk)\& A)\iDR> $DAA)$\<DA O $DAA)$\DR i<\: T\c! ?<A)P
1 1 1
easy800 @ oL] A
2 2 3
easy800 easy800
easy618
easy620 @ oL] A
3 3 8
MFD-AC-CP8 easy800
MFD-CP8 easy200 easy618
MFD-CP10 easy620
8 8 2
easy800 easy202
1) The geographic location/position 1 ?ikT has
EASY-LINK-DS
the station address 1.
Addressing the stations: If easyNet is interrupted between the T
Single addressing on corresponding station connector and the station, or a station is not
or via easySoft on every station. operational, the network is still active for the
The max. total length, including stub lines, with remaining stations.
easyNet is 1000 m. 4 core cable unshielded, each two cores
The max. stub line's length of the T connector to twisted. Three cores are required.
easy800 or to MFD-Titan is 0.30 m. Characteristic impedance of the cable must be
120 .
E;X3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
)Tk)\ A)\iDR> $DAA)$\<DA
53 TD$>)\T A' G?c7T R)\<A7 \:) A)\iDR> $!?) 2DR f)\
1E Pin assignment of RJ45 socket on easy and
MFD.
The characteristic impedance of the cable
must be 120 .
The network cable does not require any
* shielding braid.
8 However, if a shielding braid is used, it
7 should be connected to PE.
D\)T
3 Cable lengths and cross-sections
2 Table, page 1-68.
Pin assignment of the RJ45 plug on the The minimum operation with &Net
easy, MFD(-AC)-CP8/CP10.... functions with cables ECAN_H, ECAN_L,
GND. The SEL_IN cable is only used for
* automatic addressing.
8 A 1 ECAN_H
7 A 2 ECAN_L
B 3 GND (Ground)
B 4 SEL_IN
3
2 cT \)R@<A\<A7 R)T<T\DR
A bus terminal resisting must be connected
Cable entry side to the geographical first and last station in
8-pole RJ45, EASY-NT-RJ45 the network:
Value of the bus terminal resisting 124 ,
TT<7A@)A\ i<\: )Tk
Connect to PIN 1 and PIN 2 of the RJ45
PIN 1: ECAN_H; Data cable;
plug,
conductor pair A
Terminating connector : EASY-NT-R.
PIN 2: ECAN_L; Data cable;
conductor pair A
PIN 3: GND; ground conductor;
conductor pair B
PIN 4: SEL_IN; Select conductor;
conductor pair B
E;XX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
R)2!R<$\)' $!?)T& 53 G?c7 \ !D\: ?$c?\<A7 ?)A7\: i<\: >ADiA $!?)
)A'T $RDTT;T)$\<DA
!?) ?)A7\: "$@# R\ ADJ
For a known conductor cross section the
maximum conductor length is calculated. 1E
lmax = Length of cable in m
30 EASY-NT-30
S = Cable cross-section in mm2
80 EASY-NT-80 cu = Resistivity of copper, if not
150 EASY-NT-150
otherwise stated 0.018 mm2/m
l cu
Smin =
12.4
D\)T
If the result of the calculation does not
yield a standard cross-section, the next
larger cross-section is used.
E;XV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
)R@<TT<!?) A)\iDR> ?)A7\:T i<\:
)Tk)\
D\? ?)A7\: D2 RAT@<TT<DA !?) $RDTT;T)$\<DA& cT $!?)& @<A<@c@
1E )Tk)\ $!?) TG))' T\A'R'<l)' $!?) $RDTT;T)$\<DA
@
!<\ZT @@2 @@2
6 1000 0.14 26 0.10
25 500 0.14 26 0.10
40 250 0.14 26 0.10
125 1251) 0.25 24 0.18
175 50 0.25 23 0.25
250 50 0.38 21 0.36
300 50 0.50 20 0.44
400 20 0.75 19 0.58
600 20 1.0 17 0.87
700 20 1.5 17 1.02
1 000 = 10 1.5 15 1.45
1) Default setting
E;X*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
)\iDR> $DAA)$\<DA DA $!?)
$RDTT;T)$\<DAT 8 mJE5 @@2& aX
)\iDR> $DAA)$\ O\:RDc7: \:) )\iDR> $DAA)$\<DA O $DAA)$\DR i<\:
')h<$)P T\c! ?<A)P
1E
Example A, with terminals Example A, with terminals
F F
a
] a
3
]
F
G a
] ^ 3
30 30 3 30
easy800 easy800
MFD-CP8 MFD-CP8
) W 3 a
U 0 ] F
) W 3 a
U 0 ] F
30 30
b 4
) W 3 a
U 0 ] F
30
30 30 30
easy800 easy800
MFD-CP8 MFD-CP8
E;XB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
jGAT<DA cA<\T 2DR A)\iDR><A7
1E
easy700, easy800
MFDCP8
MFDCP10
An expansion unit for networking can be Further information can be found in the
connected with easy700, easy800 or manuals:
MFD(-AC)-CP8- The expansion unit for MN05013003Z-EN
networking is integrated as slave in the easy500, easy700, control relays
configuration. MN04902001Z-EN
The inputs and output points can be easy800, control relays
expanded via easyNet MN05002001Z-EN
( Section easyNet, network MFD-Titan multi-function display
connection T connector with stub line, MN05013005Z-EN
page 1-65 and Section easyNet, EASY204-DP
network connection T connector with MN05013008Z-EN
stub line, page 1-65). EASY221-CO
MN05013007Z-EN
EASY222-DN
E;Vm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
)@D\) '<TG?k <A X3
N
LF
LF
,
1E
6F 6F
N a3 o
FF0Ya]o (Sm)oo
0oYWo n
(SmUoo
939)oo90 @0A
LLL3LLL
(Sm0oo
9)oLLL
9390oo90
@0A
E;VE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
)Tk $D@@cA<$\<DA $DAA)$\<DAT
(Sm0oo (SmUoo
1E 99
99
G 99
b 99
Gb^ ^
9390oo90
aoC9 909LLL
939)oo90
b^
(Sm)oo LLL)YFoLLL
)oo99
)oo99
)oo99
E;Va
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
amB; T\A'R' $DAA)$\<DA \:)RA)\ $DAA)$\<DA
; A
M ( 1E
M K A
,
+
G (
; F
&
$DAA)$\<DA
$ %
Ethernet connection (RJ45 socket)
Status LED (POW/RUN) ;
M
COM connection, spring-cage terminal K
,
5-pole +
RESET pushbutton
Power supply device 24 V DC V
Device label
press % insert $ remove
Strain relief
1 = grey
a5 $DAA)$\<DA 2 = brown
AM,
3 = yellow
4 = white
V
5 = green
.;
AM, V
E;V^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
;
$DAA)$\<DA
9)o+ +)YFo+ (Sm)oo +)YFo+
LLLLYLL LLLLYLL
1E
9:&(
E;V5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
DAA)$\<A7 A' DG)R\<A7 \:) *mm DA \:) T)R<? ?D7 GR<A\)R
An SP (SP = serial protocol) module can be
used to directly send data to the log printer
via the serial PC interface on the front of
1E
the device. More information on this is
provided in the easySoft-PRO help.
%DT&VV Serially
controlled
printer
&VV00
2 white T x D
* 8 7 * 8 7
3 brown R x D
3 2 ( 3 2 (
5 green GND
E;V3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Engineering &Relay, MFD-Titan
DAA)$\<DA A' @D')@ DG)R\<DA i<\: )Tk DR
%DTFVV %DT&VV
1E %DT+VV
@@@&@@@
&VV00
00 &VV00
:#%6 ; :#%6 M
E;VX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
RD7R@@<A7 <AT\)' D2 i<R<A7
Circuit diagrams are the basis of all
electrotechnical applications. In practice
this involves the wiring together of 3
3 & ? 1E
electrical switchgear. With the easy
control relay this can be carried out simply %
at the push of a button or by using the
convenient easySoft programming
C
C
software on a PC. Simple menu navigation
in many languages simplify the input. This
saves time and therefore costs. easy and
3
D
C
MFD-Titan are the professionals for the
world market.
E;VV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
G)RA' )T$R<G\<DA )Tk3mm& )Tk*mm H;I;*-
)TkVmm H;I;Em-
: Jump x x x
1E 0RN Bit input via easyNet x x
0SN Bit output via easyNET easyNet x x
A Analog value comparator x x x
AR Arithmetic functions x x
BC Block comparison x x
BT Block transfer x x
BV Boolean sequence x x
C Counter relay x x
Frequency counter x 2) x x
CF
CH High-speed counter x2) x x
CI Incremental counter x x
CP Comparator x x
D Text display x x
DB Data function block x x
DC PID controller x x
FT PT1 signal smoothing filter x x
GT Get value from easyNet x x
H/HW (Hour)/7-day time switch x x x
Y/HY Year time switch x x x
JC Conditional jump x x
LB Jump label x x
LS Value scaling x x
Z/MR Master reset x x x
MX Data multiplexer x
NC Numerical converter x x
O/OT Operating hours counter x x x
PO Pulse output x
PW Pulse width modulation x x
SC Synchronize clock via network x x
ST Set cycle time x x
SP Serial protocol x
SR Shift register x x
T Timing relays x x x
TB Table function x x
VC Value limitation x x
1) With easy700, easy800 and MFDCP8/CP10... n = NET station 18
2) With easy500 and easy700 parameterizable as
operating mode
E;V*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
D<? 2cA$\<DAT
The switching behaviour of the relay coil is Unused outputs Q and S can also be used
determined by the selected coil function.
The specified function should for each
as markers like M and N.
1E
relay coil only be used once in the wiring
diagram.
<R$c<\ '<7R@ Tk@!D? )Tk '<TG?k D<? 2cA$\<DA j@G?)
E;VB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
R@)\)R T)\T 2DR \<@)T
Off-delayed switching
#
T:00.00 actual time
T:00.00
E;*m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
R@)\)R T)\ <TG?k<A7 \:) GR@)\)R T)\ h< @)Ac <\)@ OR@)\)RP
+ Call enabled
- Access disabled
T<$ $<R$c<\T
The easy circuit diagram is entered in )7\<DA
ladder diagram. This chapter includes a Negation means that the contact opens
few circuit examples which are intended to rather than closes when it is actuated (NOT
demonstrate the possibilities for your own connection).
circuit diagrams. In the easy
I1-------Q1
The values in the logic table have the circuit diagram,
following meanings for switching contacts press the
0 = N/O contact open, button to toggle
N/C contact closed between N/C and
1 = N/O contact closed, N/O contact.
N/C contact open D7<$ \!?)
For relay coils Qx
E E
0 = Coil not energized
1 = Coil energized 1 0
D\)
0 1
The examples shown are based on easy500
and easy700. easy800 and
MFDCP8/CP10 provide four contacts
and one coil per rung.
E;*E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
)R<)T $DAA)$\<DA R??)? Ti<\$:<A7
Q1 is controlled Q1 is actuated
by a series via a parallel
1E connection
I1-I2-I3-Q1
connection of
I1u------Q1
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0
E;*a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
iD ik Ti<\$: D7<$ \!?)
A two way E a DA\$\ D<? E
switch is made in E
easy using two
I1-I2u---Q1
1E
series I1-I2k 0 0 0 0
connections that
are combined to 1 0 0 0
form a parallel 0 1 0 0
circuit (XOR).
1 1 0 1
XOR is the abbreviation of ejclusive R
circuit. The coil is energized if only one 1 0 1 0
contact is activated. 0 1 1 1
D7<$ \!?) 1 1 1 1
E a E
The latching (self-maintaining) circuit is
0 0 0 used to switch machines on and off. The
machine is switched on at the input
1 0 1
terminals via N/O contact S1 and is
0 1 1 switched off via N/C contact S2.
1 1 0 S2 breaks the connection to the control
voltage in order to switch off the machine.
)?2;?\$:<A7 This ensures that the machine can be
A combination of S1 N/O contact on I1 switched off, even in the event of a wire
a series and S2 N/C contact on I2 breakage. I2 is always closed when not
parallel actuated.
connection is I1uI2----Q1 A self- S1 N/O contact on I1
used to wire a maintaining S2 N/C contact on I2
latching circuit. Q1k
circuit with
Latching is open-circuit I1-------SQ1
established by monitoring can I2-------RQ1
contact Q1 alternatively be
which is connected in parallel to I1. When wired using the
I1 is actuated and reopened, the current Set and Reset
flows via contact Q1 until I2 is actuated. coil functions.
E;*^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
Coil Q1 latches if I1 is activated. I2 inverts A;')?k)' \<@<A7 R)?k
the break contact signal of S2 and only The on-delay S1 N/O contact at I1
switches if S2 is activated in order to can be used to
1E disconnect the machine or in the event of a override short I1-------TT1
wire breakage. pulses or with a
T1-------M1
Make sure that both coils are wired up in machine, to start
the correct order in the easy circuit a further
diagram: first wire the S coil and then the R operation after a
coil. This will ensure that the machine will time delay.
be switched off when I2 is actuated, even if )R@A)A\ $DA\$\
I1 is switched on. To energize a
@Gc?T) R)?kT relay coil
---------Q1
An impulse relay continuously,
S1 N/O contact at I1
is often used for make a
controlling connection of all
I1-------Q1
lighting such as contact fields
for stairwell from the coil to
lighting. the leftmost position.
0 0 0 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 1
1 1 0
E;*5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
<R<A7 D2 $DA\$\T A' R)?kT
Hardwired Wiring with easy
1E
3 3 D
3
3
D
3 3
3
\R;')?\ T\R\<A7
You can implement two star-delta circuits also the time delay between switching off
with easy. The advantage of easy is that it the star contactor and switching on the
is possible to select the changeover time delta contactor.
between star and delta contactors, and
3
D 33
3D 33
3
3C 3D
3 33 3D 3C
E;*3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
.
3
1E
D 33
3 D
3 D 3 D
cA$\<DA D2 \:) f$<R$c<\ '<7R@% If your easy has an integral time switch,
Start/Stop the you can combine star-delta starting with
connection with I1u------TT1 the time switch function. In this case, use
the external easy to also switch the mains contactor.
pushbuttons S1 dT1----Q1
and S2. The dT1----TT2
mains contactor
starts the timing hT2----Q2
relay in easy.
I1: Mains contactor switched on
Q1: Star contactor ON
Q2: Delta contactor ON
T1: Changeover time star-delta (10 to 30 s)
T2: Wait time between star off, delta on
(30, 40, 50, 60 ms)
E;*X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
\<Rik ?<7:\<A7
For a conventional connection a minimum easy requires only four space units. With
of five space units are required in the
distribution board, i.e. one impulse relay,
five connections and the easy circuit the
stairway lighting is operational.
1E
two timing relays, two auxiliary relays.
3
D
3
D
C
C
C
3 3D 3D
33
C
D
3
D
C 33 3D
%= ? /+0
@GDR\A\ D\)
Four such stairway circuits can be
implemented with one easy device.
E;*V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
3
1E D
3
D
C
C
3
3
3
3 D
Pushbutton pressed briefly Light ON or OFF. The impulse relay function will even
switch off with continuous lighting.
Light off after 6 min Switched off automatically. With continuous light this
function is not active.
Pushbutton pressed for more Continuous light
than 5 s
E;**
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
The easy circuit configuration for the )A<A7 D2 \:) $DA\$\T A' R)?kT cT)'
described function below looks like this: I1: ON/OFF pushbutton
Q1: Output relay for light ON/OFF
I1-------TT2
M1:Marker relay.This is used to block the 1E
switch off automatically after 6
T2-------SM1 minutes function for continuous
I1u------Q1 lighting.
T1: Cyclical impulse for switching Q1
ON/OFF, (, pulse shaping with value
T3k
Q1-M1----TT3 00.00 s)
Q1-------RM1
T2: Scan to determine how long the
pushbutton was pressed. When
pressed for longer than 5 s, it changes
to continuous light. ( X, on-delayed,
The expanded easy circuit diagram: after value 5 s)
four hours, the continuous lighting is also T3: Switch off after the light has been on for
switched off. von 6 min. ( X, on-delayed, value 6:00
min.)
I1------uTT1
T4: Switch off after 4 hours continuously
on. ( X, on-delayed, value 4:00 h)
hTT2
T2-------SM1
T1u------Q1
T3s
T4k
Q1uM1----TT3
h------TT4
Q1-------RM1
E;*B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
5;ik T:<2\ R)7<T\)R
A shift register can be used for storing an cA$\<DA
1E item of information e.g. sorting of items
into good or bad two, three or four
c?T) ?c) \DR7) GDT<\<DA
E;Bm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
dM2----SM3
3rd storage location, set
dM2----RM3
3rd storage location, delete
dM1----SM2
2nd storage location, set
dM1----RM2
2nd storage location, delete
dI2----SM1
1st storage location, set
hI2----RM1
1st storage location, delete
Delete all storage locations
I3------uRM1
dRM2
dRM3
hRM4
E;BE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
<TG?k \)j\ A' $\c? h?c)T & '<TG?k A' )'<\ T)\GD<A\ h?c)T
easy500 and easy700 can display 16 freely Example of a text display:
1E editable texts, easy800 can display 32.
These texts can be triggered by the actual
values of function relays such as timing SWITCHING;
relays, counters, operating hours counters, CONTROL;
analog value comparators, date, time or DISPLAY;
scaled analog values. Setpoint values of ALL EASY!
timing relays, counters, opertaing hours
counters and analog value comparators
can be altered on the device during the
display of the texts.
Line 1, 12 characters
RUNTIME M:S
T1 :012:46 Line 2, 12 characters, a setpoint value or an actual value
C1 :0355 ST Line 3, 12 characters, a setpoint value or actual value
PRODUCED Line 4, 12 characters
The setpoint values can be edited: D1 is defined as an alarm text and has
easy500 and easy700, two values therefore priority over text displays.
easy800, four values D2 to D16/D32 are displayed when
The text output function block D (D = activated. When several displays are
Display, text display) functions in the activated they are shown in succession
circuit diagram like a normal marker M. every 4 secs. When a setpoint value is
Should a text be attached to a marker this edited the corresponding display stays
would be shown at condition in the easy active until the value is transferred.
display when the coil is set to 1. For this
easy must be in RUN mode and before the
texts are displayed the Status display must
be active.
E;Ba
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Programming &Relay, MFD-Titan
<Tc?<l\<DA i<\: ;<\A
The visualization with MFD-Titan is Button elements
implemented with screen, on which the
display is shown.
Latching pushbutton
Button field
1E
Example of a screen: Text elements
Static text
Message text
Screen menu
3 D
Running text
C
Rolling text
Value display elements
Date and time display
C Numerical value
Timing relay value display
Value entry elements
The following screen elements can be
Value entry
combined.
Timing relay value entry
Graphic elements Date and time entry
Bit display 7-day time switch entry
Bitmap Year time switch entry
Bargraph
Message bitmap
E;B^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
kT\)@ Dh)Rh<)i
F
1E a
F ]
F)o
3
3 FF
0
F)o
Fo
0
W )
E;B5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
1 XV100 HMI/PLC with touch display:
Fully graphical 3.5", 5.7" or 7" wide
screen devices
2 SD memory card 1E
3 XV license product certificates:
Expansion of device functionality
through assignment of license points.
4 XV200 HMI/PLC with touch display;
Fully graphical 5.7" devices
5 CompactFlash memory card
6 XV400 HMI/PLC with touch display:
5.7", 8.4", 10.4", 12.1", 15" devices with
infra-red or resistive touch
7 XV license product certificates:
Expansion of device functionality
through assignment of license points
8 OS Upgrade license
9 Communication module for XV400
10 Fixing kit
11 Software
E;B3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
)A)R? <A2DR@\<DA
Each transmitter is assigned a receiver on
1E the other side. The beams are directed
slightly over the front panel. The
simultaneous interruption of several
infra-red channels on the X and Y axis is
used to indicate where the panel was
touched in order to trigger the appropriate
switch function.
E;BX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
E;BV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
A7<A))R<A7
1E
Rear view of a 7
resistive panel of the
XV102 series with plastic
housing
E;B*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
6 \:)RA)\ <A\)R2$) Supply voltage AUX:
If there are any contactors or motor
starters in the SWD topology, a 24 V DC
voltage AUX must be additionally supplied 1E
as a control voltage for the contactor coils.
E;BB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
External protection using a 24 V DC
<A <7A? TT<7A@)A\
miniature circuit-breaker is required for
UAux.
1E Y @R\<R); <A\)R2$) HDA?k TG)$<2<$ 1 DCD Data Carrier
')h<$) \kG)TI Detected
The SWD interface is not galvanically
2 RxD Receive Data
isolated.
3 TxD Transmit Data
)UW03]aF
4 DTR Data Terminal
Ready
5 GND Ground
Cabling
Only use the following cables to connect 6 DSR Data Set Ready
the SmartWire-DT network: 7 RTS Request to Send
SWD-4-100LF8-24 with the 8 CTS Clear To Send
SWD-4-8MF2 blade terminals or
SWD-4-(3/5/10)F8-24-25 9 RI Ring Indicator
(prefabricated cable)
Detailed instructions for fitting the Wiring
SWD-4-8MF2 blade terminal is provided in
Shielded cables must be used.
the manual MN05006002Z-EN, chapter
The maximum baud rate depends on
Fitting the SWD4-8MF2 blade terminal.
the cable length:
The project configuration (SmartWire-DT
configuration in XSoft-CoDeSys-2 project) !?) ?)A7\: jJ !c' R\)
is described in the manual
MN04802091Z-EN, XSoft-CoDeSys-2: PLC
programming XV100, chapter 2.5 m 115200 bit/s
SmartWire-DT Configuration.
5m 57600 bit/s
W a^a
10 m 38400 bit/s
The RS232 interface is not galvanically
isolated. The device may be damaged by 15 m 19200 bit/s
potential differences. The GND terminals of
30 m 9600 bit/s
all bus stations must therefore be
connected.
F a ] 3 0
W U ) C
E;Emm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
W 5*3 !?) TG)$<2<$\<DA
The RS485 interface is not galvanically
isolated. The device may be damaged by Max. cable length 1200 m
potential differences. The GND terminals of
Possible baud rates 9600 bit/s
1E
all bus stations must therefore be
connected. 19200 bit/s
38400 bit/s
57600 bit/s
F a ] 3 0 115200 bit/s
W U ) C
E;EmE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
F F F F
W W W W
a U
a U
a U
a U
Fao Fao
1E
] ] ] ]
) ) ) )
3 3 3 3
C C C C
0 0 0 0
E;Ema
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
The maximal baud rate depends on the Observe the recommendations of CiA
cable length (CAN in Automation).
When preparing connections, ensure
!?) ?)A7\: jJ !c' R\) that the cable shield has a low 1E
impedance connection with the
connector housing.
25 m 1000 kbit/s CAN-Bus-topology
50 m 800 kbit/s A bus segment can interconnect up to
32 slaves.
100 m 500 kbit/s Several bus segments can be
250 m 250 kbit/s connected via repeaters (bidirectional
amplifiers). Refer to the documentation
500 m 125 kbit/s of the repeater manufacturer for more
500 m 100 kbit/s specific details.
A bus segment must be provided with
1000 m 50 kbit/s cable termination (120 ) at both ends.
2500 m 20 kbit/s These terminals must be connected in
the connector directly between pin 2
5000 m 10 kbit/s and 7.
The bus segment must be terminated
The use of repeaters is recommended at both ends.
for cable lengths over 1000 m. No more than two terminations must
Repeaters can also be used for be provided for each bus segment.
galvanic isolation. Refer to the Operation without correct cable
documentation of the repeater termination can cause transfer errors.
manufacturer for more specific details.
F F F F
W 9
W W W
9
Fao a U 9 a U a U 9
a U Fao
] 9 ] ] 9 ]
) ) ) )
3 3 3 3
C C C C
0 0 0 0
E;Em^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
W ; Wiring
The PROFIBUS interface is not galvanically Screened twisted-pair cables, cable type A
isolated. The device may be damaged by (acc. to the PROFIBUS standard EN 50170)
1E potential differences. The GND terminals of must be used.
all bus stations must therefore be
connected. !?) TG)$<2<$\<DA
1 ! > ?
Permissible impedance 135-165
Capacitance per unit < 30 pF/m
length
<A <7A? TT<7A@)A\
Loop resistance < 110 /km
9 - nc
When preparing connections, ensure that
Pin 6 (5 V) must not be used as a power the cable shield has a low impedance
supply for external devices. connection with the connector housing.
E;Em5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
PROFIBUS-topology contains the PROFIBUS-specific cable
Shielded twisted-pair cables must be termination that can be activated if
used.opology required.
A bus segment can interconnect up to A bus segment must be provided with 1E
32 slaves. cable termination at both ends. The
Several bus segments can be termination is passive but is fed from
connected via repeaters (bidirectional the bus station. It ensures a defined
amplifiers). Refer to the documentation quiescent signal on the bus if no bus
of the repeater manufacturer for more station is sending. These bus terminals
specific details. are primarily implemented externally in
the connector housing in accordance
D\)T%
with the PROFIBUS standard.
The use of repeaters enables the maximum
cable length to be increased. Refer to the
D\)T%
documentation of the repeater
manufacturer for more specific details. The bus segment must be terminated
at both ends.
Only use bus connector plugs that are
No more than two terminations must
specified for use in the PROFIBUS
be provided for each bus segment.
network. These combine both bus
At least one of the two terminations
cables on a bus station and ensure that
must be fed by the bus station.
the cable shield is a low impedance
Operation without correct termination
connection and fed through to the
of the PROFIBUS network can cause
shield reference potential of the bus
transfer errors.
station. The bus connector plug
F F F F
]Co W W W W ]Co
a a a a U
] U U U
] ] ] aao
aao ) ) ) )
3 3 3 3
C C C C
]Co 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]Co
IJ IJ IJ IJ IJ IJ
E;Em3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
+ a5 ')h<$) TcGG?k
The device has an internal fuse and DAA)$\<DA TT<7A@)A\
protection against polarity reversal. The
1E functional earth must only be connected
+24 V DC Supply voltage
with the connector panel not the 0 V. The
housing is plastic and is potential free. The +24 V DC
power supply of the device is not E Functional earth with
galvanically isolated. connector panel. Does
The device requires a power supply of 24 V not have to be
DC from an AC/DC transformer with safe connected.
isolation (SELV).
0V Supply voltage 0 V
SELV (safety extra low voltage); circuit
in which no dangerous voltage occurs
Observe the following when preparing the
even in the event of a single fault.
wiring of the plug connector:
E;EmX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and control
R)GR<A7 \:) $!?)T i<\: \:) ; $DAA)$\DR
The design of the bus cabling is an 5 - 8 mm shield braid must be exposed
essential factor for reliable operation and
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
at the cable end.
The folded shield braid end must be
1E
covered by the heat-shrink tubing or
<R<A7 R)Lc<R)@)A\T
rubber grommet.
The cables must be shielded.
Fit the SUB-D connector to the cable
The cable shield must consist of a copper
end:
braid.
The exposed screen braid must be
The cable shield must have a large area connected to the connector housing
and low-impedance connection to the
with the cable clip.
connector housing. This is achieved by:
Using metal or metallized connector
housings with a strap for strain relief.
The strap must be screw fastened with
the connector.
DAA)$\<A7 \:) $!?) T:<)?'
F
]o AA
E;EmV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Compact PLC universal compact controllers
kT\)@ Dh)Rh<)i
1E ]
3
U
)
W
C U
E;Em*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Compact PLC universal compact controllers
)A)R? <A2DR@\<DA
Compact controllers offer in a single Flexible networking options:
device several functions that cover the
automation of small and medium-sized
Remotely expandable via CANopen or
easyNet
1E
applications. Locally expandable via easyLink
For this sector Eaton offers the EC4P interface
series. The controllers provide the Remote programming via network
functionality of a PLC in the housing of an Connection of one or several MFD-80-B
easy800 control relay. Programming is via CANopen
carried out using CoDeSys software. Connection of an MFD-80-B via RS232
The controllers vary according to the Pluggable memory modules for data
number and type of inputs/outputs. archiving
Moreover, there are variants with and
without display, as well as with and without
an Ethernet interface. Ethernet allows
remote programming via the network and
communication via UDP and MODBUS.
E*ZE5
a5ZEX
E;EmB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Compact PLC universal compact controllers
A7<A))R<A7
!?) $DAA)$\<DAT
1E !?) \kG)Z )@DRk $R' )h<$) cA$\<DA
E;EEm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Compact PLC universal compact controllers
E;EEE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Compact PLC universal compact controllers
)h<$) RRA7)@)A\ DAA)$\<DA )j@G?)T
Install the PLC in a control cabinet, a The connection examples listed here from
service distribution board or in an the chapter Engineering easyRelay,
1E enclosure so that the supply voltage MFD-Titan are also relevant for the EC4P
terminals and the terminal capacities are compact controller.
protected against direct contact during Connecting the power supply,
operation. page 1-50
The PLC can be installed vertically or Connecting the digital inputs,
horizontally on a top-hat rail in compliance page 1-51
with IEC/EN 60715 or on a mounting plate Connecting analog inputs,
using fixing brackets. Ensure that the page 1-55
terminal side has a clearance of at least Connecting the incremental encoder,
3 cm from the wall and from neighbouring page 1-57
devices in order to simplify wiring. Connecting relay outputs,
page 1-58
F Connecting transistor outputs,
page 1-59
Connecting analog outputs,
F F
page 1-61
E;EEa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular PLC
kT\)@ Dh)Rh<)i
F
F
1E
F
a ]
o
3
o
3
F a ]
0 W U
F a ]
0 F3 F0
o F a
3
9aoF ]
0
3 0 W
) C Fo U o F a
]
FF 3 0 W
Fa F] F3
F0 ) C Fo U
FF
9FW Fa F] F3
F0
9FW
U
)
W W
W W
1 Racks
2 Battery
3 XC100/XC200 controllers
4 XI/OC I/O-modules, Communication
modules
5 Memory card
6 XI/OC terminal block (screw or
spring-cage terminal)
7 XC121 controller
8 XIO-EXT121-1 I/O-expansion for XC121
controller
E;EE^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular PLC
)A)R? <A2DR@\<DA amm @D'c?R T
Modular PLCs offer an outstanding level of The controllers of the XC200 series offer a
scalability. This ensures a high level of high CPU performance and a wide range of
1E flexibility for designing individual communication options. These devices
automation systems. Different CPU differ according to the size of the program
performance classes and a wide range of memory, the cycle time and the integrated
expansion modules are available. WEB server.
The data exchange via an Ethernet Expandable by up to 15 XIOC modules
interface to OPC clients or integrated WEB Data storage on SD card or USB stick
servers enables the creation of innovative Ethernet interface for programming and
solutions. communication
CAN interface for communication
RS232 interface
Integrated web server
Further information Manual
MN05003001Z-EN
T<7A? @D'c?)T
The XIOC signal modules can be
In this class Eaton offers the two XC100 and connected to XC100 as well as to XC200
XC200 series. controllers (exception: XIOC-TC1
Emm @D'c?R T telecontrol module only to XC200). A wide
The controllers of the XC100 series are range of different modules are available:
universal automation devices for small and Digital input/output modules
medium-sized applications. They differ Analog input/output modules
according to the size of the available Temperature measuring modules
program memory. One variant is provided Counter modules
with an optical CAN interface. Serial interface module (RS232, RS485,
Expandable by up to 15 XI/OC modules RS422; operating modes: Transparent
Data storage on SD card mode, Modbus master/slave, Sucom-A,
CAN interface for communication Suconet K slave)
RS232 interface Telecontrol module
Further information Manual Communication modules PROFIBUS-DP
MN05003004Z-EN master, PROFIBUS-DP slave, Suconet-K
master)
Further information Manual
MN05002002Z-EN
E;EE5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular PLC
A7<A))R<A7
)h<$) RRA7)@)A\
Build the module racks and the controls
into the switchgear cabinet in a horizontal
1E
position.
Clearance > 50 mm
Clearance > 75 mm to active
elements
Cable duct
9aoo
E;EE3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular PLC
)R@<A? TT<7A@)A\ DA \:) DAA)$\<A7 <AGc\TZDc\Gc\T \D \:) $)A\R?
The connections for the power supply and GRD$)TT<A7 cA<\
1E
the local inputs/outputs have the following The 0VQ/24VQ voltage terminal is intended
assignment: exclusively for the power supply to the
local inputs (8) and outputs (6), and is
electrically isolated from the bus.
At a duty factor (DF) of 100 % and a
utilization factor of 1, outputs 0 to 3 can
? V@V each carry a load of 500 mA, and outputs
? V@;
? V@M 4 and 5 a load of 1 A.
? V@K
? V@, The example shows the wiring with a
? V@+
? V@G separate power supply for controller and
? V@F I/O terminals. If only one power supply is
? V@V
? V@; used, the following terminals must be
? V@M
? V@K connected:
? V@,
? V@+ 24 V to 24VQ and 0 V to 0VQ.
M,
V
M,
V
o
F
a
]
3
0
W
U
o
F
a
]
3
0
a3
o
a3
o
N a3 e
oe
E;EEX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular PLC
\:)RA)\Zaa^a
(XC-CPU101, a^a
E;EEV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular PLC
D\)1 The CAN interface is electrically isolated.
Please note that when there is a double Bus termination resistors must be installed
assignment of the RJ45 interface with the at the first or last station on the line (->Fig.
1E RS232 and Ethernet, the connections 4 and below).
7 are connected to GND potential
because of the RS232 interface. For this
The bus terminating resistor on the
reason, we recommend the use of 4-core
XC-CPU202 can be switched. The switch is
cables for the connection of the XC200 to
located above the battery.
the Ethernet.
Only use a cable that is permissible for
CANopen with the following properties:
DG)A <A\)R2$)
Characteristic impedance 100 to 120
Configuration of the 6-pole Combicon plug: Capacitance per unit length < 60 pF/m
)R@<A? <7A?
c' R\) "
!<\ZT#
DDG R)T<T\A$)
$RDTT;T)$\<DA
6 GND
)A7\: "@#
? 5 CAN_L
%
"Z>@#
"@@2#
& 4 CAN_H DR)
C 3 GND
D 20 1000 0.75 0.80 16
3 2 CAN_L
125 500 0.50 0.60 40
1 CAN_H
250 250 0.50 0.60 40
Connector type: 6-pole, pluggable
500 100 0.34 0.60 60
spring-loaded terminal block
Connector terminals: up to 0.5 mm2 1000 40 0.25 0.34 70
Terminals 1 and 4 , 2 and 5 as well as 3 and
6 are internally connected.
G G G
+
P + +
,
P , ,
K K K
;MV M M M ;MV
; ; ;
E;EE*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular PLC
DAA)$\<DA )j@G?)T
Terminal blocks with either screw
terminals or spring-loaded terminals can
be optionally used for the wiring.
1E
DA'c$\DR $R)i $DAA)$\<DA GR<A7 $?@G $DAA)$\<DA
D\)T%
Cable lugs must not exceed 6 mm in
diameter.
Do not attach more than 2 cable lugs to
one terminal.
Use a cable with a maximum conductor
cross-section of 0.75 mm2, or 0.5 mm2 if
two cable lugs are going to be fixed to the
same terminal.
E;EEB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular PLC
<R<A7% '<7<\? <AGc\ @D'c?)T
9]a
o
1E F FW
a FU
] F)
3 FC
0 ao
9)
9FW
aF
9FW
W
U aa
o a]
o ) o
F ) C a3
a C Fo a0
] Fo FF aW
3 FF Fa aU
0 Fa F] a)
W F] F3 aC
U F3 F0 ]o
o F0 o ]F
o o
Na3 e
o
E;Eam
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular PLC
<R<A7 '<7<\? Dc\Gc\ @D'c?)T
9]a
o
F
FW
FU 1E
a F)
] FC
3 ao
0 aF
W aa
U a]
9)
9FW
9FW
o ) a3
F ) C a0
a C Fo aW
] Fo FF aU
3 FF Fa a)
0 Fa F] aC
W F] F3 ]o
U F3 F0 ]F
a3 F0
o
a3 e a3 e
oe oe
9Fa9
a3 e
o
o
F W
a U
] )
3 C
0 Fo
FF
Na3 e
oe
Na3 e% FooYa3o `
o %
E;EaE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular PLC
<R<A7 A?D7 <AGc\ @D'c?)T
9)
9
a
9)
9
a
9)
9
a
9)
9FY9a V/%S
o N
Y
o , VF/%S
oN
Y
FN o,
VVVV/%S
F,
aN
a,
U N , ;M MV 6
V
]N
9)
9F
3N ],
U , V/%S
0N 3,
WN 0,
UN W,
9)
9F VF/%S
a3 e U,
9)
9a
o
VVVV/%S
V + ;V V
o N
Na3 e
9)
9a
o ,
oe VF/%S
(;V VVVV/%S
U N V ;V V
U , V&VV/%S
E;Eaa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular PLC
<R<A7 A?D7 Dc\Gc\ @D'c?)T
oN o , Fa
FN o,
aN F, 3
]N a, ] N
],
oooo8(l oU8(l o8(l
] ,
9a9F9a9
F
F !"
Fo
a3 e
9a9F9a9
F
o
0
o N
Na3 e o , o
oooo8(l oU8(l o8(l
oe
9a9a
a N
939F
F !"
9a9F9a9
F
a , Fo
o)oo8(l o8(l
oN o oU8(l
FN o,
aN F, ,Fo
]N
a,
],
a3 e
Na3 e
oe
E;Ea^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular I/O system
kT\)@ Dh)Rh<)i
1E 0
F a
3
3
) U
W )
F] Fa FF 0
Fo C
1 Gateways
2 Digital input modules
3 Relais modules
4 Coding element
5 Base modules
6 Relay jumpers
7 Cover plate
8 End bracket
9 Supply modules
10 Analog input modules F3
11 Digital output modules
12 Analog output modules
13 Technology modules
14 Marker
E;Ea5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular I/O system
)A)R? <A2DR@\<DA
Whether controlling movements, CANopen, PROFIBUS-DP and Ethernet bus
measuring temperature or speeds, logging
currents and voltages the application
systems.
ECO gateways with built-in bus
1E
ranges for remote I/Os are varied. Remote termination resistors
I/Os can be found wherever remote signal Full compatibility with the standard
processing is the key element of the XI/ON system
automation concept. No base modules required
The XI/ON I/O system has the following High channel density: (up to 16 DI/DO
essential features: over 12.5 mm width)
High modularity Push-in spring-cage terminals
Field busses: CANopen, PROFIBUS-DP, Multi-functional slices
DeviceNet and Ethernet Mini USB diagnostics interface
Bus-independent, plug-in modules XI/ON Default gateways and standard
modules
Low wiring requirement
The standard gateways support the
Effective diagnostics
CANopen, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet and
Space and cost savings with ECO
Ethernet bus systems.
modules
Programmable CANopen coupling unit Use of the pluggable I/O modules is
Standard and ECO modules can be mixed possible regardless of the fieldbus
used
Wiring implemented on base modules,
fixed wiring
Hot-swapping of modules
Generation of diagnostics information
for the higher-level controller
Up to 74 slice modules can be
connected per gateway
Modules mechanical coding
Programmable CANopen coupling unit
With the programmable CANopen
gateway, PLC performance is now brought
The XI/ON I/O system provides an directly to the fieldbus terminal. The device
extensive range of digital and analog I/Os is ideal for managing remote automation
as well as technology modules: tasks and thus relieving the work load of a
XI/ON ECO gateways and ECO modules higher-level PLC. The serial onboard
XI/ON ECO adds cost and space-optimized interface is used for programming onsite
I/O modules and gateways to the XI/ON I/O and as an interface for the I/Oassistant
system. The ECO gateways support the configuration and diagnostics tool.
Alternatively this interface can also be
E;Ea3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular I/O system
used as a free user interface. The gateway modules. They are available for 2-, 3- and
is programmed with XSOFT-CODESYS-2. 4-cable connections, as block or slice
Base modules for every requirement modules, either with spring-cage or screw
1E The base modules are used for connecting terminals.
the fieldbus wiring for the standard XI/ON
A7<A))R<A7
ZTT<T\A\ $DA2<7cR\<DA A' '<7ADT\<$T 2)\k 'c) \D $D'<A7
\DD? The pluggable modules also allow hot
The I/Oassistant is integrated in the swapping for the fast and toolless
XSOFT-CODESYS-2 software and offers exchange of modules. The mechanical
interactive support in the entire planning coding of the modules prevents incorrect
and implementation of an XI/ON system. fitting.
You choose the gateways, electronics and
basic modules, as well as the appropriate
accessories. The individual stations are
then either configured online or offline.
When everything is set to your
requirements, you put the system into
operation. I/Oassistant automatically
generates a full parts list for your order.
The I/Oassistant checks the station, reads
process data, outputs values and
visualizes the diagnostics data of the
channels. In this way, you can also
commission your station without the need
for a higher-level controller and ensure
that one section of the installation is
functioning correctly.
E;EaX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular I/O system
DAA)$\<DA )j@G?)T
Di)R TcGG?k @D'c?) HcT )2R)T:<A7 ))')R @D'c?) HDi)R ))'<A7 @D'c?)TI
D'c?)I
Module for feeding the 24 V DC system
Field power supply module 24 V
1E
power supply and the 24 V DC field XN-P4-SBBC for XN-PF-24VDC-D
voltage supply
FF aF F3 a3
FF aF
F3 a3
Fa aa
F] a]
F3 a3
E;EaV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Modular I/O system
<7<\? <AGc\ @D'c?)T <7<\? Dc\Gc\ @D'c?)
Positive switching Positive switching
XN-S4-SBBC for XN-2DI-24VDC-P
1E XN-S4-SBCS for
XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-P
XN-2DO-24VDC-2A-P
FF aF
Fa aa FF aF
F] a] Fa aa
F3 a3
F] a]
Negative switching
F3 a3
XN-S4-SBBC for XN-2DI-24VDC-N
Negative switching
XN-S4-SBCS for
FF aF XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-N
Fa aa
FF aF
N N
F] a]
Fa aa
F3 a3
F] a]
F3 a3
E;Ea*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
Switching, control, visualization
Modular I/O system
Analog input modules Further connection examples can be found
XN-S4-SBBS for XN-1AI-I(0/4...20MA) in the manuals:
XN-S4-SBBS for XI/ON digital I/O modules, power supply
XN-1AI-U(-10/0...+10VDC) modules, MN05002010Z-EN 11
Analog transmitter with non-isolated (previously: M001735-02)
transmitter supply XI/ON analog I/O modules,
MN05002011Z-EN (previously: M001756-04)
These manuals can be downloaded as PDF
Uh files at www.eaton.com/moellerproducts
Uh+ in the Products & Solutions area.
11 21
12 22
Sh
13 23
14 24
11 21
Channel 1 12 22 Channel 2
Sh Sh
13 23
1-129
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Software
)j\;DR<)A\)' ?A7c7)T
AT\Rc$\<DA <T\ HI
1E An instruction list (IL) consists of a
sequence of instructions. Each instruction
starts on a new line and contains an
operator and one or several comma
separated operands depending on the
type of operation.
Users of automation components such as An identifier label followed by a colon (:)
machine and system builders are may be placed in front of an instruction.
increasingly no longer satisfied with single This is used for labelling the instruction
solutions. This is why standards such as which can then be used as a jump target.
IEC 61131-3 have become established as A comment must always be the last
manufacturer-independent standards for element of a line.
PLC programming. CoDeSys supports all Example:
programming languages described in the
IEC-61131 standard. LD 17
ST lint (* comment *)
CoDeSys is based on a standard of 3S. GE 5
Proven technical features, simple handling JMPC next
and a wide distribution of this software for LD idword
programming automation components of EQ istruct.sdword
different manufacturers guarantee its STN test
success. next:
All Eaton controllers are programmed with
the CoDeSys software. Programming can \Rc$\cR)' )j\ HI
be carried out in different programming Structured Text (ST) consists of a series of
languages. These are divided into instructions that are arranged as in high
text-based or graphic-based languages. level languages (IF...THEN...ELSE) or in
loops (WHILEDO).
Example:
IF value < 7 THEN
WHILE value < 8 DO
value := value + 1;
END_WHILE;
END_IF
E;E^m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Software
RG:<$;DR<)A\)' ?A7c7)T
)Lc)A\<? cA$\<DA :R\ HI
Sequential function chart (SFC) is a
graphical language. It enables the timing of
1E
different actions within a program to be
defined. Different step elements are used
for this which are assigned to specific
actions and which are controlled by
so-called transition elements.
E;E^E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Software
'')R <7R@ HI
Ladder diagram is a graphical sequence of networks. A network is
1E programming language which closely
follows the principle of an electrical
bordered on the left and right by a left and
right vertical current path. A circuit
circuit. diagram consisting of contacts, coils and
On the one hand, ladder diagram is suitable connection lines is located in between.
for designing logical switch systems, on
the other hand, it is also possible to create Example of a network in ladder diagram
networks as in FBD. LD is therefore very consisting of contacts and coils:
good for controlling the calling of other
blocks. Ladder diagram consists of a
E;E^a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
i<\$:<A7& $DA\RD?& h<Tc?<l\<DA
Software
DA\<AcDcT 2cA$\<DA $:R\ HI for example the implementation of
The freely graphical function chart is feedback paths.
based on function block diagram (FBD) but Implementation example in freely
does not work like this with networks but graphical function block diagram editor: 1E
with freely placable elements. This enables
A\)7R\)' h<Tc?<l\<DA
The CoDeSys programming system also which can be shown on a browser using
contains a visualization editor as well as TCP/IP (WEB visualization).
the programming tool. This offers a clear
advantage: <A\)R$\<h) h<Tc?<l\<DA \DD?
Only one additional software package is For its HMI and HMI-PLCs Eaton offers an
required to visualize (i.e. for monitoring and easy to learn project design environment
operation) the data of a controller that is nevertheless powerful and
programmed in CoDeSys. Whilst the comprehensive ideal for use in all
application is being developed, the user machine and process-relevant
can already create visualization screens in applications in system and machine
the same user interface. The visualization building. Galileo has a sector neutral
integrated in CoDeSys can access the design and offers seamless project design
variables from the controller directly. for all of Eaton's graphical HMI devices.
If the controller has a display (HMI-PLC),
this visualization can be displayed directly
on the panel (target visualization).
Many controllers are now equipped with a
web server. If required CoDeSys
generates from the visualization data an
XML description which is stored on the
controller together with a Java applet and
E;E^^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\)T
1E
E;E^5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
7)
a;E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Drives engineering basic information
R<h)T )7<A))R<A7 T)?)$\<DA $R<\)R<
Each drive task requires a drive motor. The With a mains voltage of 400 V and 8 times
speed, torque and controllability of each the starting current, this corresponds to
motor must fulfill the requirements of the a rated motor current of around 7.5 A and
task. As a general rule, the application thus a motor rating of 4 kW.
2a determines the drive. The motor rating denotes the mechanical
The drive motor most frequently used output of the motor at the shaft.
worldwide in industrial plants and large \R;')?\ T\R\)R
buildings is the three-phase asynchronous This is the most popular and commonly
motor. Its robust and simple construction used starting method for motor ratings
as well as its high degrees of protection > 4 kW (400 V).
and standard types are the main features ?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)R HI A' TD2\
of this inexpensive electric motor. T\R\)R
These enable the soft and low-noise
starting of the motor. This eliminates
:R));G:T) TkA$:RDADcT @D\DR interference producing current peaks
and jerks during switching. The startup
D\DR T\R\<A7 hR<A\T and deceleration phase of the motor can
<R)$\;DA;?<A) T\R\ also be time-controlled depending on the
In the simplest case the motor is load.
connected directly with a contactor. The R)Lc)A$k <Ah)R\)R
combination of motor protection and This enables time-controlled motor
cable protection (fuse) is called a motor starting, motor braking and operation
starter (MSC = Motor Starter with infinitely variable motor speeds.
Combination). Depending on the application, different
By applying the full mains voltage to the types of frequency inverters are used:
motor windings, DOL starting may with the voltage/frequency control
produce large starting currents which (U/f) or vector control for
may result in troublesome voltage frequency-controlled motor operation,
changes. Direct-on-line starting with vector control or servo control for
three-phase motors must not cause high speed accuracy and additional
interference voltage changes in the torque adjustment.
public utility grid. This requirement is
generally fulfilled if the apparent power
Associated circuit diagrams page 2-3
of a three-phase asynchronous motor
does not exceed 5.2 kVA or its startup
current does not exceed 60 A.
a;a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Drives engineering basic information
] Y Y Y 0oYWo n
F
F ; h 2a
a
a F
F F
] ] ] ]
B ^ Y .
F F F
a a a
a;^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Drives engineering basic information
The rotation direction of a motor is always The effect of inductance causes the
determined by directly looking at the drive rotation field and torque to be formed in the
shaft of the motor (from the drive end). On rotor winding. The speed of the motor thus
motors with two shaft ends, the driving end depends on the number of pole pairs and
is denoted with D (= Drive), the non-driving the frequency of the supply voltage. The
2a end with N (= No drive). rotation direction can be reversed by
swapping over two of the supply phases.
Clockwise (FWD) Anticlockwise
operation (REV)
F a ] F a ]
F a ] F a ]
Regardless of the circuit type and the type
of three-phase asynchronous motor, the
connections must be labeled, so that their
alphabetical sequence (e.g. U1, V1, W1) FWD = forward run (clockwise rotation
corresponds with the order of the mains field)
REV = reverse run (anticlockwise rotation
voltage sequence (L1, L2, L3) and causes
field active)
the motor to rotate clockwise.
F
a
]
F
A2DR@\<DA DA \:) R\<A7 G?\)
The electrical and mechanical rating data
of the motor must be stated on its rating
o Co' F)o' ]Wo' plate (IEC 34-1, VDE 0530). The data on the
aUo' rating plate describes the stationary
operation of the motor in the area of its
operating point (MN, e.g. at 400 V and
50 Hz). The operating data is unstable in the
Fao' Fao' Fao'
motor start phase.
On the three-phase asynchronous motor, The following examples show the rating
three windings are arranged offset from plates for two motors with a motor shaft
each other by 120/p (p = number of pole output of 4 kW and the respective
pairs). When a three-phase AC voltage connection circuits on a three-phase AC
with a 120 phase sequence is applied, this network with 400 V and 50 Hz.
produces a rotation field in the motor.
a;5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Drives engineering basic information
\R $<R$c<\ )?\ $<R$c<\
a]o Y 3oo kYh F3L0 Y )L0 3oo Y WCo kYh )L0 Y 3LC
F 3Lo #ES M oL)a F 3Lo #ES M oL)a 2a
F3Fo A:B9F 0o n F3Fo A:B9F 0o n
03
SEL
03
SEL
F a ] F a ]
F
a F
a a
F a F F a
a F
U LN = 3 ( U W , I LN = I W U LN = U W , I LN = 3 ( IW
; ; ; ; ; ;
M M M M M M
With the specified 230/400 V voltage, With the specified 400/690 V voltage,
this motor must be connected to the this motor must be connected to the
three-phase supply (ULN = 400 V) in a three-phase supply (ULN = 400 V) in a
star configuration. delta configuration.
The voltage of each motor winding is Each motor winding is designed here for
designed for 230 V. The windings must the maximum phase voltage of 400 V
therefore be connected in sequence to and can be connected directly.
the phase voltage (400 V).
The three winding phases (W2-U2-V2) The three winding phases (U1 W2,
are configured in the terminal box to the V1 U2, W1 V2) are combined in the
so-called star point. The voltage of the terminal box and connected directly to
individual phases to the star point is the individual phases.
230 V (= UW).
a;3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Drives engineering basic information
\R\cG $:R$\)R<T\<$T Slip speed in %:
The following figure shows the
ns n
characteristic startup curves of a s = -------------- # 100%
ns
three-phase asynchronous motor.
Three-phase asynchronous motor speed:
%
2a
f
n = --- # ' 1 s &
p
Synchronous speed:
D@GR<TDA D2 T\R\cG hR<A\T
f
n s = ---
The features of the startup variants to
p described on page 2-2 are shown on
the following pages 2-6 and 2-7.
The graphs show the typical
characteristics.
a;X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Drives engineering basic information
<R)$\ D\DR T\R\ F \R;')?\ T\R\)R b
D?\7) $cRh) D?\7) $cRh)
Foo K Foo K
h
0) K
[ [
2a
Mains load high Medium mains load
cRR)A\ $cRh) cRR)A\ $cRh)
Y
(
Y
(
W W
3 3
a a
] ]
a a
F F
oLa0 oL0 oLU0 F BYB oLa0 oL0 oLU0 F BYB
W !
3
$
a %
] X
a ]
F A
oLa0 oL0 oLU0 F BYB hG]* hG* hGM* A <S<
a;*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
D2\ T\R\)RT
Soft starters are electronic devices for the Impacting of cog edges in the gearbox
soft starting of three-phase motors. Soft Reduction of the water hammers in pipe
starters must comply with the product systems
standard IEC/EN 60947-4-2. Slipping of V belts
During the startup phase of a motor, a soft Jitter with conveyor systems 2a
starter controls the power supply smoothly
H
and continuously up to the rated value
(ULN) by controlling the phase angle. This
voltage control limits the starting current K
since the motor current behaves
proportionally to the motor voltage. The M
resulting smooth torque increase enables
the motor to be adapted to the load
behavior of the motor. ;
S "
a;B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
2a
4UKU
U
U4UKU
2a
4UKU
U4UKU U4U@C
The ratio of the overload current to the Other overload cycles and operating
rated operational current, the total of the frequencies can be calculated.
times for the controlled overload current, Further information on this is provided in
as well as the duty factor and start cycle the relevant soft starter manual.
form the overload current profile of a soft
D\)
starter; this data is stated on the rating
plate in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-4-2. The controlled deceleration presents a
similar load on the power semiconductors
j@G?)
in the soft starter as the start phase. If
55A: AC-53a: 3-5 : 75-10
therefore the deceleration ramp is
activated on a soft starter with a maximum
55A = Rated operational current of the of 10 permissible starts per hour, the
soft starter number of permissible starts is reduced to
AC-53a = Load cycle in accordance with 5 per hour (plus 5 stops within the same
IEC/EN 60947-4-2 hour).
3 = 3-fold overcurrent at start
(3 55 A = 165 A)
5 = Overcurrent duration in seconds
75 = Duty factor within the load cycle in %
10 = Number of permissible starts per hour
a;EE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
kG)T
Soft starters are usually divided into two
types:
( ' ( '
' '
a;Ea
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
B
(
Y )?)$\<DA $R<\)R<
2a
The soft starter is selected on the
basis of the supply voltage ULN of the
supply network and the rated
operational current of the assigned
motor . The circuit type ( / 8) of
the motor must be selected according
to the supply voltage . The rated
output current Ie of the soft starter
must be greater than/equal to the
rated motor current.
a;E^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
)?)$\<DA $R<\)R<
When selecting the drive, the following The switching and protective devices
criteria must be known: (electromechanical components) in the
Type of motor main circuit of the motor feeder are
designed on the basis of the rated
2a (three-phase asynchronous motor)
Mains voltage = rated operating voltage operational current (Ie) of the motor and the
of the motor (e.g. 3 AC ~ 400 V) utilization category AC-3 (standard
Rated motor current (recommended IEC 60947-4-1).
value, dependent on the circuit type and
the power supply) The utilization category here is AC-53a
Load torque (quadratic, linear) (IEC/EN 60947-4-2 standard).
Starting torque AC-3 = squirrel-cage motors: startup,
Ambient temperature switch off during operation.
(rated value +40 C). AC-53a = control of a squirrel-cage
motor: eight-hour duty with starting
currents for start processes, settings,
%
operation
$
Motor feeder with DS7
soft starter combined
with PKZM0 in In-Line
circuit
$
a;E5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
)R@<TT<!?) $DAA)$\<DA $<R$c<\T D2 \:) @D\DR
Three-phase asynchronous motors can be the mains voltage in a star or delta
connected to a soft starter, depending on connection.
j@G?)
2 phase controlled soft starter (DS7) 2a
\R $<R$c<\ * 8 7
* 8 7
; ; ;
* 8 7 M M M
)?\ $<R$c<\
; ; ;
M M M
a;E3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
D\) A7)R1
Three-phase motors with a neutral point A7)RDcT hD?\7)J
(star circuit) must not be connected to a <T> D2 ')\: DR T)R<DcT <A=cRkJ
two-phase controlled soft starter as one The power section of soft
phase is connected here directly to the starters is formed with semi-conductors
2a mains voltage and causes impermissible
overheating in the motor.
(thyristors). When a supply voltage (ULN) is
present, there is also a dangerous voltage
present at the output to the motor in the
OFF/STOP state.
This warning applies to all soft starter
types.
* 8 7 j@G?)
2 phase controlled soft starter
* 8 7
;; KM +K
* 8 7
K
c\<DA1
Not permissible
a;EX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
D2\ T\R\)RT A' $DDR'<A\<DA \kG)T \D replacements. For hybrid control devices
Z XmB5V;5;^ and contactors, there is a risk of contact
The following coordination types are welding, for which the manufacturer must
defined in IEC/EN 60947-4-3, 8.2.5.1: give maintenance instructions.
The assigned short-circuit protective
kG) E $DDR'<A\<DA
In type 1 coordination, the device must not
device (SCPD) must trip in the event of a 2a
short-circuit. If a fuse is used, this has to be
endanger persons or the installation in the
replaced. This is part of the normal
event of a short-circuit and does not have operation of the fuse, also for type 2
to be capable of continued operation
coordination.
without repairs or parts replacements.
D\)
kG) a $DDR'<A\<DA
Superfast semiconductor fuses must
In type 2 coordination, the device must not
always be arranged directly in front of the
endanger persons or the installation in the power semiconductors (short cable
event of a short-circuit and must be capable lengths).
of continued use without repairs or parts
; ;
M M
K K
; ;
. . . . . .
K
; M K ; M K
6
6
6
]
F
F
] a
aF 0
]
a F
3 a
W ]
a;E*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
D\DR GRD\)$\<DA
? A
" ?
# A
; ?
a;EB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
R??)? $DAA)$\<DA D2 T)h)R? @D\DRT \D
T<A7?) TD2\ T\R\)R
You can also use soft starters to start
several motors connected in parallel. This
does not, however, allow the startup
2a behavior of the individual motors to be
controlled.
D\)T
The current consumption of all
connected motors must not exceed the
rated operational current Ie of the soft
starter.
Each motor must be protected from
thermal overload individually, e.g. with
thermistors and/or overload relays (F11,
F12) . Alternatively, motor-protective
circuit-breakers (Q11, Q12) can also be
used.
It is advisable to use this circuit type only
with motors of a similar rating (maximum
deviation: one rating size). Problems may
arise during starting if motors with
significant rating differences (for
example 1.5 kW and 11 kW) are
connected to the output of a soft starter.
The lower-rated motors may not be able
to reach the required torque due to the
relatively high ohmic resistance of their
stators. During the startup these require
a higher voltage.
The last motor must not be switched off
in operation since the resulting voltage
peaks may cause damage to the
electronic components in the soft starter
and thus to its failure.
a;am
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
/
A
?
/ 2a
/
//
?
/ A ?
A/
/ A ?
//
/A
// /A
% % %
/ A
? ?
a;aE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
T<A7 TD2\ T\R\)RT i<\: \:R));G:T) T?<GR<A7 @D\DRT
When upgrading or modernizing older Q1: Cable and motor overload protection
installations, contactors and rotor resistors or
of multistage three-phase stator automatic F1: Cable protection and
starters can be replaced with soft starters. F2: Overload protection required
2a This is done by removing the rotor resistors (thermistor, bimetal relay) if the soft
and assigned contactors and starter (Q21) does not include this
short-circuiting the slip rings of the motors function. Example: overload relay F2 in
rotor. The soft starter is then connected combination with contactor Q11.
into the feeder. The smooth starting of the M1:Slip-ring motor
motor can then be implemented.
Figure, page 2-23
D\)T
Slip ring motors develop a high starting
torque with low starting current. They
can thus be started at the rated load and
this must be taken into account when
selecting a soft starter. The soft starter
cannot replace the rotor resistors in
every application.
Depending on the type of motor, it may be
necessary to keep the last resistor group
permanently connected to the slipring
rotor terminal (K-L-M).
a;aa
3 D C / A ?
3 C % 3C / ? " /?
3 /
3& /#
3 ( ( ( / % % %
D & ? A # ;
3 C % 3 C % 3 C % 3 C % / ? "
33 D & ?
&C D & ? &D D & ?
&3 D & ?
// A # ;
Soft starter basic information
A
/ A ?
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
A/
/ A ?
C D 3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
C D 3
C C D 3 ?
C D D
3 /
a;a^
2a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Soft starter basic information
D\DRT i<\: $D@G)AT\<DA $G$<\DRT
As resistive-inductive loads, three-phase The following figure shows a safe
motors draw reactive power from the arrangement. The compensation
network. This reactive power can be capacitors are switched via a capacitor
compensated by means of capacitors (Cx) contactor (Q12). The capacitor contactor is
2a (improved power factor cos ). controlled via the TOR (Top-of-Ramp)
signal of the soft starter. The capacitors
are disconnected from the mains during
The output of a soft starter must not be
the critical start and stop times.
connected to any capacitive loads
(capacitors) . This would damage the
soft starter. D\)
If capacitors are to be used for reactive In networks with electronically controlled
power compensation and thus to improve loads (e.g. soft starters), the compensation
the power factor, they must be connected devices must always be connected with a
to the mains side of the soft starter . series inductance.
If the soft starter is used together with an
isolating or main contactor (Q11), the
C x: Capacitors for reactive power
capacitors must be disconnected from the
compensation
soft starter (Q12) when the contactor
Q1: Motor-protective circuit-breaker
contacts are open.
Q11: Mains contactor
Q12: Contactor for capacitors
Q21: Soft starter
M1: Three-phase asynchronous motor
a;a5
F
F
F
a
a
a
]
]
]
F F F
FF FF
Soft starter basic information
F
a
]
FF Fa
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
aF
F a ]
F
a
] l
aF
F a ]
l l
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
F ] F F
] ]
c\<DA1
Not permissible
G b ^
a;a3
2a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
V GRD'c$\ 2)\cR)T
Two-phase controlled soft starter, meets DS7 with device fan DS7-FAN-032
the requirements of the IEC/EN 60947-4-2
product standard
Power section and control section are
2a galvanically isolated
Power section:
Rated operational voltage: 200 480 V,
-15 % /+10 %
Mains frequency: 50/60 Hz 10 %
Overload cycle: AC53a: 3 5: 75 10
Control voltage/regulator supply voltage:
DS7-340: 24 V AC/DC, -15 %/+10 %
DS7-342: 120 - 230 V AC,
-15 %/+10 %
AC: 50/60 Hz 10 %
Control voltage and controller power
supply always have the same potential + (+
and voltage level.
Relay contacts (potential-free)
&&!& "
TOR (Top-of-Ramp): 230 V AC, 1 A, '+
AC-11
In size 1 (to 12 A) with potential
connection to the control section
RUN (operational signal): 230 V AC, &!&
'+ ++
1 A, AC-11 + (+
In size 1 (to 12 A) this relay contact is
not present.
Ambient temperature during operation: && " + '+
-5 to +40 C, max. +60 C with derating
and device fan t-Start = Ramp time (1 - 30 s) for the voltage
Load cycle: 10 starts per hour, max. 40 increase from the value U-Start up to mains
starts per hour, with derating and voltage (ULN)
integrated device fan (optional) U-Start = The start voltage (30 - 100 %),
Status display (LEDs) determines the torque of the motor
RUN = Operating signal (green)
t-Stop= Ramp time (0/1 - 30 s) for the
Error = Error message (red)
voltage reduction from the mains voltage
Parameterization/setting via three
(ULN) to the value U-Start
parameters accessible on the front
a;aX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
<l)T V
<l) E H5 \D Ea I <l) ^ K 5 H5E \D amm I
2a
DS7-34SX004
DS7-34SX007
DS7-34SX009 DS7-34SX041
DS7-34SX012 DS7-34SX055
DS7-34SX070
DS7-34SX081
<l) a HEX \D ^a I DS7-34SX100
DS7-34SX135
DS7-34SX160
DS7-34SX200
D$c@)A\\<DA
Manual: MN03901001Z-EN
Instructional leaflet:
DS7-34SX016 IL03902003Z (for size 1)
DS7-34SX024 IL03902004Z (for size 2)
DS7-34SX032 IL03902005Z (for size 3 und 4)
a;aV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
The number and arrangement of the in the power section of the individual sizes
control terminals, as well as the structure vary according to the power section.
<l) E H5 \D Ea I
% % ! $ % $
<l) a HEX \D ^a I
% % ! $ % $ %$ %
%
% !
$
% $ %$ %
a;a*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
\A'R' $DAA)$\<DA i<\: cGT\R)@ @<AT $DA\$\DR A' TD2\ T\DG R@G
\A'R' $DAA)$\<DA i<\: @<AT $DA\$\DR& T<l) E H5 \D Ea I
F
a
] 2a
F
6
6
6 F
FF
a
]
F
F
] a
0 ]
aF
N S 9 a N F F]
aF
3a
W]
FF
]
F
] INJ S
a3 Y% FaoYa]o
I,J S
a;aB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
DA\RD? T)$\<DA i<\: @<AT $DA\$\DR Q1, F1: Short-circuit- and cable protection
Q11: Mains contactor
F2: Motor protection
F3: Optional semiconductor fuse for
type 2 coordination, in addition to
2a K3:
Q1 and F1
Start/Stop
oFY N
F
a
FF
G
F E.[9[EH
a FF E.[9[Q[ ]
FF ]
ooY
9
a;^m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
D\\<DA '<R)$\<DA R)h)RT? i<\: TD2\ T\DG R@G
<l) E H5 \D Ea I
F
a
] 2a
F
6
6
6
FF Fa
]
F
F
] a
0 ]
aF
9 a N S
aF
3a
W]
F
] INJ S a3 Y%
I,J S FaoYa]o
a;^E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
DA\RD? T)$\<DA 2DR !<'<R)$\<DA? DG)R\<DA
263
2a /4"? @
/4"#
A/ 0
K
AA
/? /#
/" A"
A
/; A;
"? "?
// /A
"# "#
;? ;?
// /A
;# ;#
B
/A //
/ / 6/ 6
// /A
A A/
A &A
A > % >&>.1
2&3
a;^a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
DA\RD? T)$\<DA 2DR !<'<R)$\<DA? DG)R\<DA
D\)
The control voltages (+US) of the DS7 soft
starter and the contactor control must aF aa aF aa aF aa
have the same potential:
24 V DC/AC or 120/230 V AC F] F3 F] F3 F] F3
2a
Q1, Q11, Q12 = MSC-R motor-starter
combination is a compact device with
electrical and mechanical interlocking. M22-I3-M1
The NHI-E-10-PKZ0 auxiliary contact is Contact sequence of assembled
added to Q1 for cable and motor protection. control station
MSC-R- NHI-E-10-PKZ0
Reversing starter Standard auxiliary contact (grey)
a;^^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
Two DILA-XHI20 auxiliary contact modules
are added to the two reversing contactors
Q11 and Q12.
The NO contact 53/54 is used for the
self-maintaining of reversing contactors
2a DIL-XHI20 Q11 and Q12; NO contact 63/64 activates
the timing relay K2T and the soft starter
Q21.
The pushbutton actuators 0, I, II as a
complete device (M22-I3-M1) for surface
mounting enable the rotation direction
change via the stop button.
K2T is an off-delayed timing relay (type
ETR2) and simulates here the RUN signal.
The drop-out time must be greater than the
stop time (t-Stop) set on the DS7 soft
starter. Switching to the other direction is
only possible after the value set here has
ETR2-11
elapsed.
F9a
F [ 6 [9[EH
[ F09FW Y a09aW
Ej(Q
I5Q((BJ
(>:S
Im(>>EjJ
a;^5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
D@G$\ @D\DR T\R\)R i<\: @<A\)AA$) Ti<\$:
Soft starter DS7, circuit-breaker NZM1 and
maintenance switch P3,
size 3 + 4 (41 to 200 A)
F
a
2a
]
F
6
6
6
C1<
]
F
]
a
0
]
F
F
aF
aF
W]
U
N a3
o
F ] 0 U
]a [Q[Y[EH
a 3 W )
]
F
]
a;^3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
$<R$c<\;!R)>)R i<\: )@)R7)A$k;D22 2cA$\<DA \D Z Xmam5 A' mEE^ R\ E&
T<l) ^ K 5 H5E \D amm I
F
]LF3
2a
6
6
6
]
F
F
] a
0 ]
aF
o Na3 9
aF
3a
W]
F ]
a;^V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
V GDi)R T)$\<DA 9 5E i<\: !kGTT )@)R7)A$k DG)R\<DA H)j@G?)% Gc@GI
F
a
]
2a
F
FF
]
F
F
0
]
]
a
aF
3a
W]
a F
aa ]F
F
]
a;^*
$\c\<DA i<\: !kGTT )@)R7)A$k DG)R\<DA . HGc@G DG)R\<DAI
F
3
a aa
a] F]
F ] a ] 3 0 0 0 a a
a3 F3
Connection example DS7
] F 3
]F
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
F
F aF a ] ]F FF 0 aF 3 aa
a a
G b ^ 4 1
Enable S1: Operating mode switch
Automatic operation (soft starter) S2: Off
Manual/bypass operation S3: On
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\)
The control system shown here can also be used for the DS7 soft starter in size 2
(16 to 32 A).
a;^B
2a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example DS7
\R\<A7 T)h)R? @D\DRT T)Lc)A\<??k i<\: TD2\ T\R\)R H$T$')' $DA\RD?I
When starting several motors one after the F3: Superfast semiconductor fuse
other using a soft starter, keep to the (optional for type 2 coordination,
following changeover sequence: additional to Q1)
Q1: Cable protection
2a 1. Start using soft starter
2. Switch on bypass contactor Qn2 via Q2: Soft starter DS7
TOR (Top-of-Ramp) Qn1: Contactor (1, 2, n)
3. Block soft starter Qn2: Mains bypass contactor for
4. Switch soft starter output with Qn1 to motor (1, 2, n)
the next motor Qn3: Motor protection (motor-protective
5. Restart circuit-breaker or bimetal relay
Mn: Motor (1, 2, n)
D\)T
When starting several motors with one D\)T
soft starter the thermal load of the soft
The control system shown here can also
starter (starting frequency, current load)
be used for the DS7 soft starter in size 2
must be taken into account. If the starts
(16 to 32 A), however without an enable
are to occur in close succession, the soft
signal .
starter must be dimensioned larger (i.e. the
Bimetal relays can also be used as an
soft starter must be designed with an
alternative to the overload relays Q13,
accordingly higher load cycle).
Q23, , Qn3 (see page 2-21).
Due to the thermal design of the DS7
soft starters, we recommend the use of an
(optional) fan when using a DS7 series
device for starting several motors.
a;5m
T$') $DA\RD?
Di)R T)$\<DA 2DR @D\DR $T$') H)j@G?) 2DR T<l) ^ A' 5I
F
a
]
F
6
6
6
Connection example DS7
]
F
F
a
a
]
]
a
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
aF
3a
W]
FF Fa aF aa BF Ba
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
F a B
] ] ]
a;5E
2a
2a
a;5a
$\c\<DA& @D\DR $T$')& GR\ E
F 3
F
Connection example DS7
F] a]
a F F F 3 Fa aa ]a Ba a a 3 3
F3 a3
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
F
F a F a a ] 3 F 3
a a
B ^ Y .
Enable
Softstart/Soft stop
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
Starting frequency monitoring. The timing relay must be set so that the soft starter does not have a temperature
overload. The correct time is based on the permissible operating frequency of the selected soft starter.
If necessary, use soft starters with a higher rating.
Set the timing relays to approx. 2 s off-delay. This ensures that the next motor branch can not be connected as long as
the soft starter is running.
N/C contact S1 switches all motors off at the same time.
$\c\<DA& @D\DR $T$')& GR\ a
] ] ]
F FF Fa Fa Fa aF aa aa IB9FJa BF Ba Ba
Fa ] aa ] Ba ]
Connection example DS7
FF IB9FJF
3 3
aF BF
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
B ^ Y
Motor 1
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
Motor 2
Motor n
The N/C contact S3 is required if motors also have to be switched off individually.
a;5^
2a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
5 GRD'c$\ 2)\cR)T
Three-phase controlled soft starter; Pre-programmed parameter sets for ten
meets the requirements of the IEC/EN typical applications can be simply called
60947-4-2 product standard up with a selector switch (see page 2-48).
Configurable and
2a communication-enabled with pluggable
Additional plant-specific settings can be
defined with an optional keypad. This
control signal terminals and interface for includes, for example, the three-phase AC
options: power controller mode. In this mode
Operator control and programming unit three-phase resistive and inductive loads
Serial interface (heaters, lighting systems, transformers)
Fieldbus connection can be controlled with the DM4. Both
Application selector switch with open-loop and with measured value
user-programmable parameter sets for feedback closed-loop control are
10 standard applications possible.
I2t controller Instead of the keypad, intelligent interfaces
Current limitation can also be used:
Overload protection
RS232/RS485 serial interface
Idle/undercurrent detection (e.g. belt
(configuration with PC software)
breakage)
PROFIBUS-DP fieldbus connection
Kickstarting and heavy starting
Automatic control voltage detection
The DM4 soft starter provides the most
3 relays, e.g. fault signal, TOR
convenient method of implementing soft
(Top-of-Ramp)
starting. In addition to phase failure and
Power section: motor current monitoring, the motor
Rated operational voltage 230 - 480 V,
winding temperature is evaluated through
-15 % / + 10 %
the built-in thermistor input, so that the soft
Mains frequency: 50/60 Hz 10 % starters do not require additional external
Control voltage/regulator supply voltage: components, such as motor protective
24 V DC relays.
120 - 240 V AC, -15 % / +10 %, 50/60 Hz
D\)
Ambient temperature during operation:
0 to +40 C The optional superfast semiconductor
Load cycle: 10 starts per hour with fuses (F3) for type 2 coordination can be
3.5 x Ie for max. 35 s used from size 2 (from 85 A) in the housing
of the DM4 soft starter.
a;55
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
<l)T 5
Size 1
16 - 72 A
Assigned motor power at 400 V
7.5/11 - 37 kW 2a
Size 2
85 - 146 A
Assigned motor power at 400 V
45/75 - 75/132 kW
Size 3
174 - 370 A
Assigned motor power at 400 V
90/160 - 200/315 kW
Size 4
500 - 900 A
Assigned motor power at 400 V
250/400 - 500/900 kW
a;53
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
D$c@)A\\<DA
Manuals:
AWB8250-1346GB
(Soft Starter Design)
AWB8250-1341GB (DM4 Soft Starter)
2a AWB8240-1398 (DE8240-NET-DP2
interface module for PROFIBUS DP)
AWB823-1279
(DE4-COM-2X interface module)
AWB8240-1344GB
(DE4-KEY-2 Keypad)
Installation instructions:
AWA8250-1704 (up to 37 kW)
AWA8250-1751 (45 to 75 kW)
AWA8250-1752 (90 to 200 kW)
AWA8250-1783 (250 to 500 kW)
a;5X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\)T
2a
a;5V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
The application selector switch enables
direct assignment without parameter
entry.
2a
V 0 DJ8#C#
; 0 /1-/ J:CBN%
M 0 <N6<
K 0 <N6< 31
3DJCJ
, 0 41-/J :8Q%T:C
+ 0 /%QT :8Q%T:C
G 0 4:R 18%CJ1
*8
F 0 /1-/ 18%CJ1
*8
& 0 C% 1< :6<C%DD:C
9 0 D C%R :6<C%DD:C
4T
N4J
<<
V 0 DJ8#C# *4D/
DN
*
; 0 /1-/ J:CBN% :8
M 0 <N6<
8
H4
CN
K 0 <N6< 31 3DJCJ
, 0 41-/J :8Q%T:C
+ 0 /%QT :8Q%T:C
G 0 4:R 18%CJ1 *8
F 0 /1-/ 18%CJ1 *8
& 0 C% 1< :6<C%DD:C
9 0 D C%R :6<C%DD:C
a;5*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
\A'R' GG?<$\<DAT HT)?)$\DR Ti<\$:I
a;5B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
A!?)Z<@@)'<\) T\DG i<\:Dc\ R@G 2cA$\<DA H)J7J 2DR @)R7)A$k;\DGI
The digital input E2 is factory set to switch When the operating conditions require an
the enable function. The soft starter is immediate de-energization, this is effected
enabled only when a High signal is present via the enabling signal.
at the terminal. The soft starter cannot be
2a operated without the enable signal.
RA<A71
You must in all operating conditions always
In the event of wire breakage or first stop the soft starter (Run relay
interruption of the signal by an scanning), before you mechanically
Emergency-Stop circuit, the regulator in interrupt the power conductors. Otherwise
the soft starter is immediately blocked and a flowing current is interrupted thus
the power circuit disconnected, and after resulting in voltage peaks, which in rare
that the Run relay drops out. cases may destroy the thyristors of the soft
Normally the drive is always stopped via a starter.
ramp function.
;
;
M
;
M
; M;
K9
a;3m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
<A><A7 \:) Dh)R?D' R)?k <A\D \:) $DA\RD? TkT\)@
We recommend using an external overload RA<A71
relay instead of a motor-protective The direct opening of the power lines may
circuit-breaker with built-in overload relay. cause overvoltage and destruction of the
This allows controlled ramping down of the soft starters semi-conductors.
soft starter through the control section in 2a
the event of an overload.
a;3E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
<\: T)GR\) $DA\$\DR A' Dh)R?D' \A'R' $DAA)$\<DA
R)?k For isolation from the mains, either a mains
contactor upstream of the soft starter or a
F central switching device (contactor or
a
] main switch) is necessary.
2a
$\c\<DA
F
;
6
6
6 M
FF
;
;
a
M ;
]
; M; M;
K9 K9
F
F
a a
] ]
, 8(QA:S[EQ
3a
W]
Enable
Softstart/soft stop
F
]
a;3a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
<\:Dc\ @<AT $DA\$\DR
F
a
]
2a
F a
6
6
6
6
6
6
F
b
]
F
F
]
a
0
]
F a ]C U NFa ) F
o B>E5
[Q[Y[EH
a$ 3,ao A
NFa
F$ o,Fo
o IFTaJ
B >(
-
aF -
FT aT ] 3
B>E5 c[ F
B>E5 c[ a
9 8(QA:S[EQ
N 8(QA:S[EQ
o B>E5
aF
3a
W]
F a F] F3 a] a3 ]] ]3 3] U Wa W]
AE[ ^
F
]
a;3^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
D2\ T\R\)RT i<\: T)GR\) @<AT $DA\$\DR
$\c\<DA
2a
;
K
; ;;
;K
;
; ,
M
M
; M;
;,
M
;
M;
KK
=8: %CC:C>
K,
M ;
; M;
M M; ;;
K9 K9
= Emergency switching off Enable
M1: Motor with temperature sensor Softstart/soft stop
(thermistor)
Q1: Cable and motor protection
Q21: Soft starter
S1: Off (uncontrolled deceleration)
S2: On
S3: Soft start
S4: Soft stop (deceleration ramp)
a;35
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
D2\ T\R\)RT i<\: T)GR\) @<AT $DA\$\DR
F
a
]
2a
F a
6
6
6
6
6
6
FF FF
G
]
F
F
]
a
0
]
F a ]C U NFa ) F
o B>E5
[Q[Y[EH
a$ 3,ao A
NFa
F$ o,Fo
o IFTaJ
B >(
-
aF -
FT aT ] 3 B>E5 c[ F
B>E5 c[ a
9 8(QA:S[EQ
N 8(QA:S[EQ
o B>E5
aF
3a
W]
F a F] F3 a] a3 ]] ]3 3] U Wa W]
AE[ ^
]
F
a;33
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
A;')?\ $DAA)$\<DA
Soft starters are normally connected Disadvantages (compared with in-line
directly in series with the motor (so-called connection):
in-line connection). The DM4 soft starter As in a star-delta circuit, the motor must
also allows operation in an in-delta
2a connection.
be connected with six conductors.
The DM4 soft starter overload protection
The antiparallel thyristors are connected is active only in one line so that additional
directly in series to the individual motor motor protection must be fitted in the
windings. parallel phase or in the supply cable. The
Advantages (compared with in-line motor can be protected for example via
connection): thermistors.
Inexpensive since the soft starter only
has to be designed for approx. 58 % D\)T
(1/3) of the rated current particularly The voltage of the motor winding must
with motor ratings > 30 kW and when match the rated voltage. For a 400 V
replacing star-delta starters. mains voltage the motor must therefore
For the same motor rating the required be marked with 400 V/690 V.
soft starter rating is reduced. The soft starter can also be bridged in the
in-delta connection for continuous
operation with a bypass contactor (see
page 2-60). This is actuated via TOR
(Top-of-Ramp).
a;3X
A?<A)Z')?\ $DAA)$\<DA
U9Fa09
U9Fa0
FF0
FF0
DM4 connection example
Foo Foo
]
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
39]3o900 39]3o9]o
IFo0 J I0C J
] ]
a a a a a a
00 = 00 =
3oo 3oo
a;3V
2a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
A;')?\ $DAA)$\<DA
;
M
K
2a
; M
;;
;;
K
;;
KM
+K
; M K9 F A;M & ;
M! ,(MV 6
A;M
V 84:-
V =;EM>
;! V(;V
JCJHJ:<
84%
)
M; )
;E
ME
K
,
84:- NJ ;
84:- NJ M
A /%C61DJ:C
( /%C61DJ:C
V 84:-
! M;
! ,M
! GK
; M ;K ;, MK M, KK K, ,K F GM GK
6:J
;
K
+
+
+
a;3*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
$\c\<DA
; 2a
K
;
;K
;
; ,
M
M M;
;,
M
;
M;
KK
=8: %CC:C>
K,
M ;
; M;
M M; ;;
K9 K9
= Emergency switching off Enable
E2: Enable Soft start/soft stop
Q1: Cable and motor protection
S1: OFF; uncontrolled deceleration of the
motor
S2: ON/Start
S3: Soft stop
a;3B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
kGTT $<R$c<\
;
M
K
2a
; ;
. . . . . .
;;
;;
K
;;
KM
+K
; M K9 F A;M !
V 84:-
A;M
M! ,(MV 6
;! V(;V
V =;EM>
JCJHJ:<
84%
)
MM
M; )
;E
ME
K
,
84:- NJ ;
84:- NJ M
A /%C61DJ:C
0 /%C61DJ:C
V 84:-
M;
,M
GK
; M ;K ;, MK M, KK K, ,K F GM GK
6:J
;
K
a;Xm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
kGTT $<R$c<\ The bypass contactor is now switched to a
After completion of the acceleration phase de-energized state and can therefore be
(full mains voltage reached), the soft designed to utilization category AC-1.
starter M4 actuates the bypass contactor. If an immediate voltage switch-off is
Thus, the motor is directly connected with required in the event of an emergency stop,
the mains. the bypass contactor must also switch the 2a
Advantage: motor load. In this case a design to
utilization category AC-3 is required.
The soft starters heat dissipation is
reduced to the no-load dissipation.
The limit values of radio interference
class B are adhered to.
$\c\<DA
F
]
F] a]
F F aa 3 a a F aF F3
aF a3
a F
aF ]]
IBE (QQEQJ ]3
a F
F aF a aF FF aa
]C ]C
G b ^
a;XE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
DM4 connection example
\R\<A7 T)h)R? @D\DRT T)Lc)A\<??k i<\: TD2\ T\R\)R H$T$')' $DA\RD?I
When using a soft starter to start several Changeover monitoring
motors in succession, keep to the following Set the timing relay to a return time of
changeover sequence: about 2 s. This ensures that the next
motor branch can not be connected as
2a 1.
2.
Start using soft starter
Switch on bypass contactor long as the soft starter is running.
3. Block soft starter
4. Switch soft starter output to the next Section Actuation, part 2, page 2-65
motor Motor 1
5. Restart Motor 2
Motor n
Section Actuation part 1, page 2-64 Switching off individual motors
= Emergency switching off
F3: Superfast semiconductor fuse The Off switch results in all motors being
(optional) for type 2 coordination switched off at the same time. To switch off
Q1: Main switch / individual motors, you need to make use of
cable protection (NZM) N/C contact .
Q2/F11: Optional control voltage Observe the thermal load on the soft starter
supply (starting frequency, current load). If motors
Qn3: Motor-protective circuit-breakers are to be started at short intervals, you may
Qn4: Motor protection Soft starter have to select a soft starter with a higher
Qn5: Motor contactors bypass load cycle.
S1: Q11 Off
S2: Q11 On
a;Xa
T$') $DA\RD?
;
M
K M
;;
. . .
;
K
DM4 connection example
;;
MM
KK
M; )
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
( /%C61DJ:C
A /%C61DJ:C
; M
M;
,M
GK
;, ;+ M, M+ 8, 8+
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
. . . . . . . . .
; M 8
K K K
a;X^
2a
2a
a;X5
$\c\<DA GR\ E
;
,
;
DM4 connection example
;
;, M, 8;
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
;K
M
M
;
;
,
;M
MM
8M
M M;
,
,
;,
;
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
;
M M;
M
K
,
;
,
M
Section Starting several motors sequentially with a soft starter (cascaded control), page 2-62
$\c\<DA& GR\ a
;M
K
MM
K
8M
K
DM4 connection example
;, =80;>;
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
,
,
,; 8
;, ;+
;M M, M+
MM 8 6
8M
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
Section Starting several motors sequentially with a soft starter (cascaded control), page 2-62
a;X3
2a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
)T<7A A' @D') D2 DG)R\<DA D2 2R)Lc)A$k <Ah)R\)RT
Frequency inverters provide variable and
stepless speed control of three-phase
motors.
2a B(Q5m 2Ej
Q:i:B5 Q=:B5
% .%
% B
% .% I
J A i
Q: >( ]
EBS[B[
lB
(> - l
l R] l #ES M
-
. B C00o
a;XX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
?D$> '<7R@ i<\: @<A $D@GDA)A\T D2 2R)Lc)A$k <Ah)R\)R
Internal open and closed-loop control The power section of a static compact
circuits (central processing unit) monitor frequency inverter consists of three
all variable values in the frequency inverter subgroups:
and automatically switch the process off if
a value reaches a dangerous level.
Rectifier (A)
Internal DC link (B) 2a
Inverter module (C)
Y
]`
ULN: Line supply UDC: DC link circuit voltage Output voltage = switched DC
from mains UDC = 1.41 x ULN link voltage with sinusoidal
AC power supply (single-phase line voltage) pulse width modulation (PWM)
UDC = 1.35 x ULN
(three-phase line voltage)
a;XV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
2a
Power section:
A = Rectifier
B = DC link
C = Inverter module
Control section with:
I/O = analog and binary inputs and
outputs
KEYPAD = keypad with display
BUS = serial interfaces
(RS485, fieldbus, PC interface)
a;X*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
R<h) TkT\)@ HI \D XE*mm;^
Incoming section
Field supply
Resistance braking
Auxiliary equipment
other equipment
R<h)A )Lc<G@)A\
a;XB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
The frequency-controlled three-phase This not only refers to the frequency
motor is a standard component for inverter as a component but also considers
infinitely variable speed and torque a complete drive system (PDS = Power
regulation - providing efficient, Drives System) with motor, cables, EMC
energy-saving power either as an etc.( page 2-69).
2a individual drive or as part of an automated
installation.
U %
( W
0
3
]
a
F
a;Vm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
?)$\R<$? @<AT $DAA)$\<DA
Frequency inverters can be connected and The standardized rated operating voltages
operated without restriction on of the utility companies fulfil the following
star-point-grounded AC mains (according conditions at the point of transfer to the
to IEC 60364). consumer:
Maximum deviation from the rated 2a
F voltage (ULN): 10 %
a Maximum deviation in the voltage
] symmetry: 3 %
Maximum deviation from the rated
frequency: 4 %
A further voltage drop of 4 % in the
consumer networks is permissible in
F relation to the lower voltage value (ULN
a -10 %) of the supplying mains voltage. The
] power supply voltage at the consumer can
therefore have a value of ULN -14 %.
In ring meshed networks (as used in the
EU) the consumer voltages (230 V / 400 V /
690 V) are identical to the power supply
Connection and operation on voltages of the utility companies. In star
asymmetrically grounded networks such networks (for example in North
as phase grounded delta networks (USA) America/USA), the stated consumer
or non-grounded or resistively grounded voltages take the voltage drop from the
(> 30 ) IT networks are only permissible utility companys infeed point to the last
with restrictions and require additional consumer into account.
engineering measures.
a;VE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
$D@G?<A$) <A The generic standards of the individual
The electrical components of a system components in a PDS compliant with
(machine) are subject to reciprocal IEC/EN 61800-3 do not apply. These
interference. Each device not only exerts component manufacturers, however, must
interference on other devices but is also offer solutions that ensure
2a adversely affected by it. This occurs as a
result of galvanic, capacitive and/or
standards-compliant use.
In Europe, maintaining the EMC Directive is
inductive coupling or through mandatory.
electromagnetic radiation. The border
A declaration of conformity (CE) refers
between line-conducted interference and
always to a typical power drives system
radiated interference is around 30 MHz.
(PDS). The responsibility to comply with the
Above 30 MHz the lines and cables act like
legally stipulated limit values and thus the
antennas and radiate the electromagnetic
provision of electromagnetic compatibility
waves.
is ultimately the responsibility of the end
The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) user or system operator.
for variable speed drives is implemented in
Measures must be taken to remove or
accordance with product standard
minimize emission in the associated
IEC/EN 61800-3.
environment. It must also be ensured that
This covers the entire drive system (PDS = the immunity of the devices or systems is
Power Drives System) from the mains end increased.
supply to the motor, including all
components and cables. This type of drive
system can also consist of several
individual drives.
(ScQ:B5 c >:#
B&cS[Qm
B&cS[Qm
HE:B[ >Ej9iE>[5( ScHH>m 5Q:& 5Q:& F 5Q:& a
[(5EQm F
[(5EQm FYa [(5EQm ]Y3 [(5EQm ]Y3
a;Va
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
$\)7DR<)T
Drive systems (PDS) are divided into the
following four categories.
$\)7DRk E $\)7DRk ^
PDS for use in the first environment
Rated operating voltage < 1000 V
PDS for use in the second environment
Not intended for use in the first
2a
environment
$\)7DRk a
Rated operating voltage < 1000 V
PDS for use in the first environment
Hazard warning required
Rated operating voltage < 1000 V
(This PDS is not intended for connection
Not connected via plug-in devices
to the public utility grid. Connection to
No plug or movable equipment
these networks may cause
Connection and commissioning must be electromagnetic interference.)
carried out by persons with suitable
technical knowledge $\)7DRk 5
Hazard warning required PDS for use in the second environment
(This product may cause malfunctions which fulfills at least one of the following
in a domestic environment; in this case criteria:
additional measures may be Rated operating voltage > 1000 V
necessary.) Rated operational current > 400 A
Connection to IT networks
The required dynamic properties are not
achieved due to EMC filter measures.
EMC plan required
a;V^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
Equipment code
F: Fuses and circuit-breakers
(cable protection)
Q: Controlled switching in power flow
(contactor, circuit-breaker)
2a R: Limitation (choke, resistor)
K: Radio interference suppression filter
T: Frequency inverter
M: Motor
]
] ]
]
a;V5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
cT)T H$<R$c<\;!R)>)RTI allow the protection of lines and electrical apparatus. For the
protection of persons, AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices (RCD Type B) are
required in addition.
DA\$\DRT are used for the on/off switching of the mains voltage.
<AT $:D>)T suppress any current harmonics and peaks and limit the inrush current 2a
(link circuit capacitors).
TcGGR)TT<DA 2<?\)RT attenuate high frequency electromagnetic emissions from
devices. They ensure that the EMC limit values for conducted interference specified in the
applicable product standards are observed (frequency inverters).
R)Lc)A$k <Ah)R\)RT enable the infinitely variable speed control of three-phase motors.
A !R><A7 R)T<T\DR converts the frequency inverters regenerative braking energy into
heat.
The frequency inverter must be equipped with a brake chopper, which connects the
braking resistor parallel to the internal DC link.
D\DR R)$\DRT
Compensate the capacitive capacitive currents,
Reduce current ripple and the motors current change noise,
Attenuate the retroaction on parallel connection of several motors.
<AcTD<'? 2<?\)R
Smoothen the output voltage sinusoidally,
Reduce motor noise through du/dt reduction, and thereby increase the motor
insulations lifespan,
Reduce the leakage currents to allow better motor performance at improved EMC
values.
:<)?')' @D\DR $!?)T attenuate emitted and conducted high-frequency emissions within
the limit values specified in the applicable product standard (EMC).
:R));G:T) TkA$:RDADcT @D\DR HT\A'R' @D\DRI
a;V3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
D\)T !Dc\ $DRR)$\ <AT\??\<DA D2 2R)Lc)A$k <Ah)R\)RT
For an EMC-compliant installation, observe R\:<A7 @)TcR)T
the following instructions. These enable These must be implemented to comply with
electrical and magnetic interference fields the legal standards and are a prerequisite
to be limited to the required levels. The for the effective use of further measures
2a necessary measures work only in such as filters and shielding. All
combination and should be taken into conducting metallic enclosure sections
consideration at the engineering stage. To must be electrically connected to the earth
subsequently modify an installation to meet potential. For EMC compliance, the
EMC requirements is possible only at important factor is not the cables
considerable additional cost. cross-section, but its surface, since this is
Measures for EMC-compliant installation where high frequency current flows to
are: earth. All earth points must have a low
impedance, be highly conductive and
Earthing measures,
routed directly to the central earth point
Shielding measures,
(potential equalization bar or star earth).
Filtering measures, The contact points must be free from paint
Chokes and rust. Use galvanized mounting plates
They are described in more detail below. and materials.
3
3 0
0
3 0
C C
K1 = Radio interference
suppression filter
T1 = Frequency
inverter
a;VX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
:<)?'<A7 @)TcR)T
3
D
C C
2a
CJJ //
a;VV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
Shielding reduces emitted interference
& A
(noise immunity of neighboring systems
and devices against external influences).
Cables between frequency inverters and
motor must be shielded. However, the
2a shield must not be considered a
replacement for the PE cable. Four-wire
motor cables are recommended (three
phases plus PE). The shield must be
connected to earth (PES) at both ends with
#4A H 4A
a large-area connection. Do not connect
G
the shield with pigtails. Interruptions in the
shield, such as terminals, contactors,
chokes, etc., must have a low impedance F #4/ F ?4"
and be bridged with a large contact area.
To do this, sever the shield near the module
and establish a large-area contact with
earth potential (PES, shield terminal). Free,
unshielded cables should not be longer
than about 100 mm.
Example: Shield attachment for D\)
maintenance switch Maintenance switches at of frequency
inverter outputs must be operated only at
zero current.
0
Control and signal lines must be twisted
and may be double-shielded, the inner
B
shield being connected to the voltage
source at one end and the outer shield at
@ both ends.
a;V*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
The motor cable must be laid separately
from the control and signal lines (> 30 cm)
b G and must not run parallel to any power
cables.
D\)
Inside control panels also cables should be 2a
shielded if they are more than 30 cm long.
7
I7 FFL)FPJ
A
C A4" ++
* AK +
#
#&/KA&
/
#
9
//
a;VB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
<?\)R<A7 @)TcR)T D\)
Radio interference filters and line filters The mounting surfaces of frequency
(combinations of radio interference filter inverters and radio interference filters
and mains choke) protect against must be free from paint and must have
conducted high-frequency interference good HF conductivity.
2a (noise immunity) and reduce the frequency
inverters high-frequency interference
which is transmitted through or emitted
from the mains cable, and which must be
limited to a prescribed and legal level
(emitted interference).
Nowadays, filters are frequently integrated
in the frequency inverter or should be
installed in close proximity of the
frequency inverter. When using externally
a;*m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
;$D@G?<A\ @DcA\<A7 A' $DAA)$\<DA
2a
F0
G
b
a a a
^
F F F
a;*E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
)T<'c?;$cRR)A\ ')h<$) HI
Radio interference filters produce leakage The residual current device on the
currents which, in the event of a fault frequency inverter must be of type B
(phase failure, load unbalance), can be as sinusoidal AC and pulsed DC residual
considerably larger than the rated values. currents may occur.
2a To prevent dangerous voltages, all With leakage currents 3.5 mA, EN 60335
components (frequency inverter, RFI filter, states that one of the following conditions
motor, shielded motor cables) in the PDS must be fulfilled:
must be earthed. As the leakage currents
The protective conductor must have a
are high-frequency interference sources,
cross-section 10 mm2,
the earthing connections and cables must
The protective conductor must be
have a low impedance and large contact
open-circuit monitored, or
surfaces.
An additional protective conductor must
be fitted.
F
F a
F
a
a a
a
]`
]
] a
]
g g
a;*a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
<AT $:D>)T
Fitted on the frequency inverters input
side, chokes reduce the
current-dependent mains feedback and
Single-phase improve the power factor. This reduces the
chokes current harmonics and improves the mains
quality. The use of mains chokes is
2a
especially recommended when several
frequency inverters are connected to a
single mains supply point and when other
electronic devices are also connected on
the network.
A reduction of the mains current
interference is also achieved by installing
DC chokes in the frequency inverters DC
link. This eliminates the need for mains
chokes.
D\DR $:D>)T
Three-phase chokes With long motor cables or the parallel
connection of several motors, motor
chokes are used at the output of the
frequency inverter.
They also enhance the protection of the
power semiconductors in the event of an
earth fault or short-circuit, and protect the
motors from excessive rates of voltage rise
(> 500 V/s) resulting from high pulse
frequencies.
G
F a ]
F F F F F F F F F
F a ]
]
_ ]
_ ]
_
a;*^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Frequency inverter basic information
<AcTD<'? 2<?\)R
Sinusoidal filters are a combination of
choke and capacitor (low pass filter).
They improve the sinusoidal shape of the
a;*5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example for M-Max
;j` GRD'c$\ 2)\cR)T
G b
2a
\ 4
D
*
V
1
X
Designations on M-Max
Fixing holes Power section terminals
(screw fastening) Cover flap of control signal terminals
Release (dismantling from mounting and microswitches
rail) Interface for PC connection module
Cutout for mounting on mounting rail MMX-COM-PC (Option)
(DIN EN 50022-35) Keypad with 9 control buttons
Interface for fieldbus connection
Display unit (LCD)
modules (optional, MMX-NET-XA)
EMC installation accessories
a;*3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example for M-Max
cA$\<DAT D$c@)A\\<DA
A comprehensive range of protection Manual: MN04020001Z-EN
functions allow safe operation and the Instructional leaflet: IL04020001E
protection of frequency inverter, motor and
application. They offer protection against:
2a Overcurrent, earth fault
Overload (electronic motor protection)
Overtemperature
Overvoltage, undervoltage
cR\:)R 2cA$\<DAT%
Restart inhibit
U/f control or sensorless vector control
2-fold starting current and 1.5 fold
overcurrent
PID controller
Sequence control
Braking control (DC braking)
8 fixed frequencies
Electronic motor potentiometer
Logic function (AND, OR, XOR)
Upper and lower frequency and current
limits
Frequency hopping (frequency masking)
DC braking before start and up to motor
standstill
2 parameter sets
a;*X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example for M-Max
;j` T<l)T
Size 1 (FS1)
MMX12: 1.7 - 2.8 A
MMX32: 1.7 - 2.8 A
MMX34: 1.4 - 2.4 A 2a
Size 2 (FS2)
MMX12: 3.7 - 7 A
MMX32: 3.7 - 7 A
MMX34: 3.3 - 5.6 A
Size 3 (FS3)
MMX12: 9.6 A
MMX32: 9.6 A
MMX34: 7.6 - 14 A
FS = Frame Size
a;*V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example for M-Max
GG?<$\<DA AT\Rc$\<DAT
M-Max frequency inverters allow the For UL-compliant installation and
continuously variable speed control of operation, the mains side switching
three-phase asynchronous motors. They devices must allow for a 1.25 times
are especially suitable for applications higher input current.
2a where simple operation and profitability
are important.
Mains contactors shown here take into
account the rated operating current ILN
The characteristics-controlled of the frequency inverter at the input
voltage/frequency (U/f) control already without a mains choke. Their selection is
allows a wide range of applications even based on the thermal current (AC-1).
with the default settings: from simple pump With frequency inverters, the inching
and fan drives, standard packaging range is not permitted via the mains
applications right through to the operation contactor (pause time 60 s between
of multiple motors in horizontal switching off and on).
transportation and conveying. With
sensorless vector control, an individual
drive can also be used in demanding
applications, in which a high torque and
concentricity in the lower speed range are
vital, for example in the plastics and metal
industries, the textile, paper and printing
industries or in crane and elevator
systems.
Rated operating currents from 1.4 to 14 A
allow the operation of standard 4 pole
asynchronous motors in an assigned
performance range of :
0.25 to 2.2 kW at 230 V (single-phase
mains connection),
0.25 to 2.2 kW at 230 V (three-phase
mains connection),
0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400 V (three-phase
mains connection).
a;**
a;*B
/
?
? A?K
/ A?K
/ A#K
A<
AA
/?
A?
C, /#
;
6A# C> A#
A"
A/ ) "K +
A#
AA
/
9
D
A;
77.7 A#
?
/
-
? /
A
&.((
K4446/K /
/#
# A
AKK 'E
/"
AKK E
" 8>
/;
; &!
A
"
?
AKK E
AKK 'E
#
& 8> A
K 2#3444AK +
/
&C> #
K4446/K ) /K +
/AK E
2a
I
/?
&
6
) "K +
AK
/
6
?D$> '<7R@ 2DR Ea-
Connection example for M-Max
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
a;Bm
G
9
N
g
]
]
]
F
aY
]
g
aa
F]
a]
cB F3
W
Na3 c[ a3
a0
aF ? 0o A
a3
aa
F
U
d
aW
QQEQ a3
)
F
]
C
a
F
NFo c[
Fo
? Fo A
] F
a
.9E>>
F
F3
oLLLNFo
3 a
aoo =
F0
0 (S([
aoo
FW
W
9/
a
0
]
aoo
aoo =
3
9
S[
a
o I3JLLLao A
F)
.9c[
oLLLNFo ? Fo A 3
(&m Fao
F]
9
N
2a
? 0o A
ao
F
N
?D$> '<7R@ 2DR ^a- A' ^5-
Connection example for M-Max
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example for M-Max
DA2<7cR\<DA D2 \:) $DA\RD? T<7A? \)R@<A?T
The control signal terminals are factory set
as follows:
2: AI1: f-Set = Frequency setpoint
(0 - +10V)
4: AI2: PI-Act = Actual value for PID 2a
controller (process variable, 4 - 20 mA)
8: DI1: FWD = Clockwise rotation field
enable (Forward)
9: DI2: REV = Anticlockwise rotation field
enable (Reverse)
10: DI3: FF1 = Fixed frequency 1
13: DO-: Ready = Ready to start (transistor
output with the voltage of terminal 20)
14: DI4: FF2 = Fixed frequency 2
15: DI5: Reset = Acknowledge fault
message
16: DI6: PI-Off = PID controller deactivated
18: AO: f-Out = Output frequency to motor
(0 - +10 V)
20: DO+: Input voltage for transistor output
(+24 V DC)
22/23: R13/R14 (NO contact):
RUN = Operating signal (relay)
24/25/26: R21/R22/R24
(changeover contact):
Error =Fault signal (relay)
a;BE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example for M-Max
T<$ $DA\RD?
j@G?) E
Reference input through potentiometer
R11. Enable (START/STOP) and direction
D\)T
8 ** For EMC-compliant mains connection,
suitable radio interference
suppression measures must be
implemented according to product
standard IEC/EN 61800-3.
With frequency inverters with a
single-phase mains connection, the
use of parallel links is recommended
**
for equalizing the load on the contacts.
DILM12-XP1
+ + ' !
a;Ba
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example for M-Max
<R<A7 HEa-I
.
F ` a]o % 0oYWo n
[
F
2a
FF
F aY
NFo
Na3
o
F a ] C ) W
F
F
F 3U
]
g FF
a;B^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example for M-Max
R)Lc)A$k <Ah)R\)RT ^5- i<\: )j\)RA? 2<?\)R
D\)
Only for MMXN0-0 (without internal RFI
filter)
2a
$\c\<DA
j@G?) a
Setpoint entry via potentiometer R11 (fs)
and fixed frequency (f1, f2, f3) via terminal
10 and 14 with internal control voltage
Enable (START/STOP) and rotation
direction selection via terminal 8 (FWD)
a;B5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example for M-Max
<R<A7 H^5-I
] ` 3oo % 0oYWo n .
F .S - .Al
a .]
] .a
.F
F
2a
F
FF a
F F F
F
a a a
D\)
F
a
]
K1: The external MMX-LZ RFI
F filter can only be used for
MMXN0-0.
F
aY
]
NFo
Na3
a
F
o
F a ] F3 Fo ) W
F
F FF
F
]
g
a;B3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example for M-Max
)R@<A? D')?T
)RT<DA % mains (version A) or star-connected to a
D\DR <A ')?\ $<R$c<\ HEaJJJI 3-phase 400 V mains.
The 0.75 kW motor described below can be
delta-connected to a single-phase 230 V
2a Motor: P = 0.75 kW
Mains: 1/N/PE 230 V 50/60 Hz
/ : A?K "K<;K J
&/K</ /
//
6/
/
/
&
/&KK-
A
/ A<
/A?9K&K
/
A?K < #KK ?A < /-
/ K9" ' .8 5 K4-9
/#/K 71+ "K J /
/ / /
A?K
?4A / ?
K49" ' A A A
G
a;BX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Connection example for M-Max
)RT<DA %
D\DR <A T\R $<R$c<\ H ^5JJJI Motor: P = 0.75 kW
Mains: 3/PE 400 V 50/60 Hz
X [ -hh *hSPh g
A
]
X
2a
A
h4PGX
AA
A A A
A
4X4hh-
] ] ]
A ]S X
X-]-h4h
A
A
A A A
-hh
AG=
A X
hGM* 7 ] ] ] a
a;BV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Rapid Link System 4.0
kT\)@ Dh)Rh<)i D2 G<' <A> 5Jm @D'c?)T
Rapid Link is a remote switching and Pluggable connection cables with
installation system. standard terminals reduce the wiring
Thanks to its compact design and its high requirement and provide the preferred
installation technology for conveying
2a degree of protection to IP65 these motor
starters can be installed in the direct system.
vicinity of the motor.
B
^
-hh
X[ -hh
Y X[
X [ -hh %
*hSPh g ?
/ ) O
R
+ $
Q
.
N
V
&
W
>
a;B*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Rapid Link System 4.0
Function modules: Motor connection:
RAMO motor starter (Motor Control Unshielded motor cable
Unit) three-phase, electronic DOL Shielded motor cable (EMC)
starter or reversing starter, with
RD'c$\ 2)\cR)T
electronic motor protection for the
assigned ratings of 90 W to 3 kW
The system is installed with a power bus
and data bus that are plugged into all 2a
(at 400 V).
modules of the Rapid Link system.
RASP speed control unit
three-phase, frequency controlled Customer and sector-specific
motor starter (fixed speeds, two requirements for material handling
rotation directions, soft starting), in four applications are the main focus of system
ratings (2.4 A/3.3 A/4.3 A/ 5.6 A) with design.
electronic motor protection for Rapid Link version 4.0 provides modules
assigned ratings from 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW with the following features:
(at 400 V). Degree of protection IP65
Ambient temperature during operation
Power bus: from -10 C to +55 C
Incoming supply (3 AC 400 V) via Max. cable length 10 m
circuit-breaker for overload and AS-Interface Profi 7.4 for
short-circuit protection communication and diagnostics
Incoming supply for ribbon cable Pluggable terminal design to ISO 23570
Ribbon cable fr 400 V AC Local operation/hand operation
End-piece for flat cable Maintenance and manual override
Flexible busbar junction switches (optional)
Power adapter cable to flexible busbar RAMO-D electronic DOL starter
junction
RAMO-W electronic reversing starter
Round cable for 400 V AC
RASP frequency controlled speed
a;BB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Rapid Link System 4.0
?D$> '<7R@ ;-
?)$\RDA<$ T\R\)R
-
A
I]-
9A
X
-
2a
X
]
^
I ]-
h
-
-
A
X
]
X
X
9 APh : h X
-
-
X
54
-
A
X
]
]
I]-
A
5I
#
*
-
-
P
*
X
A
X
X[
]
X
]
]
A
A
A
M
P
#
G
X
A
-
*
a
X
*
]
Optional variant:
Repair switch
Actuation of external brake (230 V)
Actuator output
a;Emm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Rapid Link System 4.0
?D$> '<7R@ ;-
?)$\RDA<$ R)h)RT<A7 T\R\)R
-
A
I]-
9A
X
-
2a
X
]
^
A
-
I ]-
h
-
A
X
]
X
X
9 APh : h X
-
-
X
54
-
A
X
]
]
I]-
A
5I
#
*
-
-
P
*
X
A
X
X[
]
X
]
]
A
A
A
M
P
#
G
X
A
-
*
a
X
*
]
Optional variant:
Repair switch
Actuation of external brake (230 V)
Actuator output
a;EmE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR T\R\)RT A' 'R<h)T
Rapid Link System 4.0
?D$> '<7R@ ;-
R)Lc)A$k <Ah)R\)R
I]-
X
h I]-
-*
2a
X
]
-
A
D-E
-
-
A
X
-DE
]
D]E
DE
]
X
X
-
-
9 APh : h
X
54
DE
A
X
-
XDE
]
]
A
5I
I]-
A
#
*
-
-
P
*
A ] X
A
X
]
]
A
A
M
- P
X * #
X
A
A
*
]
Optional variant:
Repair switch
Actuation of external brake (230 V)
Device fans
Internal braking resistor
a;Ema
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
7)
^;E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
RMQ System
Commands and signals are the Spring-loaded Cage Clamp connections
fundamental functions for controlling for reliable and maintenance free
machines and processes. The required contact,
control signals are produced either Switching contacts suitable for use with
manually by pilot devices or mechanically electronic devices to EN 61131-2:
by position switches. The respective 5 V/1 mA,
application governs the protection type, user-programmable switching
the shape and color.
3^ Advanced technology has been used
performance on all selector switch
actuators: momentary/maintained
consistently in control circuit devices All actuators in illuminated and
RMQ-Titan . The use of LED elements non-illuminated version,
and laser inscription throughout offer Emergency switching off pushbuttons
maximum reliability, efficiency and with pull and turn-to-release function,
flexibility. In detail, this means: Emergency switching off pushbuttons
High-quality optics for a uniform with lighting option for active safety,
appearance, Contacts switch differing potentials,
Highest degree of protection up to IP67 For use also in safety-related circuits
and IP69K (suitable for steam-jet using positive operation and positive
cleaning), opening contacts,
Clear contrast using LED element Complying with industry Standard
lighting, even in daylight, IEC/EN60947.
1)
Cage Clamp is a registered trade mark of
Up to 100,000 h, i.e. machine lifespan,
Messrs. WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH, Minden
Impact and vibration resistant,
LED operating voltage from 12 to 500 V,
Low power consumption only 1/6 of EX TkT\)@ Dh)Rh<)i
filament lamps,
Expanded operating temperature range
-25 to +70 C,
Light testing circuit,
Built-in safety circuits for highest
operational reliability and accessibility,
wear-resistant and clearly contrasting
laser inscription,
Customer-specific symbols and
inscriptions from 1 off,
Text and symbols can be freely
combined,
Terminal type using screws and Cage
Clamp1) throughout,
^;a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
RMQ System
;<\A TkT\)@ Dh)Rh<)i
3^
^;^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
RMQ System
DcR;ik GcT:!c\\DA DkT\<$> i<\: 'Dc!?) $DA\$\
Eaton has added more operator elements The joystick allows the control of up to four
to its highly successful range of pilot directions of movement on machines.
devices RMQ-Titan. It has a modular Different variants of the joystick have 2/4
surface mounting. Contact elements from positions and other variants have 2 settings
the RMQ-Titan range are used. The bezels for each position. This allows for example
and front frames are of the familiar two speed settings for each direction. For
RMQ-Titan format and color. this a standard NO and an NO early-make
3^ are fitted in series. Momentary contact and
DcR;ik GcT:!c\\DA
latching contact versions are possible.
The four-way pushbuttons enable users to
control machines and systems in four V V
directions of movement. Each direction of
;
movement is being assigned one contact ; M
element. The pushbutton has four
individual button plates. They can be
specifically selected for various
applications and can be laser-inscribed to
suit the customer's requirements.
)?)$\DR Ti<\$: $\c\DRT
The selector switch actuators have four
positions. The actuator is available either
as a rotary head or as a thumb-grip. One
contact element is assigned to each On
and each Off position.
^;5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
RMQ System
!)?T customized inscriptions to be designed and
Eaton offers various types of labels for all these can be subsequently applied to the
operating elements. Versions available labels by laser, permanently and proof
are: against wiping off. Section
Blank, Labeleditor, page 3-13
With direction arrows,
With inscription 01020304.
Customised inscriptions are also possible.
The software Labeleditor enables
3^
DA\$\ h)RT<DAT
DA\$\ )?)@)A\T
x x x x $*
J 38D %8%
$+
M22-(C)K(C)01
x x x x $
V K@+ +@+
$'
M22-(C)K01D2)
x x $&
V ;@& +@+
$
M22-K10P
1) Stroke in connection with front element.
2) N/C: Positive opening safety function according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
^;3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
RMQ System
3^ $ $
V K@G +@+
M22-CK20
x x $! $!
$+ $+
V ;@M +@+
M22-CK02
x x $! $*
$+ $
V ;@M K@G +@+
M22-CK112)
)?2;@DA<\DR<A7 $DA\$\ )?)@)A\T
x x x
X A
^;X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
RMQ System
@)R7)A$k;T\DGZD22 GcT:!c\\DAT& TkT\)@ Dh)Rh<)i
&
K&
3^
,+
GV
#
0
^;V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
RMQ System
The new emergency stop or emergency-off An optional illuminated ring enables
pushbutton actuators for the RMQ-Titan emergency-stop/off pushbutton actuators
range of pilot devices for global use have a on a machine or a plant to be made more
palm shaped design with a 45 or 60 mm conspicuous. Even in darkened
diameter. They are available with or environments, the position of these
without keys, turn-releasable, pushbutton actuators is clearly indicated.
non-illuminated, illuminated with standard The illuminated ring also clearly indicates
LEDs or with mechanical switch position the operating state from a considerable
3^ indication (green/red) in the center of the distance. When tripped, for example, it is
actuator element. The self-monitoring possible to activate three separately
contact elements ensure extensive controllable LED rows as a running light.
operational safety; even with a faulty
installation or after excessive force is used
for actuation. As well as the emergency-off
NC contact, the modular contact elements
feature an integrated second contact for
querying the mechanical connection to the
emergency stop actuator element. The
contact elements are available for front or
bottom fixing, for single or dual-channel
safety circuits up to SIL 3 in accordance
with IEC 62061 or Performance Level PL e
to EN ISO 13849-1.
^;*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
RMQ Engineering
TT)@!?k A' 2cA$\<DA
aa-Em
MM0@@@
3^
MM0
@@@ ;V
MM0
@@@ ;V
X A X A A
- ] - ] ]
When the self-monitoring contact is mounted correctly, the N/O contact is closed.
The emergency switching off/Stop circuit is activated via series connection of N/C and
N/Os if
the emergency switching off/stop pushbutton is actuated or
the self-monitoring contact is isolated mechanically from the pushbutton
^;B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
RMQ Engineering
)R@<A? @R><A7T A' 2cA$\<DA Ac@!)RT H'<T\<A$\<h) Ac@!)RZ$DA\$\ T)Lc)A$)I&
3mmE^
)7 )3
)"
3^ 47 )3 43
)" 4"
37 )3 43 33
aa;Xm1) Ue AC/DC
% H
1x 60 V
% $( H
2x 90 V
3x 120 V
... ...
; M ; M ; M ; M Vx 240 V
aa;aam Ue
MM0GVH MM0=>=>0@@@ 1x 220 V DC
MM0MMV 1) For increasing the voltage
AC/DC.
aa;a^m;1) Ue
%
1x 400 V~
( ( '
2x 500 V~
1) AC for increasing the voltage
3 D 3 D 3 D
50/60 Hz.
^;Em
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
RMQ Engineering
DAA)$\<DA 2DR ?<7:\ \)T\
The test button is used to check operation
of the indicator lights independently of the
respective control state. Decoupling
elements prevent voltage feedback.
aa;;
for Ue = 12 to 240 V AC/DC (also for light test
with signal towers SL) 3^
;K ;K ;K K
;, ;, ;, ,
M ;
M ;
% %( !
M ;
; ; ; MM00
; ; ;
Test button
1) Only for elements 12 to 30 V.
^;EE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
RMQ Engineering
aa;a^m;
for Ue = 85 to 264 V AC/50 60 Hz
;
;K ;K ;K K ;
3^
;, ;, ;, , M
% !( ( '
M ;
M ;
M ;
MM0MKV0
; ; ;
^;Ea
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
RMQ Inscription
!)?)'<\DR
Button plate in green with special
inscription
Basic type: M22-XDH-*
1. * = Colour (here G for green),
2.* = File name generated by Labeleditor
Please order:
1 x M22-XDH-G-RMQ_Titan_xxxxx.zip 3^
Double actuator pushbutton with white
cT\D@<l)' <AT$R<G\<DA D2 ')h<$)T cT<A7 pushbutton plates and special symbols
\:) !)?)'<\DR TD2\iR) Basic type: M22-DDL-*-*-*
You can label your device to your individual
1. * = Colour (here W for white),
requirements in four simple steps:
2. and 3. * = File name assigned by
Download the inscription software: Labeleditor; must be stated here 2 x
www.eaton.com/moeller/support
Please order:
keyword: Labeleditor
1 x M22-DDL-W-RMQ_Titan_xx
Creation of label template (menu-guided
xxx.zip-RMQ_Titan_xxxxx.zip
in the software)
Send the label template to the factory by
email. The email address is automatically Key-operated button, 2 positions,
set for the selected product by the individual lock mechanism no. MS1,
program. When your template is sent, the individual symbol
Labeleditor issues a file name such as Basic type: M22-WRS*-MS*-*
RMQ_Silver_12345.zip. This file name WRS*: * = Number of positions,
is part of the article to be ordered (see MS*: * = Number of individual lock
Ordering examples). mechanism,
Send order to the Eaton sales office or -*: * = File name assigned in Labeleditor
the electrical engineering wholesaling. Please order:
R')R<A7 )j@G?)T 1x
M22-XST insert label for M22S-ST-X M22-WRS2-MS1-RMQ_Titan_xxxxxx.zip
legend label mount with special
inscription
Basic type: M22-XST-*
* = File name generated by Labelditor
Please order:
1 x M22-XST-RMQ_Titan_xxxxxx.zip
^;E^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Signal Towers SL
<7A? Di)RT . )h)Rk\:<A7 cA')R h<Tc? $DA\RD? \ ?? \<@)T
Signal towers SL (IP65) indicate machine RD'c$\ 2)\cR)T
states using visible and acoustic signals. Continuous light, flashing light, strobe
Mounted on control panels or on light and acoustic device can be
machines, they can be reliably recognized combined as required.
as continuous light, flashing light, strobe Free programmability permits the
light or acoustic device even from a actuation of five addresses.
3^ distance, and dealt with as necessary. Simple assembly without tools by
bayonet fitting.
Automatic contacting by built-in contact
pins.
Excellent illumination by specially
shaped lenses with Fresnel effect.
Use of filament lamps or LEDs as
required.
A large number of complete devices
simplifies selection, ordering and
stockkeeping for standard applications.
^;E5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Signal Towers SL
RD7R@@!<?<\k
K ;
+ V
+
3^
+
;+# F
, ,
K K
M
M
; ;
V+,KM;
^;E3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
LS-Titan position switches
)i $D@!<A\<DAT 2DR kDcR TD?c\<DAT i<\: ;<\AS
G
3^ 45U<
45U<
$\c\<A7 ')h<$)T ;<\AS T<@G?k In addition, all the operating heads and the
TAG 2<\\<A7 adapter for accepting the RMQ-Titan
Another unique feature is the possibility to pushbuttons have a bayonet fitting that
combine actuators from the RMQ-Titan enables quick and secure fitting. Using the
range with the position switches LS-Titan. bayonet fitting, the heads can be attached
Pushbuttons, selector switches or in any of the four directions (4 x 90).
emergency switching off pushbuttons can
all be directly snapped on to any position
switch as operating head. The complete
unit then has at least the high protection
type IP66 at front and rear.
^;EX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
LS-Titan position switches
h)Rh<)i
3^
LS, LSM LS4ZB
^;EV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
LS-Titan position switches
2)\k GDT<\<DA Ti<\$:)T 5-& -
Eaton safety position switches have been Positive opening is an opening movement
specially designed for monitoring the by which it is ensured that the main
position of protective guards such as contacts of a switch have attained the
doors, hinged flaps, shrouds and protective open position at the same time as the
guards. They meet the requirements of the keypad assumes the Off position. Eaton
employers' liability insurance Association position switches all meet these
3^ for the testing of positive opening position requirements.
switches for safety functions (GS-ET-15).
)R\<2<$\<DA
These requirements include:
All Eaton safety position switches are
Position switches for safety functions certified by the employers' liability
must be designed so that the safety insurance Association or by the Technical
function cannot be bypassed manually or Monitoring Service (TV), Rheinland.
simple tools. Simple tools are: pliers,
screwdrivers, pins, nails, wire, scissors,
penknives etc.
In addition to these requirements, LS...ZB VG;&K VGVKV;V VFV;,
position switches offer additional 1 /%C/%1J -%<CO*J 1 /%C/%1J -%<CO*J 1 /%C/%1J -%<CO*J
J%DJ%# D*%JT J%DJ%# D*%JT J%DJ%# D*%JT
manipulation safety by means of an
operating head which can rotate but LS4ZB LSZBZ LSZB
cannot be removed.
DT<\<h) DG)A<A7
^;E*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
LS-Titan position switches
O)RTDAA)? GRD\)$\<DAP !k @DA<\DR<A7 \:) GRD\)$\<h) ')h<$)
LSZB LS4ZB
Door open
LS...ZB
disconnects
power
No danger
3^
-
closed Open
Safety contact
Signalling contact
M; MM M; MM
;K ;, ;K ;,
^;EB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
LS-Titan position switches
NA:A$)' G)RTDAA)? GRD\)$\<DAO i<\: T)GR\) T<7A? 2DR 'DDR GDT<\<DA
LSZBZ
Stop command
Waiting time
Machine is stopped
Protective mechanism
open
3^ No danger
Door closed and Coil at (A1, A2) de-energized also with mains failure or wire breakage:
interlocked Door interlocked = safe state
Safety contact (21 - 22) closed
Signalling contact (11 - 12) closed
Lock door Switch off the voltage from coil (A1, A2)
1st actuator interlocked
2nd safety contact (21 - 22) closes
^;am
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
LS-Titan position switches
LS-S11-FT-ZBZ
Safety contact
Signalling contact
Interlocked
Released
; ; ; Open
M M M
3^
M; MM M; MM M; MM
;K ;, ;K ;, ;K ;,
Door closed and Coil at (A1, A2) de-energized also with mains failure or wire breakage:
interlocked Door interlocked = safe state
Safety contact (21 - 22) closed
Signalling contact (13 - 14) open
Lock door Switch off the voltage from coil (A1, A2)
1st actuator interlocked
2nd safety contact (21 - 22) closes
^;aE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
LS-Titan position switches
NRD$)TT GRD\)$\<DA A' )A:A$)' G)RTDAA)? GRD\)$\<DAO i<\: T)GR\) T<7A? 2DR 'DDR
GDT<\<DA
LSZBZ
Stop command
Waiting time
Process sequence halted
Protective mechanism
3^ open
Product OK
M; MM M; MM M; MM
;; ;M ;; ;M ;; ;M
Door open both contacts in the open position, even with tampering with simple tools
^;aa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
LS-Titan position switches
LS-S11-MT-ZBZ
Safety contact
Signalling contact
Interlocked
; ; ; Released
M M M
Open
M; MM M; MM M; MM
;K ;, ;K ;, ;K ;,
3^
^;a^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
LS-Titan position switches
O)RTDAA)? GRD\)$\<DAP !k @DA<\DR<A7 D2 \:) GRD\)$\<h) @)$:A<T@
LSRI(A) /TKG LSRI(A)/TS
Hinged protective
cover open
LSR... disconnects
power
No danger
3^
Safety contact
Signalling contact
M; MM M; MM
;K ;, ;K ;,
^;a5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
LS-Titan position switches
^;a3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
LSE-Titan electronic position switches
G)R\<A7 GD<A\ hR<!?k '=cT\!?)
The operating point on electronic position
switches LSE-Titan is adjustable and
variable. Two high-speed and bounce-free
PNP switching outputs enable high
switching frequencies.
The position switch is overload as well as
3^ conditionally short-circuit proof and has
snap-action switching performance. This
ensures a defined and reproduceable
switching point. The operating point lies in
the range from 0.5 to 5.5 mm
(as supplied = 3 mm).
Adjustment to a new operating point is #2NDJ
carried out as follows:
*1S
Move the plunger from the original to the
new switch position. For this purpose,
press the setting pushbutton for 1 s. The
LED now flashes with a high pulse
frequency and the new operating point is
;D
retentively set.
D%J
The LSE-11 and LSE-02 complete devices 6S M
can be used in safety-oriented
connections. They have the same function D%J
as electromechanical position switches.
E<B ' 4<F$B
D\) E0B+20-
This means that all the devices are also
$ BH
suitable for safety applications designed
H4 44<2G
for personnel or process protection.
^;aX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Analog electronic position switches
Two part no. are available: DA\$\ \Rh)? '<7R@
LSE-AI with current output, LSE-AI
LSE-AU with voltage output.
6
MV
A?D7& @)$:A<$??k $\c\)' GDT<\<DA
Ti<\$:)T '<R)$\?k ?<A>)' i<\: \:) iDR?' D2
c\D@\<DA , ?
^;aV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Analog electronic position switches
DAA)$\<DA '<7R@
0
A%
MVV 6
#1-8:D1D AM
, ( MV 6
84:- A;
3^
V
5 ,VV %
V
0
A%
MVV 6
#1-8:D1D AM
;V 6
84:- A;
V
V ( ;V %
V
^;a*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Analog electronic position switches
<R$c<\ Tk@!D?
Normal scenario
; ;
Q1 4 20 mA 0 10 V
Q2 Ue Ue
LED
3^
J J
Fault scenario
; ;
Q1 0 mA 0V
Q2 0V 0V
LED
J J
J J
.;D .;D
^;aB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Functionality
A'c$\<h) )ATDRT
Inductive sensors are used to detect metal TT)@!?k GR\T
objects. The objects are detected through
an electromagnetic field.
With the ability to detect at close range,
inductive proximity sensors are very useful
for precision measurement and inspection
3^ applications.
Di A <A'c$\<h) T)ATDR iDR>T
Inductive sensors create an invisible high
frequency oscillation field. When metal
objects are brought into this field, this
oscillating field is affected. Each sensor
has a specific sensing range switch point
so that metal target detection is very
accurate and repeatable.
If a metal object is brought into the field
created by the sensor, this is interrupted
and causes a reduction in the current
flowing through the sensor coil (eddy
current damping). The detector circuit
senses this change and sends a signal via
the sensor output.
^;^m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Functionality
shapes the field and the size of the coil DRR)$\<DA 2$\DRT
determines the sensing range. Multiply the sensing distance by the factor
The resonance circuit creates a high given below.
frequency oscillation of the R7)\ )ATDR T<l)
electromagnetic field (between 100 Hz and D!=)$\
1 MHz). If a metal object is located in the
5.* Ea E* ^m
field, this causes a change in the magnetic @@ @@ @@ @@
field oscillation.
Stainless 0.90 0.90 1.0 1.0 3^
This change creates an eddy current Steel 4001)
which dampens the signal fed back to the
Stainless 0.65 0.70 0.70 0.75
sensor coil.
Steel 3002)
The detector circuit senses the change
Brass 0.35 0.45 0.45 0.45
and switches ON at a particular set point
(amplitude). This ON signal generates a Aluminium 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.40
signal to the solid-state output. Copper 0.30 0.25 0.35 0.30
The output circuit remains active until the
1) Stainless steel 400 series to ASTM
target leaves the sensing field. The
oscillator responds with an increase in A240, martensitic or ferritic,
amplitude, and when it reaches the magnetizable.
2) Stainless steel 300 series to ASTM
setpoint value, the detector circuit
switches OFF. The output returns to its A240, austenitic, non-magnetizable.
normal state. The index of stainless steels is provided in
EN 10088-1.
\)R<? i<R) D2 \:) \R7)\ D!=)$\
The sensing ranges stated by the sensor
manufacturer are usually based upon
ferrite targets made of carbon-rolled steel
(IE FE 235) defined by ISO 630.
Sensing ranges to targets made of other
materials have to have a correction factor
applied as listed in the table below. To use
this table, multiply the sensing distance of
the device by the factor given below.
^;^E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Functionality
G$<\<h) T)ATDRT
Capacitive sensors are designed to detect Capacitor
both metallic and nonmetallic targets. They
are ideally suited for liquid level control
and for sensing powdered or granulated
material.
G)R\<DA D2 \:) $G$<\<h) T)ATDRT
3^ Capacitive sensors operate using a
capacitor. This consists of two metal plates
that are separated by an insulating
dielectric material. The function of this type
of sensor is based on dielectric
capacitance, which is the ability of a
dielectric to store an electrical charge.
The distance between the plates Plates
determines the ability of the capacitor to Switch
store an electrical charge. Dielectric
If an object is put into the electrical field. When this principle is applied to the
the capacitance of the capacitor changes. capacitive sensor, one capacitive plate is
This change is used to implement the on/off part of the switch, the enclosure (the
switch function. sensor face) is the insulator. The target is
the other plate. Ground is the common
path.
Capacitive proximity sensors can detect
any target that has a dielectric constant
greater than air. Liquids have high
dielectric constants. Metal also makes a
good target.
^;^a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Functionality
Capacitive sensor
Capacitive sensors consist essentially of solid and liquid materials is greater than
3^
four basic elements: that for air.
Sensor (Dielectric) Objects made of non-conductive materials
Resonance circuit affect the active surface of a capacitive
Detector circuit proximity switch in the same way. The
Output circuit. coupling capacitance is increased.
As an object approaches the sensor, the Materials with a high dielectric constant
dielectric constant of the capacitor achieve great switching distances.
changes. The oscillator circuits vibration D\)T
begins when feedback capacitance is When scanning organic materials (wood,
detected. This is just the opposite in the grain, etc.) it must be noted that the
inductive proximity sensor, where the attainable switching distance is greatly
vibration is damped when the target is dependent on their moisture content.
present. (Water = 80!)
22)$\T
Capacitive sensors are activated both by
conductive as well as non-conductive
objects.
Metals achieve the greatest switching
distances due to their high conductivity.
Derating factors for various metals, such
as are necessary with inductive sensors,
need not be taken into account.
Actuation by objects made of
non-conductive materials (insulators):
When an insulator is brought between the
electrodes of a capacitor, the capacitance
rises relative to the dielectric constant e of
the insulator. The dielectric constant for all
^;^^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Functionality
A2?c)A$) D2 )Ah<RDA@)A\? $DA'<\<DAT \)R<? /r
As can be seen from the following diagram,
the switching distance Sr is dependent on Air, vacuum 1
the dielectric constant r of the object to Teflon 2
be monitored. Wood 2-7
Paraffin 2.2
Metal objects produce the maximum
Kerosene 2.2
switching distance (100 %).
3^ With other materials, it is reduced relative
Oil of terpentine
Transformer oil
2.2
2.2
to the dielectric constant of the object to be Paper 2.3
monitored. Polyethylene 2.3
Polypropylene 2.3
C
&V Cable insulation 2.5
Soft rubber 2.5
Silicone rubber 2.8
GV
Polyvinyl chloride 2.9
Polystyrene 3
Celluloid 3
KV Perspex 3.2
Araldite 3.6
;V Bakelite 3.6
; Silica glass 3.7
;V MV ,V GV &V ;VV Hard rubber 4
DC ? Oil-impregnated paper 4
Chipboard 4
The following table lists the dielectric
Porcelain 4.4
constants r of some important materials.
Laminated paper 4.5
Due to the high dielectric value of water,
Quartz sand 4.5
the fluctuations with wood can be
Glass 5
significant. Damp wood therefore is
Polyamide 5
registered much more effectively by
Mica 6
capacitive sensors than dry wood.
Marble 8
Alcohol 25.8
water 80
^;^5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Functionality
G\<$? T)ATDRT
Optical sensors use light to detect the G)R\<A7 GR<A$<G?) D2 \:) DG\<$? T)ATDR
presence or absence of an object. The A LED sends a beam of light, which is
main advantages of optical sensors are picked up by a photodetector. An object is
contactless sensing of objects and greatly detected when it passes between the LED
extended sensing ranges. and photodetector, interrupting the light
beam.
Lets look at how an optical sensor works. 3^
Power supply: light, it sends a small amount of current
Feeds the sensor circuit with a to the detector amplifier.
regulated DC voltage. Detector Amplifier:
Modulator: Blocks current generated by the
generates pulses to cycle amplifier and background light. It also provides
LED at desired frequency. amplification of the signal received to a
Source current amplifier usable level, and sends it through to the
LED demodulator.
Lens Demodulator:
Target object or reflector Sorts out the light thrown out by the
Photodetector: sensor from all other light in the area. If
Either a photodiode or a phototransistor the demodulator decides the signals it
device, selected for a maximum receive are okay, it signals the output.
sensitivity at the source LEDs emitted
Output:
light wave-length. Both the source LED Performs switching routine when
and the detector have protective directed to do so by the demodulator.
lenses. When the sensor picks up the
^;^3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Functionality
)\)$\<DA @)\:D'T
^;^X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Applications
RD>)A DD? )\)$\<DA
^;^V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Applications
$:<A<A7 GRD$)TT
DD? DT<\<DA
^;^*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Applications
D\\?) <??<A7 )\)$\<DA
^;^B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Applications
DAh)kDR kT\)@ DA\RD?
\$>
)<7:\ DA\RD?
^;5m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Applications
R\DA <??;)h)? )\)$\<DA
<' )\)$\<DA
^;5E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Applications
D??!DD\: DA\RD?
The long range polarized reflex controls The rugged design makes it also suitable
are used for the time control of a toll for continuous operation in extreme
3^ barrier. As soon as the car that has paid weather conditions.
passes, the barrier closes in order to
ensure that the next car stops. With the
initiator E67 Long Range Perfect Prox you
can mount the sensor on just one side
instead of both. It detects cars with
different colors and finishes whilst reliably
ignoring all other background objects.
^;5a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Applications
c?> \)R<? )\)$\<DA
R\T R)T)A$)
^;5^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Applications
R\T R)T)A$)
^;55
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Applications
G))' @DA<\DR<A7
D\<DA DA\RD?
^;53
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Applications
?)R ?T\<$ )! R)> )\)$\<DA
G)R ')\)$\<DA
Comet sensors
Paper
Roller
^;5X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<?D\ ')h<$)T
Sensors Applications
@7) RA<A7
^;5V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\)T
3^
^;5*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
7)
h)Rh<)i 5;a
)\)R Ti<\$:)T 5;E5
5;E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
Overview
T) A' ')T<7AT
Eaton cam switches and The following designs are available:
switch-disconnectors are used as: Flush mounting,
Main switches, main switches used as Centre mounting,
Emergency-Stop devices, Surface mounting,
ON-OFF switches,
Service distribution board mounting,
Safety switches, Rear mounting.
Changeover switches, Refer to the latest issue of our main catalog
Reversing switches, star-delta for Industrial Switchgear.
45 switches, multi-speed switches,
Step switches, control switches,
Other contact arrangements are listed in
the K115 special catalog in addition to the
coding switches, meter selector
switches listed in the main catalog.
switches.
(www.eaton.com/moeller/support
(Catalogs)).
5;a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
ON-OFF switches, main switches, maintenance switches
A;22 Ti<\$:)T& @<A Ti<\$:)T
T0-2-1 < * These switches can also be used as
P1-25 * *
switch-disconnectors for lighting, heating or
8
P1-32 8 7 combined loads.
P3-63 7
Main switches to IEC/EN 60204; for rear
3
P3-100 mounting switches with door interlock,
P5-125 padlocking feature, finger proof incoming
P5-160 terminals, N and PE terminal, red thumb-grip
P5-250 handle (black, if required), warning label.
P5-315
If it is not clear which drive is associated 45
with which main switch, an additional
maintenance switch is required close to
( each drive.
5;^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
ON-OFF switches, main switches, maintenance switches
<R$c<\ '<7R@ )j@G?) 2DR @<A\)AA$) mH^I;^;E3X*^ @<A\)AA$) Ti<\$:
Ti<\$:)T i<\: ?D' T:)''<A7 $DA\$\
A' HDRI Ti<\$: GDT<\<DA <A'<$\DR
; cA$\<DA
M D' T:)''<A7% When
K
switching on, the main
current contacts close
0
; V first, then the contactor
,H;0
is activated via the
late-make N/O contact.
45 ;;
; K +
M
9+
When switching off,
M , G 9G the contactor is first
M; disconnected by
M opening the
MM early-make contact,
;K ;K
then the main contacts
;; isolate the motor
;, ;, supply.
i<\$: GDT<\<DA
; K + F 9 ;;
<A'<$\<DA% The
position of the switch
;
can be signalled to the
M , G & ;V ;M
control panel or control
room via additional NO
;
and NC contacts.
; M ;;
M
P1: On
P2: Off
Q11: Load shedding
)$43$"!$0
/$))$)4
($)7
5;5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
Changeover switches, reversing switches
:A7)Dh)R Ti<\$:
T0-3-8212 ! + *
T3-3-8212 !, +
!
T5B-3-8212 +
*
T5-3-8212
T6-3-8212 '
&
T8-3-8212
!,
!!
!+
'
45
)h)RT<A7 Ti<\$:)T
T0-3-8401 ! + *
T3-3-8401 ! , +
!
T5B-3-8401 +
*
T5-3-8401
'
&
!,
'
5;3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
(Reversing) star-delta switches
\R;')?\ Ti<\$:)T
T0-4-8410 ) 4 3
7
T3-4-8410 )
4
3
V "
T5B-4-8410 !
T5-4-8410 0
/
GK+
(
)7
))
)4
)3
45 4 )
)"
)!
)0
)
4
4 )
1)
Standard contactor interlock
Section Interlock circuits, page 4-11
5;X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
Multi-Speed Switches
a TG))'T& E DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DA
GG)' i<A'<A7 ) 43
T0-4-8440 7 ) 4
)
T3-4-8440 4
3
T5B-4-8440 "
!
T5-4-8440 0
/
(
)7
))
)4
'
45
)3
) )"
)!
4 4 )0
4
) )
without connections
a T)GR\) i<A'<A7T
T0-3-8451 )43
T3-3-8451 7 ) 4
)
T5B-3-8451 4
3
T5-3-8451 "
!
0
/
(
)7
))
' )4
) 4
) ) 4 4
5;V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
Multi-Speed Switches
a TG))'T& a DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DAT
GG)' i<A'<A7
T0-6-15866 ; M
M ; V ; M
T3-6-15866 ;
M
,
+
G
F
&
'+ 9
;V
;;
45
;M
;
;,
;+
;G
;F
;&
;9
; MV
M M M;
MM
M M
; ;
M,
5;*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
Multi-Speed Switches
^ TG))'T& E DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DA
GG)' i<A'<A7 RRA7)@)A\& T<A7?) ) 4 3
i<A'<A7 2DR ?Di TG))' 7 ) 4 3
T0-6-8455 )
4
T3-6-8455 3
"
T5B-6-8455 !
0
T5-6-8455 /
(
)7
))
45
)4
)3
'!' )"
)!
)0
)/
)
)(
47
4)
44
43
4"
)
)
4 4
4
) ) ) )
5;B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
Multi-Speed Switches
^ TG))'T& E DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DA
GG)' i<A'<A7 RRA7)@)A\& T<A7?) ) 4 3
i<A'<A7 2DR :<7: TG))' 7 ) 4 3
T0-6-8459 )
4
T3-6-8459 3
"
!
0
/
(
)7
'!' ))
45
)4
T5B-6-8459 )3
)"
T5-6-8459 )!
)0
)/
)
)(
47
4)
+, 44
43
4"
)
)
4 4
4
) ) ) )
5;Em
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
Interlock circuits
Interlock circuits between cam switches Protection against automatic restarting
and contactors with overload relays after a motor overload or voltage failure
provide neat and economical solutions for The facility for remote disconnection
many switching drive tasks. The following (e.g. emergency-stop) can be provided
points are common to all interlock circuits: by one or more Off pushbuttons.
<\:Dc\ @<AT '<T$DAA)$\<DA H aVI <\: @<AT '<T$DAA)$\<DA H a*I
Mains disconnection only by contactor Mains disconnection by contactor and
primarily for star-delta connection switch
V ;; V
45
;;
M M
; ;
V V
V; M
:8JC:4 D% J1:8
V; M :8JC:4 D% J1:8
MF
M&
;;
:R%C D% J1:8
;; :R%C D% J1:8
R1J/:NJ 618D R1J/:NJ 618D
;;
#1D :88% J1:8
;; #1D :88% J1:8
K K
A\)R?D$> i<\: $DA\$\DR H aBI A\)R?D$> i<\: $DA\$\DR H ^mI
Contactor can be energized only when Contactor can be energized only when
switch is in an operating position switch is in an operating position
;; V ;; V
M M
; ;
V V
V; M :8JC:4 D% J1:8 V; M :8JC:4 D% J1:8
M9
KV
;
;; ; ;;
:R%C D% J1:8 :R%C D% J1:8
;; ;;
5;EE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
Single-phase approach circuits
Meter changeover switches enable you to three-phase systems with only one
measure currents, voltages and power in measuring device.
)$4
4$3
3$)
+ *
3$)
4$3
)43
)$4 )4 3
)$
4$
3$
! + !
! + * !
+ * +
45
7
* ! * ) )
4 4
!!,& 3 !' 3
" "
! !
0 0
/ /
(
)7
))
)4
; M
5;Ea
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
Meter changeover Switches
@@)\)R $:A7)Dh)R Ti<\$:
T0-3-8048
T3-3-8048
For measurement via transformers, complete rotation possible
*
8
7
< * 8 7 <
, *
8
7
3
2
45
(
*<
**
*8
5;E^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
Heater switches
E GD?) '<T$DAA)$\<DA& ^ T\)GT
T0-2-8316
T3-2-8316
T5B-2-8316
! + *
, ! + *
!
+
*
!
+,
' +
45 &
! *,
5;E5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
Step switches
A) T\)G $?DT)' <A )$: GDT<\<DA& $D@G?)\) RD\\<DA GDTT<!?)
T0-6-8239 ) 4 3 " ! 0 / ( )7 )) )4
T3-6-8239 )
4
3
"
!
0
/
*,! (
)7
))
)4
)3
)"
)!
)0
45
)/
)
)(
47
4)
44
43
4"
5;E3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
@ Ti<\$:)T
Step switches
\k;Gc\ Ti<\$:)T
A;22 T\k;Gc\ Ti<\$: 7 )
1 pole: T0-1-15401 )
4
2 pole: T0-1-15402 3
"
3-pole: T0-2-15403 !
0
!
45
:A7)Dh)R Ti<\$:)T
1 pole: T0-1-15421 1 pole: T0-1-15431
2 pole: T0-2-15422 2 pole: T0-2-15432
3-pole: T0-3-15423 3-pole: T0-3-15433
47 )
V
V
) ;
4 M
3 K
" ,
8( ! ;,V; +
0 G
/ F
&
( 9
)7 ;V
)) ;;
)4 ;M
5;EX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
7)
DA\$\DRT 3;E5
3;E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactor relays
DA\$\DR R)?kT
Contactor relays are often used in control input and output. All DIL contactor relays
and regulating functions. They are used in have double-break contacts.
large quantities for the indirect control of The Employers' liability insurance
motors, valves, clutches and heating association demands that, for control
equipment. systems of power-driven metalwork
In addition to the simplicity which they presses, the contacts of contactors must
offer in project engineering, panel building, be interlocked and opposing. Interlocking
commissioning and maintenance, the high means that the contacts are mechanically
level of safety which they afford is a major connected to one another such that N/C
factor in their favor. contacts and N/O contacts can never be
53 )$cR<\k
closed simultaneously. At the same time, it
is necessary to ensure that the contact
The contactor relay contacts themselves
gaps are at least 0.5 mm over the lifespan,
constitute a considerable safety feature.
even when defective (e.g. when a contact
By design and construction they ensure
is welded). The contactor relays DILER and
potential isolation between the actuating
DILA fulfil this requirement.
circuit and the operating circuit, in the
de-energized state, between the contact
DA\$\DR R)?kT
Two contactor relay series are available as D'c?)T :h<A7 cj<?<Rk 2cA$\<DAT
a modular system:
Auxiliary contact modules having 2 or 4
Contactor relays DILER,
contacts. The combination of N/O and N/C
Contactor relays DILA. contacts is according to EN 50011. The
auxiliary contact modules of the
contactors DILEM and DILM cannot be
D'c?R TkT\)@ snapped onto the basic device to prevent
The modular system has many advantages duplication of terminal markings e.g.
for the user. The system is formed around contact 21/22 on the basic device and 21/22
basic units, which are equipped with on the add-on auxiliary contact module.
additional functions by means of modules. The DILA and DILM7 to DILM38 contactors
Basic units are intrinsically functional of the DILA-XHIR22 auxiliary contact are
units, consisting of an AC or DC drive and available specially for switching the
four auxiliary contacts. smallest signals for electronic
applications.
3;a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactor relays
:) TkT\)@ A' \:) \A'R'
European Standard EN 50011 Terminal For 6 and 8 pole contactor relays, the E
markings, distinctive numbers and version means that four N/O contacts must
reference letters for certain contactor be arranged in the lower/rear contact
relays has a direct bearing on the use and level. If, for example, the available auxiliary
application of the modular system. There contact modules are used in the DILA-22
are various types, which the Standard and DILA-31, they result in contact
differentiates between by means of configurations with reference letters X
reference numbers and reference letters, and Y.
depending on the number and position of
the N/O and N/C contacts in the device, Below are 3 examples of contactors with 4
and their terminal markings.
Ideally devices with the reference letter E
N/O and 4 N/C contacts with different
reference letters. Version E is to be 53
should be used. The basic devices DILA-40, preferred.
DILA-31, DILA-22 as well as DILER-40,
DILER-31 and DILER-22 comply with the E
version.
+ + +
DILA-40 DILA-31 DILA-22
! !* +* ** * ! !* +! ** * ! !* +! *! *
+ ! + * + ! ++ * + ! ++ *+
44 E 44 X 44 Y
DILA40/04 DILA31/13 DILA22/22
3;^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactor relays
D<? $DAA)$\<DAT
On the contactor relay DILA the coil
3 connection A1 is at the top and A2 at the
bottom. As suppressor circuits the
following are connected on the front:
3 RC suppressors
Varistor suppressors
D
The DC operated contactors DILER and
D
DILA have an integrated suppressor
DILER DILA circuit.
53 On the top positioned terminals A1A2 of
the contactor DILER the following
accessories are connected to limit the
relay coil switch off breaking voltage
peaks:
RC suppressors
Free-wheel diode suppressors
Varistor suppressors
cGGR)TTDR $<R$c<\
Electronic equipment is nowadays being coupling mechanisms, can generate
increasingly used in combination with interference voltage pulses and thus cause
conventional switching devices such as function disturbances.
contactors. This equipment includes Since interference-free disconnection is
programmable logic controllers (PLCs) impossible without an accessory, the coils
timing relays and coupling modules, whose may be connected to a suppressor module,
operation can be adversely affected by depending on the application. The
disturbances from interactions between all advantages and disadvantages of the
the components. various suppressor circuits are explained
One of the disturbance factors occurs in the following table.
when inductive loads, such as coils of
electromagnetic switching devices, are
switched off. High cut-off induction
voltages can be produced when such
devices are switched off and, under some
circumstances, can destroy adjacent
electronic devices or, via capacitive
3;5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\)T
53
3;3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactor relays
''<\<DA? 'RDG;Dc\
hD?\7) R)TGDAT)T
RD\)$\)' 7<AT\
A'c$\<DA hD?\7)
D' $cRR)A\ A'
?<@<\<A7 ')2<A)'
<R$c<\ '<7R@
2DR
')?k
- Very 1V
long
53
- average UZD
Yes Short
3;X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactor relays
'<TT<G\<DA \:RDc7:
<R$c<\ '<7R@
''<\<DA? :)\
$<R$c<\Rk
D\)T
- Advan- Dimensioning
tages: uncritical, minimum
possible induction
voltage, very simple
and reliable
53
3;V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactors DIL, overload relays Z
h)Rh<)i D2 $DA\$\DRT& ^;GD?)
53
DILM7 DILM15 DILM17 DILM38 DILM40 DILM72 DILM80 DILM170
3;*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactors DIL, overload relays Z
h)Rh<)i $DA\$\DRT& 5 GD?)
DILEM4
53
DILMP20 DILMP32 DILMP63 DILMP125 DILMP200
DILMP45 DILMP80
3;B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactors DIL, overload relays Z
3;Em
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactors DIL, overload relays Z
DILM150
DILM170
3;EE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactors DIL, overload relays Z
3;Ea
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactors DIL, overload relays Z
DILM1000
DILM1600
DILH1400
DILH2000
DILH2200
DILH2600
3;E^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactors DIL
$$)TTDR<)T
Suppressor circuit DC
RC suppressors
Varistor
suppressors
Motor suppressor to DILM15 to DILM15
53 module
Star-point bridge
Paralleling link to
DILM185A
Mechanical
interlock
Sealable shroud
Cable to DILM820
terminals
Individual coils from from
DILM17 DILM17
Electronic modules
Electronic modules
including coils
Terminal 1)
shroud
Timer module to DILM38 to DILM38
1) Terminal cover to DILM1000
3;E5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactors DIL
DA\$\DRT
These are designed and tested to All contactors up to DILM170 are finger
IEC/EN 60 947, VDE 0660. For every motor and back-of-hand proof to VDE 0160 Part
rating between 3 kW and 900 kW (at 400 V) 100. Additional terminal covers are
there is a suitable contactor available. available from DILM185 onwards.
Double-frame terminal for contactors
Lc<G@)A\ 2)\cR)T DILM7 to DILM170
With the new double frame-clamp the
Magnet system
cable connection area is not limited by
Due to the new electronic operation the
the screw. They give total security with
DC contactors from 17 to 72 A have a
varying cross sections and have
sealing power of only 0.5 W. Even for
protection against incorrect insertion to
170 A is only 2.1 W necessary.
ensure safe connection. 53
Accessible control voltage connections
Integrated auxiliary contact
The coil connections are on the front of
The contactors up to DILM32 have an
the contactor. They are not covered by
integrated auxiliary contact as N/O or
the main current wiring.
N/C contact.
Can be controlled directly from the PLC
Screw or spring-cage terminal
The contactors DILA and DILM to 38 A
The contactors DILE(E)M and
can be controlled directly from the PLC.
DILA/DILM12, including the
Integrated suppressor DC corresponding auxiliary contacts, up to
With all DC contactors DILM a 2000 A, are available with screw or
suppressor is integrated in the spring terminals.
electronics.
Contactors with screwless terminals
Plug-in suppressor circuits AC They have spring-cage terminals in the
With all AC contactors DILM up to 170 A mains current circuit as well as for the
a suppressor can be simply plugged in on coil connections and auxiliary contacts.
the front when required. The shake proof and maintenance free
Conventional control of contactors spring-cage terminals can terminate two
DILM185A to DILM2600 via coil terminals conductors each of 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 with
A1-A2. or without ferrules.
Additional actuation of contactors Connection terminals
DILM250 to DILH2600: Up to DILM72 the connection terminals
Directly from a PLC via terminals A3-A4 for all auxiliary contacts and coils as well
By a low-power contact via terminals as for main conductors can be tightened
A10-A11. with a Pozidriv screwdriver size 2. For
Conventional control of contactors contactors DILM80 to DILM170 Allen
DILM250-S to DILM500-S via coil screws are used.
connections A1-A2. There are two coil
terminals (110 to 120 V 50/60 Hz and
220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz).
3;E3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactors DIL
Mounting operated contactors are no longer
All contactors can be fitted on to a switched on or off in the conventional way
mounting plate with fixing screws. using a coil but by means of an electronic
DILE(E)M and DILM up to 72 A can also unit.
be snapped on to a 35 mm top-hat rail to The integration of electronics in the
IEC/EN 60715. contactor drives makes different technical
Mechanical interlock features possible which enable the
With two connectors and a mechanical contactors to offer outstanding
interlock an interlocked contactor performance in their daily use.
combination up to 170 A can be achieved
without extra space requirement. The A<h)RT? hD?\7) $D<?T
mechanical interlock ensures that both The DILM17 to DILM225A DC operated
DG)R\)' $DA\$\DRT
The market for DC operated contactors is
growing due to the increasing use of
electronics. Whilst AC operated
contactors were used 20 years ago with
additional resistors and specially wound
DC coils with a lot of copper were used till
recently, the next quantum leap has
started. Electronic components are now in
use for the drives of DC operated
contactors.
The xStart contactor series DILM7 to
DILM225A has been particularly optimized
in the development of DC actuated
contactors. The DILM17 to DILM225A DC
3;EX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactors DIL
D?\7) \D?)RA$) When using DC operated contactors from
Contactors are built in compliance with the Eaton in the project design, the issue of
IEC/EN 60947-4-1 standard. The transient voltage surge suppression in
requirement for operational safety even control circuits is therefore unnecessary
with small mains supply fluctuations is since all DC operated contactors are free
implemented with the reliable switching of of system disturbance or are provided with
contactors at between 85 to 110 % of the a suppressor circuit.
rated control circuit voltage. The DC
DA\$\DR '<@)AT<DAT
operated DILM17 to DILM225A contactors
The electronic circuit offers the coil a
now cover an even wider range in which
higher inrush consumption and reduces
they switch reliably. They allow reliable
this after the closing operation to the
operation between 0.7 x Ucmin and
required sealing power. This enables the
1.2 x Ucmax of the rated actuation voltage.
The greater voltage tolerance than
AC and DC operated contactors to be 53
implemented with the same dimensions.
stipulated by the standard increases
When designing AC and DC operated
operating safety even with less stable
contactors for a project, the additional
mains conditions.
problem of different mounting depths is
cGGR)TTDR $<R$c<\ eliminated so that the same accessories
Conventionally operated contactors can be used.
generate voltage peaks at the coil to
current change dI/dt which can have a
negative effect on other components in the
same actuating circuit. To prevent
damage, contactor coils are often
connected in parallel with additional
suppressor circuits (RC suppressors,
varistors or diodes).
Thanks to their electronics, the DC
actuated contactors DILM17 to DILM225A
switch without any effect on the network.
An additional suppressor is therefore
unnecessary since the coils do not
generate any external overvoltages. The
other DILM7 to DILM15 DC operated
contactors have a built-in suppressor
circuit.
3;EV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactors DIL
<$>;cG A' :D?';<A GDi)R
The electronic circuit on the DILM17 to
DILM225A DC operated contactors
controls their operation. A suitably high
power is provided for the pickup to ensure
the reliable switching of the contactor.
A very low sealing power is required for
holding the contactor. The electronics only
provides this power.
53 <$>;
cG
)?<A7
3;E*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Contactors DIL
GG?<$\<DAT The auxiliary contact of the contactor
The three-phase motor dominates the DILM can be used as mirror contact to
electric motor sector. Apart from individual IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Appendix F to show the
low-power drives, which are often condition of the main contacts. A mirror
switched directly by hand, most motors are contact is an N/C contact that cannot be
controlled using contactors and contactor simultaneously closed with the N/O main
combinations. The power rating in contacts.
kilowatts (kW) or the current rating in \:)R GG?<$\<DAT
amperes (A) is therefore the critical feature Contactors for capacitors for power
for correct contactor selection. factor correction DILK for 12.5 to 50
Physical motor design results in that rated kvar/400 V.
currents for the same rating sometimes Lighting contactors for DILL lighting
differ widely. Furthermore it determines the systems for 12 to 20 A/400 V (AC-5a) or 14 53
ratio of the transient peak current and the to 27 A/400 V (AC-5b).
starting current to the rated operational
current (Ie).
Switching electrical heating installations,
lighting fittings, transformers and power
factor correction installations, with their
typical individual characteristics,
increases the wide range of different uses
for contactors.
The operating frequency can vary greatly
in every application. The difference can be,
for example, from less than one operation
per day up to a thousand operations or
more per hour. Quite often, in the case of
motors, a high operating frequency
coincides with inching and plugging duty.
Contactors are actuated by hand or
automatically, using various types of
command devices, depending on the
travel, time, pressure or temperature. Any
interrelationships required between a
number of contactors can easily be
produced by means of interlocks via their
auxiliary contacts.
3;EB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Overload relays Z
D\DR GRD\)$\<DA cT<A7 \:)R@? Dh)R?D' R)?kT
Overload relays are included in the group temperatures depending on the magnitude
of current-dependent protective devices. of the current.
They monitor the temperature of the motor Tripping occurs when the response
winding indirectly via the current flowing in temperature is reached. The tripping time
the supply cables, and offer proven and depends on the magnitude of the current
cost-efficient protection from destruction and preloading of the relay. Whatever the
as a result of: current, the relay must trip out before the
Non starting, motor insulation is endangered, which is
Overload, why EN 60947-4-1 states maximum
Phase failure. response times. To prevent nuisance
0$+ 0
$0'6$% 0 $0'6$% 60:%
(2 ( (2 ( (2 (
( (3 ( (3 ( (3
)0&% )+06$)' ,') 9%6- "0#+"1 ):0%) ' +"1 0)+1 )96 ,8#+"1 %)-
Normal operation (no fault) three-phase overload One phase drops out
Trip bridge
Differential bar
Differential travel
3;am
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Overload relays Z
When the bimetallic strips in the main cover different distances. This differential
current section of the relay deflect as a movement is converted in the device by a
result of three-phase motor overloading, all step-up mechanism into a supplementary
three act on a trip bar and a differential bar. tripping movement, and thus accelerates
A shared trip lever switches over the the tripping action.
auxiliary contact when the limits are
reached. The trip and differential bars lie
Design note Section Motor protection
against the bimetallic strips with uniform
in special applications, page 8-8
pressure. If, in the event of phase failure for
instance, one bimetallic strip does not Further information to motor protection
deflect (or recover) as strongly as the other Section All about Motors, page 8-1
two, then the trip and differential bars will
53
R<GG<A7 $:R$\)R<T\<$T
The overload relays ZE, ZB12, ZB32, ZB65 These characteristic curves are mean
and the ZB150 up to 175 A are, due to the values of the spreads at an ambient air
German Physical/Technical Bureau (PTB), temperature of 20 C from cold. The
suitable for protection of Ex e-motors to the tripping time is dependant upon the
ATEX-Guidelines 94/9 EG. In the relevant current. When units are warm, the tripping
manual all tripping characteristics are delay of the overload relay drops to about a
printed for all currents. quarter of the value shown.
( (
++
(
'( ++
+
$+
$
$+
+ +
(+ (+
)&"
)&"
+ +
$ $
( (
+ '" + '"
(+ (+
"
"
+ +
$ $
(" ("
( (
+$ +$
( ' $ + (+ ( ' $ + (+
* && )!!& && )!!&
3;aE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Overload relays Z
M/
;VV F
GV
,V
MV
18NJ%D
;V
G
,
M
; S16N6
,V
MV
;V 1816N6
% :8#D
G
,
53 M
;
V@G
; ;@+ M K , G & ;V ;+ MV
%JJ18- NCC%8J
3;aa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
ZEB electronic overload relay
G)R\<A7 GR<A$<G?) A' $DA\RD?
Like the thermal overload relays operating )\\<A7 \:) Ti<\$:)T
on the bimetallic operating principle,
electronic motor-protective relays are
current-dependent protective devices.
ZEB electronic motor-protective relays are
an alternative to a bimetal overload relay.
The measuring of the actual motor current
present in the three phase conductors of a
motor feeder is implemented on the ZEB
overload relay with integrated current
transformers for the range from 0.3 to
100 A. 53
Like the ZEB, overload relays with
electronic wide-range overload protection
operate with a larger current transfer ratio. DAh Ah ]h XhE
Compared to conventional bimetal relays,
this provides the device with a wide
current setting range ratio of 1:5.
3;a^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
ZEB electronic overload relay
The current of the motor is set via a setting
dial. It is also possible to switch off phase
5 ;@;+ S C
failure sensitivity via the DIP switches
when protecting single phase motors. V@+ U
The manual or automatic reset can also be
;@;+ S C
set on the DIP switch.
; U
No external power supply is required
thanks to the independently fed electronic ZEB electronic overload relays can be
circuit. fitted directly to DILM contactors up to
A diagnostics LED gives a visual warning of 100 A.
an overload. Separate mounting (rail mounting) is only
possible with ZEB/KK.
53
)h<$) Dh)Rh<)i
ZEB12, ZEB32 ZEB32/KK ZEB65
Direct mounting Separate mounting Direct mounting
ZEB150 ZEB150/KK
Direct mounting Separate mounting
3;a5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
ZEB electronic overload relay
R<GG<A7 $:R$\)R<T\<$T
;VVVV
J D 4DD KV
4DD MV
;VVV 4DD ;V
4DD ;V
;VV 53
;V
;
; M K , + G F S C
?TT \ HTI
R j^ j5 j3 jX j VJa j* j Em
3;a3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
ZEV electronic motor-protective system
G)R\<A7 GR<A$<G?) A' $DA\RD?
Like electronic overload relays operating Indirectly, the motor is monitored for
on the bimetallic strip principle, electronic overload, phase failure and unbalanced
motor-protective relays are current consumption.
current-dependent protective devices. With direct measurement, the temperature
The acquisition of the actual flowing motor in the motor winding is detected by means
current in the three external conductors of of one or more PTC thermistors. In the
the motor connections is with motor event of excessive temperature rise, the
protection system ZEV with separate signal is passed to the tripping unit and the
push-through sensors or a sensor belt. auxiliary contacts are actuated. A reset is
These are combined with an evaluation not possible until the thermistors cool to
3;aX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
ZEV electronic motor-protective system
The overload relay is supplied with an achieved and the tripping delays are
auxiliary voltage. The evaluation unit has a constant over the entire setting range.
multi-voltage version, which enables all If the motor current imbalance exceeds
voltages between 24 V and 240 V AC or DC 50 %, the relay trips after 2.5 s.
to be applied as supply voltage. The
The accreditation exists for overload
devices have monostable behavior; they
protection of explosion proof motors of the
trip out as soon as the supply voltage fails.
explosion protection enhanced safety
In addition to the usual N/C contact (95-96) Ex e to guideline 94/9/EG as well as the
and the N/O contact (97-98) for overload report of the German Physical/Technical
relays the motor protection relay ZEV is Bureau (PTB report) (EG-Prototype test
equipped with a programmable N/O certificate number PTB 10 ATEX 3007).
contact (07-08) and a programmable N/C Further information can be found in the
contact (05-06). The above mentioned, manual MN03407008Z-DE/EN Motor 53
usual contacts react directly via protection system ZEV, overload
thermistors or indirectly via the current, to monitoring of motors in Ex e areas.
the detected temperature rise of the motor,
including phase failure sensitivity.
The programmable contacts can be
assigned to various signals, such as
Earth-fault,
Pre-warning at 105 % thermal overload,
Separate indication of thermistor
tripping,
Internal device fault.
The function assignment is menu-guided
using a display. The motor current is
entered without tools using the function
keys, and can be clearly verified on the
display.
In addition the display allows a differential
diagnostics of trip reasons, and therefore a
faster error handling is possible.
Tripping in the event of a three-pole
balanced overload at x-times the set
current takes place within the time
specified by the tripping class. The tripping
delay in comparison with the cold state is
reduced as a function of the preloading of
the motor. Very good tripping accuracy is
3;aV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
ZEV electronic motor-protective system
)h<$) Dh)Rh<)i
+ Pick-up time:
+
' < 30 min. at up to 115 % of the set current,
'+
( ( > 2 h at up to 105 % of the set current from
(+
cold.
(+
"
+ +
(
+# (
3;a*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
ZEV electronic motor-protective system
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) TkT\)@ i<\: )R\:;2c?\ GRD\)$\<DA A' \:)R@<T\DR
@DA<\DR)' @D\DR
A
]
X
X
A
A 1
]
] AA
AA A ] A ] A ] =* =M h* hM
"L"U '
53
G
A ] X
4 ; b
F
8LL
^
A
@!" C
9
X ] 1
"LU @d<
"L"U
=P =# hP h#
AA
Fault
Parameterizable contact 1
Parameterizable contact 2
Current sensor with A/D transducer
Self hold-in of the contactor prevents
an automatic re-start after the control
voltage has failed and then returned
(important for Ex e applications,
MN03407008Z-DE/EN)
Remote reset
3;aB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
ZEV electronic motor-protective system
:)R@<T\DR GRD\)$\<DA thermistor resistance of RK 250 or nine
With thermistor motor protection, to DIN with a RK 100 can be connected to
44081 and DIN 44082, up to six PTC terminals T1-T2.
thermistor temperature sensors with a
;MVVV
53 ,VVV
;G+V
F+V
$
(MV$ (+$ A+$ A;+$
TNF = Nominal response temperature Additionally, the thermistor tripping can be
Tripping range IEC 60947-8 programmed to different trip messages on
Re-switch on range IEC 60947-8 contacts 05-06 or 07-08.
Trip block at 3200 15 % With temperature monitoring with
Re-switch on at 1500 +10 % thermistors, no dangerous condition can
occur should a sensor fail as the device
The ZEV switches off at R = 3200 15 % would directly switch off.
and switches on again at R = 1500 +10 %.
The contacts 95-96 and 97-98 change over
in the event of a shutdown caused by a
signal at the thermistor input.
3;^m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
ZEV electronic motor-protective system
?)$\RDA<$ @D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) TkT\)@ i<\: T:DR\;$<R$c<\ @DA<\DR<A7 \ \:) \:)R@<T\DR
<AGc\
A
]
X
G
A
A
]
] AA X
AA A ] A ] A ] =* =M h* hM
"L"U '
53
A ] X
;
F
8LL
]
@!" C
9
X A 1
"LU
"L"U
@d<
=P =# hP h#
A ] X AA AA
A
A ] A] A-
3;^E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
ZEV electronic motor-protective system
)h<$) @DcA\<A7
The mounting of the device is very simple
due to the clip-on and the push-through %
cable entry. $
Mounting details of every device can be
found in the instructional leaflet
IL03407080Z or the manual
MN03407008Z-DE/EN.
@DcA\<A7 A' $cRR)A\ T)ATDR
3;^a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Thermistor overload relay for machine protection EMT6
X 2DR \:)R@<T\DRT
resistance becomes high and causes the
output relay to drop-out. The defect is
indicated by an LED. As soon as the
sensors have cooled enough so that the
respective smaller resistance is reached
; M; ;K the EMT6-(K) switches automatically on
:R%C C1<<%# again. With the EMT6-(K)DB(K) the
automatic re-switch on can be defeated by
switching the device to Hand. The unit is
reset using the reset button.
M ; M MM ;,
The EMT6-K(DB) and EMT6-DBK are fitted
with a short-circuit recognition in sensor 53
circuit monitor. Should the resistance in
the sensor circuit fall below 20 it trips.
The EMT6-DBK also has a zero voltage
safe reclosing lockout and stores the fault
by a voltage drop. Switching on again is
possible only after the fault has been
rectified and the control voltage is present
again.
Since all the units use the closed-circuit
; ; M M; ;K principle, they also respond to a wire
:R%C C1<<%#
breakage in the sensor circuit.
AM,
%D%J
The thermistor machine protection relays
EMT6 are accredited for protection of
Ex e motors to ATEX-Guideline 94/9 EG by
M ; M MM ;, the German Physical/Technical Bureau.
For protection of Ex e motors the
ATEX-Guidelines require short-circuit
recognition in the sensor circuit. Because
of their integrated short-circuit recognition
the EMT6-K(DB) and EMT6-DBK are
)\:D' D2 DG)R\<DA especially suitable for this application.
The output relay is actuated when the
control voltage is switched on and the
resistance of the PTC thermistor
temperature sensor is low. The auxiliary
contacts operate. On reaching the nominal
response temperature (NAT), the sensor
3;^^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Thermistor overload relay for machine protection EMT6
X T $DA\$\ GRD\)$\<DA R)?k
GG?<$\<DA )j@G?)
C &JJ %J I
3
Control of a storage tank heater
D
C Actuating circuit
Heater
Q11: Heater protection
*3
( ( (
3
3 3 C %
53 *33
D D & ?
&JJ %J I
cA$\<DA? ')T$R<G\<DA
For this see circuit page 5-35. i<\$:<A7 D22 \:) :)\)R
The heater protection Q11 stays in self
i<\$:<A7 DA \:) :)\)R
maintain until the main switch Q1 is
The heater can be switched on provided
switched off, the pushbutton S0 is pressed,
the main switch Q1 is switched on, the
the thermostat trips or T = Tmax.
safety thermostat F4 has not tripped and
the condition T Tmin is satisfied. When S1 When T = Tmax the changeover contact of
is actuated, the control voltage is applied the contact thermometer has the position
to the contactor relay K1, which maintains I-III. The sensor circuit of the EMT6 (K3) is
itself via a N/O contact. The changeover low resistance, the N/C contact K3/21-22
contact of the contact thermometer has open. The main protection Q11 drops out.
the position I-II. The low resistance sensor
circuit of the EMT6 guarantees that Q11 is
actuated via K2 N/O contact 13-14; Q11
goes to self-maintain.
3;^5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
Thermistor overload relay for machine protection EMT6
2)\k 7<AT\ i<R) !R)>7) use of a safety thermostat that when Tmax is
Security against wire breakage in the exceeded it's normally closed contact F4
sensor circuit of K3 (e.g. non-recognition of switches off so that switch off by
the limit value Tmax) is guaranteed by the de-energization is carried out.
DCJ %J I
3C
3&
3
*
3
&
*3
3C 3C
*J *
D *33
3& 3&
*3 *
3
53
*& D3
*
C
DD
3 3 3 D 3 D 3 3 3
*
3 * 3 *
D *
C *33
D D ? D ? D D
DC
D&
3;^3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
CMD contactor monitoring device
break contacts of these contactors are
designed as mirror contacts and can be
used for monitoring tasks. The NZM1 to
NZM4 or N1 to N4 can be used as backup
motor-protective
circuit-breakers/circuit-breakers or
switch-disconnectors when fitted with a
NZM-XUVL undervoltage releases.
3;^X
<R$c<\ 2DR T\R\)RT
; ; V; V;
M M 0;
K K
; M K ;@;K
0;
;@;,
0; M;
0;;
. . . MM
; M K 0
KK
0;;
M; K,
0;
MM
M; ;K
0K
; K + ;K ;K MM ;,
CMD contactor monitoring device
M M
VM VM
0; K
L
Switching by safety relay or safety PLC
Signal contact to PLC evaluation
3;^V
53
53
3;^*
<R$c<\ 2DR R)h)RT<A7 T\R\)RT
A A hA hA
] ] 4A
X X
A ] X AGAX
4A
AGA-
4A ]A ]A
4AA 4A]
1 1 1 ]] ]]
A ] X
DA\$\DRT A' R)?kT
B 4
-X -X
4AA 4A]
]A -- ^ --
4A
]]
AX AX ]A AX
AX 4AA AX 4A] 4-
CMD contactor monitoring device
A X * A X * A- A- ]] A-
4]
4AA 4A] A- A-
] - P ] - P ]A ]A
4X
]] ]]
Y
A ]A ]] AX A- XA X] A ]A ]] AX A- XA X]
XA XA
4] 4X
4A] 4AA
X] X]
4A ] A ]
A A ] A ]
9
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
h] h]
4
A X
Z
Switching by safety relay or safety PLC
Signal contact to PLC evaluation
CMD (24 V DC)
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
7)
h)Rh<)i X;a
. ')T$R<G\<DA X;3
X;E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Overview
)2<A<\<DA
Motor-protective circuit-breakers are protecting of the motor winding (overload
circuit-breakers used for the switching, protection) and an electromagnetic
protection and isolation of circuits release (short-circuit protective device).
primarily associated with motor loads. At The following accessories can be fitted to
the same time, they protect these motors motor-protective circuit-breakers:
against destruction from locked-motor
Undervoltage releases,
starting, overload, short-circuit and
Shunt release,
phase-failure in three-phase power
Auxiliary contact,
supplies. They have a thermal trip block
(PKZ) or an electronic release (PKE) for Trip-indicating auxiliary contact.
6X
mE
The PKZM01 motor-protective
Versions:
Motor-protective circuit-breakers
circuit-breaker up to 25 A is supplied with Transformer-protective circuit-breaker
the pushbutton actuator. The fitted Description Section The
mushroom button is available for motor-protective circuit-breakers
emergency-off actuation on simple PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4, page 6-4
machines. The PKZM01 is primarily
installed in surface-mounted or
flush-mounted enclosures. Many PKE for motor and distribution circuit
accessories of the PKZM0 can be used. protection
The PKE is a modular and efficient system
5
for protecting, switching and signalling of
The PKZM4 motor-protective
motors and systems in low-voltage
circuit-breakers are a modular and
switchgear systems up to 65 A, consisting
efficient system for switching and
of:
protecting motor loads up to 63 A. It is the
big brother of the PKZM0 and can be Motor-protective circuit-breaker basic
used with almost all PKZM0 accessory units
parts. Trip blocks
Description Section Motor and
m
system protection with PKE, page 6-5
The PKZM0 motor-protective
circuit-breaker is a modular and efficient
system for switching and protecting motor
loads up to 32 A and transformers up to
25 A.
X;a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Overview
6X
X;^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4 description
:) @D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
mE&
m A'
5
The PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4 with their
bimetal releases with a current-dependent
delay offer a proven technical solution for
motor protection. The releases offer phase
failure sensitivity and are temperature
compensated. The rated currents of the
PKZM0 up to 32 A are divided up into 15
ranges, 14 ranges on the PKZM01 and 7 on
the PKZM4 up to 63 A. The installation
(motor) and the supply cable are reliably
protected and motor startup is ensured by
the short-circuit releases, permanently set
to 14 x Iu. The phase failure sensitivity of the
6X PKZM0 and PKZM4 enables them to be
used for the protection of Ex e motors. An
ATEX certificate has been awarded. The
motor-protective circuit-breakers are set
to the rated motor current in order to
protect the motors.
The following accessories complement the
motor-protective circuit-breaker for the
various secondary functions:
Undervoltage release U,
Shunt release A,
Standard auxiliary contact NHI,
Trip-indicating auxiliary contact AGM.
X;5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
PKE description
D\DR A' TkT\)@ GRD\)$\<DA i<\:
The PKE achieves its modularity by The following accessories of PKZM0
combining the motor or system-protective complement the motor-protective
circuit-breaker with various accessories. circuit-breaker PKE for the various
The exchangeable motor-protective trip secondary functions:
blocks with electronic wide range overload Undervoltage release U,
protection (current range 1:4) are available Shunt release A,
as a standard or enhanced version for Standard auxiliary contact NHI,
connection to SmartWire-DT. This results
Trip-indicating auxiliary contact AGM.
in numerous application options and
adaptation to widely differing
requirements.
\A'R'T
:) $<R$c<\;!R)>)R The PKE motor-protective circuit-breaker
The PKE circuit-breaker consists of:
is compliant with IEC/EN 60947 and 6X
VDE 0660. The PKE also meets the
Basic device, 3 types for 12 A, 32 A and requirements for isolation and main switch
65 A and functions stipulated in EN 60204.
Pluggable trip block.
There is a choice of trip blocks:
Motor protective trip blocks (5 variants
for the range 0.3 to 65 A)
System protective trip block (for the
range 5 to 36 A)
All trip blocks are provided with adjustable
overload releases.
Overload from ... to...:
Motor protective trip blocks:
also with adjustable tripping classes
(CLASS 5, 10, 15 and 20) for protecting
heavy starting motors.
System protective trip block:
also with adjustable short-circuit release
5 to 8 x Ie.
The phase failure sensitivity of PKE allows
for the use in the protection of Ex e motors.
An ATEX certificate has been awarded.
The motor-protective circuit-breakers are
set to the rated motor current in order to
protect the motors.
X;3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
PKM0, PKZM0--T, PKZM0--C description
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT i<\:Dc\ Dh)R?D' R)?)T)
m circuit-breaker is used for protection of
The PKM0 motor-protective resistive loads where no overloading is to
circuit-breaker is a protective switch for be expected.
starter combinations or for use as a basic These protective switches are also used in
unit in a short-circuit protective switch in motor-starter combinations with and
the range 0.16 A to 32 A. The basic device without reclosing lockout, where an
is without overload release, but equipped overload relay or a thermistor overload
with short-circuit release. This relay is used as well.
RAT2DR@)R;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
m;-
m;;
The transformer-protective circuit-breaker
The PKZM0 features a version with
6X is designed for protecting transformer
springloaded terminals. A version with
primaries. The short-circuit releases in the
springloaded terminals on both sides, and
types from 0.16 A to 25 A are permanently
a combined version which features
set to 20 x Iu. The response ranges of the
springloaded terminals on the outgoer side
short-circuit releases are higher here than
only can be chosen. The conductors can
with motor-protective circuit-breakers in
be connected here without ferrules. The
order to cope with the even higher inrush
connections are maintenance-free.
currents of idling transformers without
tripping. The overload release in the
PKZM0-T is set to the rated current of the
transformer primary. All the PKZM0 system
accessories can be combined with the
PKZM0-T.
X;X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
MSC Motor starters description
D\DR T\R\)R $D@!<A\<DAT
The MSC motor-starter combinations are The MSC motor-starter combinations from
available up to 32 A. Motor starters up to 16 A consist of a motor-protective
16 A consist of a PKZM0 or PKE circuit-breaker PKZM0 or PKE and a
motor-protective circuit-breaker and a contactor DILM. Both are fitted to a top-hat
DILM contactor. Both are connected by a rail and mechanically and electrically
tool-less mechanical connection element. interconnected by a connector element.
Furthermore, a plug-in electrical connector The MSC is available as a MSC-D DOL
is used to establish the connection with the starter and as a MSC-R reversing starter.
main circuit wiring. The PKZM0 or PKE
The combinations of PKZM4 or PKE65 with
motor-protective circuit-breaker and the
the proven DILM contactors are available
DILM contactors up to 16 A are provided
for motor ratings over 15 kW/400 V.
with the relevant interfaces for this
purpose.
6X
X;V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
PKZM0 and PKZM4 current limiters
;
m
The current limiter module CL-PKZ0 is a the motor-protective circuit-breaker and
short-circuit protective device specially CL will open. While the current limiter
developed for the PKZM0 and PKZM4 for returns for the closed rest position, the
non-intrinsically-safe areas. The CL motor protective-circuit breaker trips via
module has the same base area and uses the instantaneous release and produces a
the same terminations as the PKZM0. permanent isolating gap. The system is
When they are mounted on a top-hat rail ready to operate again, once any defect
alongside one another, it is possible to has been rectified. The current limiter can
connect them using B3...-PKZ0 conduct an uninterrupted current of 63 A.
three-phase commoning links. The The module may be used for individual or
switching capacity of the series connected group protection. Any direction of
PKZM0 or PKZM4 + CL is 100 kA at 400 V. In incoming supply may be used.
the event of a short-circuit, the contacts of
6X A'<h<'c? A' 7RDcG GRD\)$\<DA cT<A7
;
m
j@G?)T%
PKZM0-16, PKZM0-16/20, PKZM0-20, PKZM0-25,
PKZM4-16 PKZM4-16/20 PKZM4-20 PKZM4-25
or or or
4 x 16 A x 0.8 2 x (16 A + 20 A) 3 x 20 A x 0.9 2 x 25 A x 0.9
= 51.2 A x 0.8 = 57.6 A = 54 A = 45 A
X;*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 and PKE auxiliary contacts
cj<?<Rk $DA\$\T A' T\A'R' cj<?<Rk $DA\$\T
2DR
mE&
m
5 A'
They switch at the same time as the main interlocking of switches between one
contacts. They are used for remote another. They are available with screw
indication of the operating state, and connections or springloaded terminals.
Side mounted:
383C 38D3 383C 38D3 38C3 383C 38D3 38CC
(
Integrated: 6X
38%C 38?3 ;@+K
;9; ; (; ;9; ; (;
&8&C &83C &8C3 &8D3
(
X;B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 and PKE trip blocks
D?\7) R)?)T)T
These operate according to the :cA\ R)?)T)T
electromagnetic principle and act on the These switch the circuit-breaker off when
switch mechanism of the circuit-breaker. they are connected to voltage. Shunt
releases can be provided in interlock
A')RhD?\7) R)?)T)
circuits or for remote releases where
These switch the circuit-breaker off when
voltage dips or interruptions are not to lead
no voltage is present. They are used for
to unintentional switch off.
safety tasks. The U-PKZ20 undervoltage
release, which is connected to voltage via 3
.
D
X;Em
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 and PKE block diagram
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
mE&
m A'
5
0;
. . .
; M K
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Manually operated motor starter 6X
; M K
0;
. . .
; M K
X;EE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 and PKE block diagram
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT i<\: cj<?<Rk $DA\$\ A' \R<G;<A'<$\<A7 cj<?<Rk
$DA\$\
$) $)
),)" ),44 ),)" ),44
","3 ",3) ",4) ",)3 ","3 ",3) ",4) ",)3
# # # # # #
) 4 3 ) 4 3
3 3 3 3
*3 %
X;Ea
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 and PKE block diagram
)@D\) Ti<\$: D22 h< T:cA\ R)?)T)
4A 4A
A AGA- AG]] A AGA- AG]]
1 1 1 1 1 1
A ] X
] ]
A ] X
A X *
A X *
4AA
] - P 4AA
] - P
4A A ] X
4A A ] X 6X
A A A A A A
X X
4 A 4 A
;
;@;K
0; S1: OFF
;@;,
S2: ON
M;
S3: OFF circuit-breaker
0;
MM ;K
0K
;,
;K ;K
0M ;;
;, ;, ;
0;
;
0;;
M
M
X;E^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\)T
6X
X;E5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
7)
h)Rh<)i V;a
V;E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Overview
$<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Circuit-breakers are mechanical switching sizes as the circuit-breakers and can be
devices that switch currents in the circuit fitted with additional shunt or undervoltage
on or off and control them under normal release to suit the versions concerned.
operating conditions. These NZM circuit-breakers and switch-
circuit-breakers protect electrical disconnectors are built and tested to the
equipment from thermal overloads and in specifications in standard IEC/EN 60947.
the event of a short-circuit.
They feature isolating characteristics. In
The NZM circuit-breakers cover the rated conjunction with a locking facility, they are
current range from 20 to 1600 A. suitable for use as main switches to
Depending on the version, they have IEC/EN 60204/VDE 0113, part 1.
additional protective functions such as The electronic release of frame sizes
residual current device, earth-fault NZM2, NZM3 and NZM4 feature
protection or the capability for energy communication capabilities. The actual
management by detecting load peaks, and states of the circuit-breakers can be
selective load shedding. NZM visualized locally via a Data Management
7V circuit-breakers stand on account of their Interface (DMI) or converted to digital
compact shape and their current-limiting output signals. Additionally, the
characteristics. circuit-breakers can be connected to a
Switch-disconnectors without overload or network, e.g. PROFIBUS-DP.
tripping units are available in the same
E a ^ 5
D\)T
The NZM7, NZM10 and NZM14
circuit-breakers are no longer contained in
the Eaton range. They have been replaced
by a new generation of devices.
Information on the above devices is
provided in this chapter.
V;a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Overview
$<R$c<\;!R)>)RT They can be adapted to a wide range of
The IZMX circuit-breakers are designed requirements with a comprehensive range
for use in the high rated current range from of mounted accessories such as auxiliary
630 A. contacts, trip-indicating auxiliary contacts,
IZMX circuit-breakers and INX motor operators or voltage release,
switch-disconnectors provide the main fixed-mounted or withdrawable units.
switch isolation functions required by the With their communication capability, the
IEC/EN 60204-1 standard as they are IZMX circuit-breakers open up new
lockable in the OFF position. They can possibilities in power distribution.
therefore be used as mains switches. IZM Important information can be passed on,
circuit-breakers are built and tested in collected and evaluated, also for
accordance with IEC/EN 60947. preventative maintenance. For example,
Depending on the type of equipment by enabling rapid intervention in
protected, the following main areas of processes, system downtimes can be
application are possible with different reduced or even prevented.
settings to the release electronics: Selection criteria of an IZM circuit-breaker
System protection, are:
Max. short-circuit current Ikmax,
7V
Motor protection,
Transformer protection, Rated operating current In,
Generator protection. Ambient temperature,
IZMX circuit-breakers offer different 3 or 4-pole design,
electronic units from simple system Fixed mounting or withdrawable units,
protection with overload and short-circuit Protective function,
release right through to the digital release Min. short-circuit current.
with graphical display and the possibility to Detailed information on the circuit-breakers
create time selective networks. is provided in chapter 18 of the Eaton
Industrial Switchgear Catalog 2010.
EX 5m
V;^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Shunt release
:cA\ R)?)T)
V;5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Undervoltage releases
A')RhD?\7) R)?)T)
D4 ]E
V;3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Contact diagrams of the auxiliary contacts
cj<?<Rk $DA\$\ . T\A'R'
tripped position
Switch position indication only if
0I tripping is caused by, for example,
Switch on overcurrent, short-circuit, test or
0I voltage release. No fleeting contact
Switch off when switched on or off manually or
+ I switched off with the motor
Trip (exception: manual switch off with
Contact closed motor operator NZM2, NZM3,
Contact open NZM4).
V;X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Contact diagrams of the auxiliary contacts
cj<?<Rk $DA\$\ . )R?k @>)
Section Remote switch-off with voltage
release, page 7-11,
7V
Section Applications of the undervoltage
I
A]X release, page 7-13.
I 0I
I
A]X Switch on
0I
Switch off
+ I
- Trip
I Contact closed
A]X Contact open
I
A]X
I
I
A]X
V;V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Internal circuit diagrams NZM
j<@c@ $DA2<7cR\<DA
E
Contact elements M22-K10
;
M
K
;@;K
;@MK
;@;;
;@M;
,@;K
,@MK
,@;;
K@;K
K@MK
,@M;
,@;M
K@;,
K@M,
,@MM
;@;,
;
M
K
a
Information on the
;
M
K
;@,K
;@,;
,@;;
;@;K
;@;;
,@MK
,@M;
K@;K
K@MK
,@;K
auxiliary contacts
0; @@@ @@@ Section Maximum
configuration, page 7-8
. . .
;@,M
,@M,
,@;,
,@;M
;@,,
;@;M
,@MM
K@;,
K@M,
;@;,
;
M
K
V;*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Internal circuit diagrams NZM
^
;@GK
K
;@G;
,@;;
;@;K
;@;;
,@;K
,@MK
,@M;
K@;K
K@MK
auxiliary contacts
0; @@@ @@@ Section
Maximum
configuration,
page 7-8
. . .
;@G,
;@GM
,@;M
,@;,
,@M,
;@;M
,@MM
K@;,
K@M,
;@;,
;
M
K
5
Details about
;
M
;@GK
K
;@G;
7V
;@;K
;@;;
,@;K
,@,K
,@;;
,@,;
K@;K
K@MK
the auxiliary
0; @@@ @@@ @@@ @@@ contacts
Section
Maximum
configuration,
. . . page 7-8
;@G,
;@GM
,@;,
,@,,
;@;M
,@;M
,@,M
K@;,
K@M,
;@;,
;
M
K
V
.**
7.*7
7.77
*.*7
*
8
7
.*8
7.*
7.7
*.*
V;B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Internal circuit diagrams NZM
Em
*
*.8*
7.8*
*.7*
.8*
.7*
8
7
*.*7
*. 7
.*7
. 7
7.*7
7.77
#*
.88
.78
*.78
*.88
7.88
.*
*.*
7.*
7.7
.
*.
!
,
-#
7V
E5
*
8
7
*.*8
*.88
.*8
*.*
*.8
.*
#*
<<7
*.**
*.8*
.**
V;Em
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Remote switch-off with voltage release
)@D\) Ti<\$:;D22 i<\: cA')RhD?\7) R)?)T)T
A
A
DIE D4 ]E
DIE
4G
4G
A
]
4A
A
4A 9
]
D4 ]E
V;EE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Remote switch-off with voltage release
<A Ti<\$: GG?<$\<DA <A GRD$)TT<A7 @$:<A)T i<\: @)R7)A$k;\DG 2cA$\<DA
$DA2DR@ \D \:) Z Xmam5;E& mEE^ GR\ E
A 4A
7V
4G
A ] X
A
XGAX
XGA- 4A
]
4A 9
A
4A
V;Ea
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Applications of the undervoltage release
i<\$: D22 D2 \:) cA')RhD?\7) R)?)T)
V;E^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Switch off of the undervoltage release
A\)R?D$><A7 D2 T)h)R? $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT cT<A7 A cA')RhD?\7) R)?)T)
)
A
*-+ *$ 4+ DIE
AG]A AG]A
4] 4A
AG]] AG]]
) ) A A
4 4 4A 9 4] 9
] ]
),4) ),4)
$) $4
),44 ),44 D4 ]E
7V
When interlocking 3 or more
*.*8 circuit-breakers, each circuit-breaker
#*48 must be interlocked with the
*.** *.*
series-connected normally closed
Terminal marking for NZM14 contacts of the auxiliary contacts on the
other circuit-breakers using one
contactor relay for contact duplication
per auxiliary contact. If one of the
circuit-breakers is closed, the others
cannot be closed.
V;E5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Indication of the contactor state
A' <A'<$\<DA i<\: cj<?<Rk $DA\$\ . T\A'R'
HEI
*
, /- , # 8-
#<
* #< * #<
, /- , /-
#*
*.* *.88 *.* *.*8
*.8* #
8
* 8
*.88
#*
*.*7 #
* * * * *
* 8
*.* #
* #
8 #
* #
8
8 8 8 8
, # /- , # /- 7V
P1: On
P2: Off
P1: Tripped
V;E3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Short-time delayed circuit-breaker internal circuit diagrams
<@);'<T$R<@<A\<A7 A)\iDR> \DGD?D7k
Short-time delayed circuit-breakers aH^IH5I-;-
NZM2(3)(4)/VE, NZM10/ZMV and NZM14 Trip block VE
enable a time-discriminating network Adjustable short-time delay:
design with variable stagger times.
0, 20, 60, 100, 200, 300, 500, 750, 1000 ms
Where the prospective short-circuit
currents are extremely high, additional EmJJZJJ
installation protection is achieved by ZMV trip block only for circuit-breaker
instantaneous releases, which respond types:
without any delay. NZM10-...N
NZM10S
A
]
X
V;EX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Mesh network circuit-breakers
E& a& ^& 5& V& Em& E5
Circuit with capacitor unit and shunt circuit-breaker can be undertaken
release 230 V, 50 Hz. independently of the circuit-breaker.
The configuration of the capacitor unit Connect NZM-XCM to the supply side!
which provides the energy for the shunt
release of the mesh network
* 8
*(
8< 87
88
8*
7V
*( A=
8 U ]-
]- `
*
b A#
8< ]h
]X 4
GGG
* 87
A *A DAE
87< *X D]E
#
... ]Xh
<43< ; *hSPh g
* ,*-
7 ,8-
8* 88 ]A ]]
V;EV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Remote operation with motor operator
V
; V ; ,
!
FV F; FM FV F; FM &, &! &+
0 F+
0 F+
&
F, F, &
=0" M> =0" M> " +#
7V
E5
; ; ;
=A> =A> =A>
V
V V
FV F; FM FV F; FM
FV F; FM
0
;, 0
;, 0
;,
F, F,
F,
=0" M> =0" M> =0" M>
V;E*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Circuit-breaker as transfomer switch
Faults upstream of the low-voltage network on both sides. This interlocking
circuit-breaker, e.g. in the transformer with the high-voltage circuit-breaker must
itself, are disconnected by suitable always be provided when transformers are
protective devices (e.g. a Buchholz relay) being operated in parallel.
on the high-voltage side. The S7 auxiliary If only one normally open contact is
contact of the high-voltage circuit-breaker available as the auxiliary contact, an
trips out the NZM transformer switch on undervoltage release must be used instead
the low-voltage side in order to prevent of the shunt release. At the same time, this
feedback to the high-voltage network. provides protection against undervoltage.
S7 thus isolates the transformer from the
* A A
* DIE D4 ]E
, /- , # 8- DIE
, /-
4M
7V
#2 #2 4M
* A
8 ]
* A
* A
#* 4A 9
8 ]
, # 8- D4 ]E
V;EB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Circuit-breaker with residual current device
Residual current releases combined with Dangers of an earth fault (fire etc.)
circuit-breakers are used for protection These kinds of earth-fault releases can be
against the effects of fault currents. These attached to the NZM1 and NZM2
device combinations fulfill the following circuit-breakers. No auxiliary voltage is
tasks: required. In the event of a fault, the
Overload protection, earth-fault release trips the
Short-circuit protection, circuit-breaker, i.e. the main contacts are
Fault-current protection. opened. The circuit-breaker and the
earth-fault release must be reset to restore
the supply.
Depending on type the earth-fault releases
protect the following:
Persons against direct contact
(basic protection),
Persons against indirect contact
(fault protection),
V;am
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Circuit-breaker with residual current device
Circuit-breakers can be used together Trip indication is implemented via auxiliary
with residual current releases in contacts. Circuit-breaker NZM2-4 -XFI
three-phase and single-phase systems. has fixed contacts. The NZM1(-4)-XFI
With 2-pole operation it must be ensured allows two M22-K contact elements
that voltage is applied to both terminals from the Eaton RMQ-Titan range to be
required for test functions. clipped in.
DA\$\ R)GR)T)A\\<DA 2DR OAD\ R)?)T)'P
A ] X
NZM1(-4)-XFI
hI
A
M22-K10 M22-K02
b NZM2-4-XFI
G@;K G@M;
G@;, G@MM
7V
1 1 1 1
< Uc
^
G
4
G
V;aE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Circuit-breaker with residual current device
)T<'c?;$cRR)A\ R)?kT i<\: R<A7;\kG) \RAT2DR@)RT
The area of application for the Rated fault current from 30 mA to 5 A and
relay/transformer combination ranges a delay time from 20 ms to 5 s which is
depending on the standards involved variable in stages.
from personnel protection to fire The residual current relay indicates when
prevention to general protection of a fault current has exceeded the
systems for 1 to 4-pole electrical power predefined fault current by using a
networks. changeover contact. The contact signal
There are three different relay types and can be processed further as a signal in
seven different transformer types programmable logic controllers or can
available. They cover operating currents initiate a trip via the undervoltage release
ranging from 1 to 1800 A. of a circuit-breaker/switch-disconnector.
The three relay types have the following The compact ring-type transformer is
features: placed without any particular space
Rated fault current 30 mA, permanently requirement at a suitable position in the
set, power chain.
7V Rated fault current 300 mA, permanently
set,
DCJ DJ 7
%J@?J I 3 D C
C
33
3D
% ? > !
( C / # %J /
3 D C &
%J@?J I D%J ?
V;aa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Circuit-breaker with residual current device
R<G D2 $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT i<\: T:cA\ R)?)T) A' GDTT<!?) )j\)RA? R)T)\ D2 \:) R)?k !k
GcT:!c\\DA H $DA\$\I
3 D C
*8
?
% ? > !
8*888 D
7V
3
3 D C &
33
3D *
V;a^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Circuit-breaker with residual current device
R<G D2 $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT i<\: cA')RhD?\7) R)?)T) A' GDTT<!?) )j\)RA? R)T)\ D2 \:)
R)?k !k GcT:!c\\DA H $DA\$\I
% $
G
!
%
7V
% $
%
V;a5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Terminal assignments of IZMX circuit-breakers
)R@<A? TT<7A@)A\ EX
A\)RA? )R@<A?T
(Front view from left to right)
Shunt release
Undervoltage release
(2nd Shunt release)
Overload trip switch 2 (OTS)
Alarm
7V
Communication
Wiring of ECAM,
Communication MCAM, PCAM
Activation Maintenance mode (ARMS)
Closing releases
Motor operator
Indication spring-operated stored energy
mechanism tensioned
Latch check switch
Auxiliary contacts ON/OFF
V;a3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Terminal assignments of IZMX circuit-breakers
)R@<A? TT<7A@)A\ 5m
A\)RA? )R@<A?T
(Front view from left to right)
Shunt release
] ] A A
Undervoltage release
] A
(2nd Shunt release) -
D]E
X
DAE
# ] M A
Overload trip switch 2 (OTS)
Ah ]
= ]
A]
A
Alarm AA
A- AX
]
Current transformer, neutral conductor
AP ] A* A
Core-balance transformer, transformer star
point A# ] AM A
Control unit Digitrip
7V
Enable transformer star point signal ]h A A= ]
Xh ]=
X] XA
Activation Maintenance mode (ARMS)
X-
A XX
]
XP ] X* A
X# XM
-h A X=
-] X -A ]
-- -X
-P -*
V;aX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Terminal assignments of IZMX circuit-breakers
)R@<A? TT<7A@)A\ 5m
A\)RA? )R@<A?T
(Front view from left to right)
-# -M
Motor operator
*] h] *A hA
Indication spring-operated stored
*- *X
Latch check switch
*P
**
*# A
*M A
Ph ] *= A
P] ] PA ]
Auxiliary contacts ON/OFF
P- X
PX X
PP - P* X 7V
P# - PM -
Mh *
P= *
M] P MA *
M- P MX P
Auxiliary contacts ON/OFF
MP P
M* M
M# # MM M
#h # M= #
#] =
#A =
#- Ah #X =
#P Ah #* Ah
Auxiliary contacts ON/OFF ## AA
#M AA
=h A] #= AA
=] A] =A A]
V;aV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Terminal assignments of IZMX circuit-breakers
?A h<)i D2 @DcA\)' DA JJJ
)R@<A? '<7R@ D'!cT
A AM A= ]A ]X ]* ]M X* *X
X
A
]
I]-
A
A
-
]
A
]
]
] A# ]h ]] ]- ]P ]# XP *-
V;a*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Terminal assignments of IZMX circuit-breakers
?A h<)i D2 @DcA\)' DA JJJ
)R@<A? '<7R@
A AM A= ]A ]X ]* ]M X* *X
A
X
]
I]-
A
A
]
-
A
]
]
] A# ]h ]] ]- ]P ]# XP *-
4
LU"K
-#*
4
V;aB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
Terminal assignments of IZMX circuit-breakers
?A h<)i D2 @DcA\)' DA JJJ
)R@<A? '<7R@ \:)RA)\
A AM A= ]A ]X ]* ]M X* *X
X
A
]
I]-
A
A
-
]
A
]
]
] A# ]h ]] ]- ]P ]# XP *-
7V <U"0KU"!
UU_L DSE
L"<L@KL 5<
K"7"K U3"K<"U "Ud@K7
d5U3 @K
@<<"U5@<
V;^m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
7)
*;E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
7)
8*
*;a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor protection
)?)$\<DA <'T
The selector slide can be used for
dimensioning devices with short-circuit
coordination types 1 and 2. Standard cable
cross-sections and permissible cable
lengths are stated for the tripping of
protective devices in compliance with
standards. They can vary according to the
installation requirements. The selector
The Eaton selector slide enables you to slide has several variants of the movable
determine quickly and reliably which motor section with numerical values for DOL and
starter is the most suitable for the reversing starters or star-delta starters.
application concerned. For this only the The selector slide can be obtained free of
operating voltage, the motor rating, the charge. If you prefer to use the selection
various short-circuit ratings and aid online, this is available at:
coordination types are required. www.eaton.com/moeller/support
(Online Selection Tools)
8*
*;^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor protection
h)R?D' R)?k i<\: R)$?DT<A7 ?D$>Dc\ $>;cG 2cT)T A' <AT\A\A)DcT
They should always be used where R)?)T)T
continuous contact devices (two-wire They are needed to protect not only the
control) are concerned (e.g. pressure and motor, but also the relay, against the
position switches), to prevent automatic effects of short-circuits. Their maximum
restarting. The reset button can be fitted as rating is shown clearly on every relay and
an external feature in order to make it must be adhered to without fail. Higher
accessible to all personnel. Overload ratings chosen for instance according to
relays for example are always supplied the cable cross-section would lead to the
with manual reset. but can be converted to destruction of the motor and relay.
automatic reset by the user. The following important questions and
answers give a further guide to the
h)R?D' R)?kT i<\:Dc\ R)$?DT<A7 behaviour of an installation with motor
?D$>Dc\ protection.
They can be used only with pulsed contact
devices (three-wire control) such as D i:\ $cRR)A\ @cT\ \:) Dh)R?D' R)?k
pushbuttons etc., because on these, the GRDG)R?k !) T)\M
cooling of the bimetal strips cannot lead to To the rated motor current no higher, no
8* automatic reconnection. lower. A relay set to too low a figure will
prevent the full utilization of the motor; set
G)$<? $<R$c<\Rk too high, it will not guarantee full overload
Special circuitry such as is found in protection. If a correctly set relay trips too
star-delta switches, individually frequently, then either the load on the
compensated motors, current motor should be reduced or the motor
transformer-operated overload relays etc. should be exchanged for a larger one.
may require that the relay settings deviates
from the motor rated operational current. :)A <T <\ R<7:\ 2DR \:) Dh)R?D' R)?k \D
\R<GM
R)Lc)A\?k R)$cRR<A7 DG)R\<A7 $k$?)T Only when the current consumption of the
It makes motor protection difficult. The motor increases due to mechanical
relay should be set to higher than rated overloading of the motor, undervoltage or
motor current in view of its shorter time phase failure when the motor is under full
constant. Motors which are rated for a high load or thereabout, or when the motor fails
operating frequency will stand this setting to start due to a stalled rotor.
to a certain degree. Although this will not
ensure complete protection against
overload, it will nevertheless provide
adequate protection against non-starting.
*;5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor protection
:)A 'D)T \:) Dh)R?D' R)?k 2<? \D \R<G 3-pole overload relays should be so
<A 7DD' \<@) ?\:Dc7: \:) @D\DR <T connected in the case of single-phase and
)A'A7)R)'M DC motors so that all three poles of the
With changes in the motor which do not overload relay carry the current, whether
cause an increase in current consumption: in 1-pole or 2-pole circuits.
Effects of humidity, reduced cooling due to E GD?) a GD?)
a reduction in speed or motor dirt,
temporary additional external heating of
the motor or bearing wear.
*;3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor protection
<$>;cG \<@)T
Response limits of time-delayed overload
relays at all-pole load.
kG) D2 c?\<G?) D2 $cRR)A\ T)\\<A7 )2)R)A$)
Dh)R?D' @!<)A\
R)?k \)@G)R\cR)
A B C D
8*
relays and
magnetic
relays
Ambient 1.05 1.2 1.5 7.2 +20 C
temperature
compensated
thermal
relays
*;X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor protection
Response limits of 3-pole thermal overload
relays at 2-pole load
kG) D2 \:)R@? Dh)R?D' c?\<G?) D2 $cRR)A\ T)\\<A7 )2)R)A$)
R)?k @!<)A\
\)@G)R\cR)
A B
t > 2 h, starting t2h
from cold state of
relay
Ambient temperature 3 poles 1.0 2 poles 1.32 +20 C
compensated, without 1 pole 0
phase failure sensitivity
Non-ambient temperature 3 poles 1.0 2 poles 1.25 +40 C
compensated, without 1 pole 0
phase failure sensitivity
Ambient temperature 2 poles 1.0 2 poles 1.15 +20 C
compensated, with phase
failure sensitivity
1 pole 0.9 1 pole 0
8*
In the case of thermal overload relays with The point of destruction is the point of
a current setting range, the response limits intersection between the projected
must apply equally to the highest and the tripping characteristic curves and the
lowest setting of the associated current. multiple of the current.
*;V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor protection
the details of protective devices which The tripping type of the overload relay must
type of coordination is ensured by them. not differ from the given tripping
characteristic after a short-circuit.
kG) E $DDR'<A\<DA
In the event of a short circuit the starter
must not endanger persons and :DR\;$<R$c<\ T\R)A7\: D2 \:) cj<?<Rk
installations. It does not have to be fit for $DA\$\
renewed operation without repair. The manufacturer details the required
kG) a $DDR'<A\<DA overcurrent protective device. The
In the event of a short-circuit the starter combination is subjected to three test
must not endanger persons and disconnection's at 1000 A prospective
installations. It must be fit for renewed current with a power factor between 0.5
operation. There is a risk of contact weld. and 0.7 at rated operational voltage.
for which the manufacturer must give Welding of the contacts may not occur
maintenance instructions. (EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660 Part 200).
*;*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor protection
'=cT\<A7 \:) $cRR)A\ The motor is a limiting factor with regard to
\RAT2DR@)R;DG)R\)' Dh)R?D' R)?k V the tripping delay of the current
2DR ?Di)R R\)' @D\DR $cRR)A\ transformer-operated relay and the
The setting ranges quoted in the main bridging period. One must ensure that the
catalogue, Industrial Switchgear, apply motor is able to tolerate the high
when the incoming cable is looped once temperature generated by direct starting,
through the transformer relay. for the prescribed starting time. Motor and
If the current transformer-operated starting procedure have to be selected
overload relay ZW7 is required to provide carefully when dealing with machines
protection to a motor of below 42 A rating having a very large rotating mass, which
(minimum value in the setting range of 42 A are practically the only ones subject to this
to 63 A), the necessary range adjustment is problem when direct starting is used.
achieved by looping the incomer several Depending on the operating conditions
times through the aperture in the relay. The adequate protection of the motor winding
change in the rated motor current quoted may no longer be given by an overload
on the rating plate is inversely proportional relay. In that case it must be weighed up
to the number of loops. whether an electronic overload relay ZEV,
ZEB or a thermistor overload relay EMT 6 in
j@G?)%
conjunction with an overload relay Z meets
With the ZW7-63 relay, which has a setting
range from 42 A to 63 A, a rated motor
the requirements. 8*
current of 21 A to 31.5 A can be Example circuits page 8-10
accommodated by looping the leads twice
through the relay.
*;B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor protection
\R;')?\ Ti<\$: HeI
1 operating direction
Changeover time with overload relay in position
A: < 15 s B: > 15 < 40 s C: > 40 s
*;Em
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor protection
For medium and large For small motors; no Automatic cut out of the
motors protection during starting bridging contactor
8*
*;EE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor protection
A'<h<'c??k $D@G)AT\)' @D\DR
Iw = I e ( cos - [A]
2 2
Ib = Ie Iw $ A "
6
Ic = U e( 3 ( 20f ( C ( 10 $A"
P c ( 10 3
Ic = -------------------
3 ( Ue
Ie = Rated motor operational current [A]
Iw = Active current
Ib = Reactive current }
Proportion of motor rated operational current [A]
Ic = Capacitor-Rated operational current [A]
IEM = Setting current of overload relay [A]
cos = Motor power factor
Ue = Rated operational voltage [V]
Pc = Rated capacitor output [kvar]
C = Capacitance of capacitor [F]
G$<\DR $DAA)$\)'
8* to protective conductor terminals to motor terminals
*33 *33
*;Ea
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor protection
:)R@<T\DR Dh)R?D' R)?k 2DR @$:<A) GRD\)$\<DA
Thermistor overload relays for machine D\DR;$R<\<$?
protection are used in conjunction with Squirrel-cage motors whose rotor in the
temperature-dependent semi-conductor event of stalling reaches the permissible
resistors (thermistors) for monitoring the temperature limit earlier than the stator
temperature of motors, transformers, winding. The delayed temperature rise in
heaters, gases, oils, bearings etc. the stator can lead to a delayed tripping
Depending on the application, thermistors of the thermistor overload relay for
have positive (PTC thermistors) or negative machine protection. It is therefore
(NTC thermistors) temperature advisable to supplement the protection
coefficients. With PTC thermistors the of rotor-critical motors by a conventional
resistance at low temperature is small. overload relay. Three-phase motors
From a certain temperature it rises steeply. above 15 kW are usually rotor-critical.
On the other hand, NTC thermistors have a
falling resistance-temperature Overload protection for motors in
characteristic, which does not exhibit the accordance with IEC 204 and IEC/EN 60204.
pronounced change behaviour of the PTC These standards specify that motors above
thermistor characteristic. 2 kW used for frequent starting and
*;E^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor protection
Thermistor overload relays for machine motors compliant with the ATEX directive
protection can be used in conjunction with (94/9 EC). An EC type testing certificate can
up to six PTC sensors to DIN 44081 for be provided.
direct monitoring of temperatures in Ex e
8* Single-phasing + + +
Intermittent operation + +
Excessive operating frequency + +
Voltage and frequency + + +
fluctuations
Increased coolant temperature + +
Impaired cooling + +
+ Full protection
(+) Partial protection
No protection
*;E5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Notes on engineering
:R));G:T) $cRR)A\;c\D@\<$ T\R\)R
!
:R));G:T) c\D\RAT2DR@)R T\R\)R i<\: T\R\<A7
R)T<T\DRT
B Single or multi-step resistors are connected upstream
of the three-phase squirrel-cage motors to reduce the
J
inrush current and the tightening torque.
!
With single-step starters, the inrush current is
^ approximately three times the rated motor current. With
J!
multi-stage starters, the resistors can be so designed
]h -h Ph #h Ahh F
< that the inrush current is only 1.5 to 2 times the rated
motor current, with a very low level of tightening torque.
!
:R));G:T) c\D\RAT2DR@)R T\R\)RT i<\: T\R\<A7
\RAT2DR@)RT
B This type of starting is preferable where the same
tightening torque is to be obtained as with the primary
series resistors but the inrush current taken from the
! J mains is to be further reduced. A reduced voltage Ua
^ (approximately 70 % of the rated operating voltage) is
J!
]h -h Ph #h Ahh F
supplied to the motor when starting via the starting
transformer. Thus, the current taken from the mains is
8*
<
reduced to approximately half the direct inrush current.
*;E3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Notes on engineering
@GDR\A\ '\ A' 2)\cR)T D2 \:R));G:T) c\D@\<$ T\R\)RT
1) Type of starter Stator resistance starter (for squirrel-cage motors) Rotor starter
(for slipring rotors)
2) Part no. of Star-delta With starting With start-up Rotor resistance
starter switches resistors transformers starter
3) Number of 1 only Normally 1 Normally 1 Selectable (no
starting stages longer selectable
when current or
torque have been
determined)
4) Voltage 0.58 x rated Selectable: Selectable: None
reduction at the operational a x rated 0.6/0.7/0.75 x Ua
motor voltage operational (transformer
voltage tappings)
(a < 1) e.g. 0.58 as
with 8-switch
5) Inrush current 0.33 x inrush a x inrush current Selectable (see 4) Selectable: from
taken from mains current at at rated 0.36/0.49/0.56 x 0.5 to about 2.5 x
rated operational inrush current at rated operational
8* operational
voltage
voltage rated operational
voltage
current
*;EX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Notes on engineering
i<\$:<A7 D2 $G$<\DRT
3888C 3888C
*3 *3
*3
C *3 C
C C
*3 *3 *D *C
8*
When capacitors are switched on, must be installed between the discharge
contactors are heavily stressed by circuit and the capacitor.
transient current peaks. When a single A discharge circuit or discharge device
capacitor is switched on, currents up to must reduce the residual voltage of the
30 times the rated operational current can capacitor to less than 50 V within a minute
occur; these can, however, be reliably of the capacitor being switched off.
switched by Eaton DIL contactors.
When installing capacitors, the VDE
specification 0560 part 4 (Germany) and the
standards which apply to each country
should be observed. According to these,
capacitors not directly connected to an
electrical device which forms a discharge
circuit, should be equipped with a rigidly
connected discharge device. Capacitors
connected in parallel to the motor do not
require a discharge device, since
discharging is performed via the motor
winding. No switch-disconnectors or fuses
*;EV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Notes on engineering
DA\$\DR 2DR $G$<\DR
- . A'<h<'c? A' 7RDcG $D@G)AT\<DA
RDcG $D@G)AT\<DA
*...7
#7* #78
#< #* #8
7 7 7
#
* #
8 #
7
Additional inductance with standard contactor
*;E*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Circuit documents
)A)R?
Circuit documents serve to explain the ?TT<2<$\<DA $$DR'<A7 \D \:) \kG) D2
function of circuits or electrical R)GR)T)A\\<DA
connections. They provide information for
the construction, installation and Simplified or detailed :
maintenance of electrical installations. 1-pole or multi-pole representation,
The supplier and the operator must agree Connected, semi-connected or separate
on the form in which the circuit documents representation,
are to be produced: paper, film, diskette, Topographical representation.
etc. They must also agree on the language In addition to this, there is the
or languages in which the documentation process-orientated representation with
is to be produced. In the case of machines, the function block diagram (see previous
user information must be written in the pages).
official language of the country of use to Examples for drawing up circuit
comply with ISO 12100. documents are given in IEC/EN 61082-1.
The circuit documents are divided into two
groups: <R$c<\ '<7R@T
Diagrams indicate the voltage-free or
?TT<2<$\<DA $$DR'<A7 \D \:) GcRGDT) current-free status of the electrical 8*
Explanation of the mode of operation, the installation. A distinction is drawn
connections or the physical position of the between:
apparatus. This consists of: Block diagram. Simplified representation
Explanatory circuit diagrams, of a circuit with its main parts. It shows
Block diagrams, how the electrical installation works and
Equivalent circuit diagrams, how it is subdivided.
Explanatory tables or diagrams, Circuit diagram. Detailed representation
Flow diagrams, tables of a circuit with its individual
Time flow diagrams, tables components,which shows how the
electrical installation works.
Wiring diagrams,
Equivalent circuit diagram. Special
Device wiring diagrams,
version of an explanatory circuit diagram
Interconnection diagrams,
for the analysis and calculation of circuit
Terminal diagrams,
characteristics.
Assignment diagrams.
*;EB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Circuit documents
3 D C
3
D
C
3 3 C % 3C
3&
( ( ((
D & ?
3 C % 3 C %
33 3D 33 3D
D & ? D & ?
C C
8*
<R<A7 '<7R@T
Wiring diagrams show the conductive conductive connections connected to
connections between electrical apparatus. them.
They show the internal and/or external Location diagram (location diagram).
connections but, in general, do not give any Representation of the physical position
information on the mode of operation. of the electrical apparatus, which does
Instead of wiring diagrams, wiring tables not have to be to scale.
can also be used.
Unit wiring diagram. Representation of You will find notes on the marking of
all the connections within the device or electrical apparatus in the diagram as well
combination of devices. as further diagram details in the chapter
Interconnection diagram. Specifications, Formulae, Tables.
Representation of the connections
between the device or combination of
devices within an installation.
Terminal diagram. Representation of the
connection points of an electrical
installation and the internal and external
*;am
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Power supply
5;$DA'c$\DR TkT\)@& ;;
)) Protective earth conductor
4) Protective earth terminal in
3) enclosure (not totally insulated)
) 4 3
) 4 3
*;aE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Power supply
^;$DA'c$\DR TkT\)@&
!!
+!
*!
! + *
7)
74
*;aa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Power supply
7)
74
8*
*;a^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Control circuit supply
3 3% 3 D
3%
.
3 D 3? 3!
3? 3! D
JD
) 3 !
4 " 0
67
-
*;a5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Contactor markings
The contactors in contactor combinations
have, in accordance with EN 81346-2 for
apparatus and function, the code letter Q,
as well as numerical identification, which
shows the function of the device (e.g. Q22 =
mains contactor with anticlockwise
operation for high speed).
*;a3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors
kG<$? $<R$c<\T i<\: $DA\$\DRT
cT)?)TT i<\:Dc\ Dh)R?D' R)?k cT)T i<\: Dh)R?D' R)?k
Short-circuit protection1) and overload Short-circuit protection2) for contactor and
protection by means of PKZM overload relay by means of fuses F1.
motor-protective circuit-breaker or NZM Short-circuit protection3) for contactor by
circuit-breaker. means of fuses F1.
3 D C 3 D C 3 D C
3 C % 3C *3
*3
3&
*3
( ( (
3 C %
D & ? *33
D & ?
3 C %
*D
3 C %
*33 1> 1%
*33 D & ?
D & ?
1! 1?
1> 1%
*D
8*
D & ? 1! 1?
C
*3
C
C
*3
*3
1) Protective device in the input wiring in accordance with the main catalogue,
Industrial Switchgear or IL installation instructions.
2) Fuse size in accordance with data on the rating plate of the overload relay.
3) Fuse size in accordance with the main catalogue, Industrial Switchgear
(Technical data for contactors)
*;aX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors
kG<$? $<R$c<\ i<\: !R<'7<A7 D2 Dh)R?D' R)?k 'cR<A7 T\R\<A7
<\:Dc\ Dh)R?D' R)?k i<\: Dh)R?D' R)?k
3 3
533@36 533@36
*J *J
1%
3C
*3 *D 1?
3&
D3 D3
J J
DD DD
*33 *33
3C 3C
3& 3&
3&
3&
*33 *33
3C
3
3C
8*
3
*33 *33
D
D
D 33 33 The short-circuit strength capacity of the contacts in the circuit
1? 3&
J 3C has to be considered when selecting F0.
Double pushbutton
D3
D3
DD
DD
3&
3C
3C
3&
*;aV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors
GG?<$\<DA DA 'R<h) @D\DRT i<\: :)hk
T\R\<A7 'c\k
DR $DAA)$\<DA i:)A cT)' i<\:
3 D C
@D\DR;GRD\)$\<h) $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
JJJ&
A' $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
*3 H
IJJJ Section Fuses with
overload relays, page 8-30
3 C % 3 C %
*33 *3&
D & ? D & ?
1> 1%
*D
D & ? 1! 1?
8* C
*3
*;a*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors
1% 3C
*D *3
1? 3&
D3
J
DD
*33 D 3& 33
3C 3& && 3&
*3& *3& *33 1? 3& DD
3& 3C &C 3C J
DD *33
D3
D3
DD
DD
*33
D3
3C
3C
3&
3&
3?
*
3
3%
3 3 3
*3& *
3 *33
D D D
8*
DA\RD? $<R$c<\ ')h<$)
I: ON
0: OFF
DR $DAA)$\<DA D2 2cR\:)R $\c\DRT
Section Three-wire control,
page 8-34
cA$\<DA
Actuation of pushbutton I energizes has been switched off by pressing
bridging contactor Q14 which then pushbutton 0. The N/C Q11/22-21 prevents
maintains itself via Q14/13-14. At the same Q14 and K1 closing whilst the motor is
time, voltage is applied to the timing relay running. In the event of an overload,
K1. The mains contactor Q11 is closed by normally closed contact 95-96 on the
Q14/44-43 and maintains itself via overload relay F2 effects de-energization.
Q11/14-13. When the set time which
corresponds to the start-up time of the
motor - has elapsed, the bridging contactor
Q14 is disconnected by K1/16-15. K1 is
likewise disconnected and, exactly as Q14,
can only be energized again after the motor
*;aB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors
a DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DAT& R)h)RT<A7 $DA\$\DR
cT)?)TT i<\:Dc\ Dh)R?D' R)?k cT)T i<\: Dh)R?D' R)?kT
Short-circuit protective device and Short-circuit protection1) for contactor and
overload protection by means of overload relay by means of fuses F1.
motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZM, Short-circuit protection1) for contactor by
PKE or circuit-breaker NZM. means of fuses F1.
Fuse size in the input wiring in accordance
with the main catalogue, Industrial
Switchgear or AWA installation
instructions.
3 D C 3 D C 3 D C
3 C % 3C
*3 *3
3&
*3 (((
D & ?
3 C % 3 C % 3 C % 3 C % 3 C % 3 C %
*33 *3D *33 *3D *33 *3D
D & ? D & ? D & ? D & ? D & ? D & ?
8* *D
1> 1%
*D
D & ? 1! 1?
C C C
*3 *3 *3
1) Fuse size in accordance with data on the rating plate of the overload relay F2
*;^m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors
Changing direction of rotation 2\)R actuation Changing direction of rotation i<\:Dc\
of the 0 pushbutton actuation of the 0 pushbutton
3 3
533@36 533@36
*J *J
1% 1%
3C 3C
*3 *D *3 *D
3& 1? 3& 1?
D3 D3
J J
DD DD
D3 DD D3 DD
DD D3 DD D3
*33 *33
3& 3C 3& 3C
3C 3& 3C 3&
3& 3& 3& 3&
*33 *3D *33 *3D
3C 3C 3C 3C
8*
DD DD DD DD
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
I = Clockwise
3C
3C
3&
3C
3&
3&
3C
3C
3&
3C
3&
3&
0 = Stop
II = anticlockwise
operation
*;^E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors
)\:D' D2 DG)R\<DA% Actuation of circuit, direction can be changed from
pushbutton I energizes the coil of clockwise to anticlockwise either after
contactor Q11. It switches on the motor pressing pushbutton 0, or by directly
running clockwise and maintains itself pressing the pushbutton for the reverse
after button I is enables via its own direction. In the event of an overload,
auxiliary contact Q11/14-13 and pushbutton normally closed contact 95-96 of the
0 (three-wire control). The normally closed overload relay F2 or the normally open
contact Q11/22-21 electrically inhibits the contact 13-14 of the motor-protective
closing of contactor Q12. When pushbutton circuit-breaker or the circuit-breaker will
II is pressed, contactor Q12 closes (motor switch.
running anticlockwise). Depending on the
8* *3
3 C % 3 C % 3 C %
*3> *DD *D3
D & ? D & ? D & ?
1> 1% 1> 1%
*D3 *D
D & ? 1! 1? D & ? 1! 1?
3 D
3
D
C
3 D
3 C % *3
*DC
D & ?
*;^a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors
3 0: Stop
53>@36 I : Low speed FORWARD
*J (Q17)
1%
II: High speed
*D@D3 FORWARD (Q21 + Q23)
1?
D3
III: High speed BACK
J (Q22 + Q23)
DD
DD
3C
D3 3&
DD
*33 D3
D3
3&
3C DD
3C 3& 3&
*D3 *DD Q17: Feed forward
3& 3C 3C
Q21: High-speed forward
3C D3 C3
*3> Q23: Star contactor
*3> *3>
3& DD CD K1: Contactor relay
*DD
C3
*DD
DD
*
3
DD
*D3
CD
Q22: Retract high-speed 8*
CD D3 D3 C3
D3
3C &C
*D3 *
3 *
3
DD 3& &&
DD 3C &&
*DC *DC *DC
D3 3& &C
3 3 3 3 3
*3> *D3 *DC *
3 *DD
D D D D D
DD
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
3C
3C
3&
3&
3C
3C
3C
3C
3&
3&
3&
3&
3 D
DD
V ; JCJ V ;
D3
D3
; ;
3&
3C
3&
M M
3C
;; ;;
K K
8*
, ,
iD;i<R) $DA\RD?
;; ;; M 33 D
;, ;K 9G
V 3 1?
V ; D
; &
M ;; (
K 3
, *3D
*;^5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
\R;')?\ Ti<\$: i<\: Dh)R?D' R)?k
RRA7)@)A\ <A \:) @D\DR ?<A)
In a standard circuit configuration, the
star-delta switch with overload relay, i.e. a
thermally delayed overcurrent relay, is
3 C %
installed in the cables leading to the motor
*33 terminals U1, V1, W1 or V2, W2, U2. The
D & ?
overload relay can also be operated in a
star circuit as it is usually connected in
1> 1%
*D series with the motor winding and the relay
D & ? 1! 1?
current flowing through it = rated motor
3 3 3 current x 0.58.
The complete circuit diagram Section
Automatic star-delta switches SDAINL,
page 8-37.
*;^3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
DA2<7cR\<DA <A \:) ')?\ $DAA)$\<DA
Instead of the arrangement in the motor line
or mains supply line, the overload relay can
3 C % 3 C % be placed in the delta connection. The
*3% *3C
D & ? D & ? cutout shown here indicates the modified
1> 1% circuit diagram from Section
*D Automatic star-delta switches SDAINL,
D & ? 1! 1?
page 8-37. When heavy, long-starting
procedures are involved (e.g. for
D D D
centrifuges) the F0.58 relay, rated for relay
current = rated motor current x 2, can also
be connected in the connecting cables
between the delta contactor Q15 and the
star contactor Q13. In the star connection
no current then flows through the F2 relay.
The motor is therefore not protected when
starting. This connection is always used
when exceptionally heavy and long starting
procedures are involved and when
8* saturable core current transformer-
operated relays react too quickly.
*;^X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
c\D@\<$ T\R;')?\ Ti<\$:)T
3 D C
D3
3 C % 3C
*3
3& DD
*3
( ( (
D & ?
3 C % 3 C % 3 C %
*33 *3% *3C
D & ? D & ? D & ?
1> 1%
*D
D & ? 1! 1?
8*
3 D
3 D
3 C D
*3
Position A Position B
F2 = 0.58 x Ie Q1 = Ie
with F1 in position B ta 15 s ta > 15 40 s
Motor protection in 8- and Only partial motor protection in
-configuration 8-configuration
\<A7 D2 Ti<\$:7)R
Q11, Q15 = 0.58 x Ie
Q13 = 0.33 x Ie
*;^V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
Further notes on the configuration of the
overload relay Section Automatic
star-delta switches SDAINL, page 8-37
Ea \D 33
cT:!c\\DA
D3
J DD K1: Timing relay
33 approx. 10 s
33 Q11: Mains contactor
3C 3C Q13: Star contactor
3& 3& Q15: Delta contactor
Double pushbutton
%& %& %& 3> 3>
33 %C %C %C
3 3!
3 D!
cA$\<DA
3C 3% DD DD Pushbutton I energizes
3% D3 3C D3 timing relay K1. The
normally open contact
3 3 3 3
K1/17-18 (instantaneous
33
3 3C 3%
8* D D D D contact) which applies
voltage to star contactor
5#6
Q13, which closes and
applies voltage to mains
Vm \D aXm contactor Q11 via normally
open contact Q13/14-13.
D3
J DD
Q11 and Q13 maintain
themselves via the N/O
33
Q11/14-13 and Q11/44-43.
33
3C 3C Q11 applies mains voltage
3& 3& to motor M1 in star
connection.
&& 3& 3& 3> 3>
33 &C 3C 3C
3 3!
3 D!
3C 3% DD DD
3% D3 3C D3
3 3 3 3
33
3 3C 3%
D D D D
5#6
*;^*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
0V
9+
0M
9G M
,
0;, .
M ;
0;, ;
;,
0;; ;K
;, ;,
,,
0;; 0;K 0;+
,K ;K ;K
M
9G
;; ;;
;, ;K
8*
V
0;;
M;
M;
MM
MM
;K
;,
;K
;,
Double pushbutton
DA\RD? $<R$c<\ ')h<$)
I = ON
0 = OFF
When the set changeover time has The motor cannot start up again unless it
elapsed, K1/17-18 opens the circuit of Q13 has previously been disconnected by
and after 50 ms closes the circuit of Q15 via pushbutton 0, or in the event of an overload
K1/17-28. Star contactor Q13 drops out. by the normally closed contact 95-96 of
Delta contactor Q15 closes and switches overload relay F2, or via normally open
motor M1 to full mains voltage. At the same contact 13-14 of the motor-protective
time, normally closed contact Q15/22-21 circuit-breaker or standard
interrupts the circuit of Q13 thus circuit-breaker.
interlocking against renewed switching on
while the motor is running.
*;^B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
; ;
=;;H;> =;;H;>
0V 0V
9+ ;K
9+
0M 0;
9G ;, 0M
9G
M
,
M; 0;, .
V ;
MM ;
0;; 0;,
;K ;, M
;,
0;;
;, ;K 0;;
;K
,, ;, ;+
0;; 0;K 0
;
8* ,K ;K
;G ;&
0;;
,,
0;K
;,
,K ;K
MM MM
0;+ 0;K
M; M;
M ;; ;;
9G ;, ,,
V
M;
M;
MM
MM
; ; ; ;
0
; 0;; 0;K 0;+ 0;;
;,
;K
;K
;,
M M M M
*;5m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
DR $DAA)$\<DA D2 2cR\:)R $DA\RD? $<R$c<\
')h<$)T Section Control circuit
devices for star-delta starting, page 8-45
cA$\<DA Delta contactor Q15 closes and switches
Pushbutton I energizes star contactor Q13, motor M1 to full mains voltage. At the same
the normally open contact Q13/14-13 time, normally closed contact Q15/22-21
applies voltage to mains contactor Q11. interrupts the circuit of Q13 thus
Q11 closes and applies mains voltage to interlocking against renewed switching on
motor M1 in star connection. Q11 and Q13 while the motor is running.
maintain themselves via normally open The motor cannot be started up again
contact Q11/14-13 and Q11 additionally via unless it has previously been disconnected
Q11/44-43 and pushbutton 0. Timing relay by pushbutton 0, or in the event of an
Q11 is energized at the same time as mains overload, by the normally closed contact
contactor K1. When the set changeover 95-96 of the overload relay F2, or via the
time has elapsed, K1 opens the circuit of normally open contact 13-14 of the
Q13 via the changeover contact 15-16 and motor-protective circuit-breaker or
closes the circuit of Q15 via 15-18. circuit-breaker.
8*
*;5E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
c\D@\<$ R)h)RT<A7 T\R;')?\ Ti<\$:)T
2 operating directions
3 D C 3 C % 3C D3
*3
3& DD
*3
( ( (
D & ?
3 C % 3 C % 3 C % 3 C %
*33 *3D *3% *3C
D & ? D & ? D & ? D & ?
1> 1%
*D
8* D & ? 1! 1?
3 D
3 D
3 C D
*3
*;5a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
Changing direction of rotation after actuation of the 0
pushbutton
3 Three-way pushbutton
533@36 DA\RD? $<R$c<\ ')h<$)T
I = clockwise
*J 0 = Stop
1%
3C II = anticlockwise
*D *3 operation
1? 3&
D3 33 D 3D 3D
J 3C 1? 3& 3C
DD
J
D3 DD
*33
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD D3
*33
3& 3C
3C
3&
3&
3C
3C
3&
3& && && 3&
3C *33 *3D *3D 3&
*33 3C &C &C 3C
3> 3>
*
3 *
3
3! D!
DD DD DD DD
*3D *3% *3C *33
D3 D3 D3 D3
3 3 3 3 3
*33
D
*
3
D
*3C
D
*3%
D
*3D
D 8*
*;5^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
Changing direction of rotation without actuation of the 0
3 Three-way pushbutton
533@36 DA\RD? $<R$c<\ ')h<$)T
I = clockwise
*J 0 = Stop
1% II = anticlockwise
3C
*D *3 operation
1? 3&
D3 33 33 D 3D 3D
J DD
3C 3& 1? 3& 3C
J
D3 DD
*33
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
D3
*33
3& 3C
3C
3&
3&
3&
3C
3C
3& && && 3& 3&
3C *33 *3D
*33 3C &C &C *3D 3C
3> 3>
*
3 *
3
3! D!
DD DD DD DD
DR $DAA)$\<DA D2 2cR\:)R $\c\DRT Q13 drops out. K1/17-28 closes the circuit
Section Control circuit devices for of Q15.
star-delta starting, page 8-45 Delta contactor Q15 energizes and
cA$\<DA switches motor M1 to the delta
Pushbutton I energizes contactor Q11 configuration, i.e. full mains voltage. At the
(e.g. clockwise). Pushbutton II energizes same time, normally closed contact
contactor Q12 (e.g. anticlockwise Q15/22-21 interrupts the circuit of Q13, thus
operation). The contactor first energized interlocking against renewed switching on
applies voltage to the motor winding and while the motor is running. Motor direction
maintains itself via its own auxiliary can be changed, either after pressing
contact 14-13 and pushbutton 0. The pushbutton 0, or by direct actuation of the
normally open contact 44-43 fitted to each reverse button, depending upon the circuit.
mains contactor energizes the star In the event of an overload, disconnection
contactor Q13. Q13 energizes and switches is effected by the normally closed contact
on motor M1 in the star connection. At the 95-96 of the overload relay F2.
same time, timing relay K1 is triggered.
When the set changeover time has
elapsed, K1/17-18 opens the circuit of Q13.
*;55
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Control circuit devices for star-delta starting
c\D@\<$ T\R;')?\ Ti<\$:)T
c?T) )A$D')R
D 33 33 33 33 D 33 33
1? 3C 3& && D 1? 3& &&
J J J
*33 *33 *33
DD
DD
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
3C
3&
3C
3&
3C
3&
3C
3&
3C
3&
3C
3&
3 D
DD
DD
V ; JCJ V ;
; ;
3C
3&
3C
3&
M ;; M ;;
K K
, ,
Double actuator pushbutton Spring-return switch Spring-return switch
with indicator light T0-1-15511 with automatic T0-1-15366 with automatic 8*
return to position 1. return to position of rest.
iD;i<R) $DA\RD?
;; ;; M 33 33 D
;, ;K 9G
3& && 1?
V
V ;
; 3&
M ;;
K
,
*;53
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Control circuit devices for star-delta starting
:R));G:T) $cRR)A\;R)h)RT<A7 $DA\$\DR;R)h)RT<A7 T\R;')?\ Ti<\$:
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
D3
D3
DD
DD
3&
3&
3&
3C
3C
3C
3&
3&
3C
3C
3D D 33
3C 1? 3C
3 J D
3
D ,!! '
C
&
Spring-return switch1) Changeover switch1)
8* T0-1-8214, without
self-maintaining circuit
Switch T0-1-8210
remains in position 1 or 2
(inching)
automatic return to off
position only for reversing
contactors
The various tapped winding configurations The 8/8 8-connection preferred for
give differential output ratios for the two better matching of the motor to machines
speeds. in which the torque increases by a
quadratic factor (pumps, fans, rotary
Type of connection/8 8 8/8 8
compressors). All multi-speed switches
Output ratio 1/1.51.8 0.3/1
can be used for both types of connection.
The / -connection comes nearest to a TG))'T . T)GR\) i<A'<A7T
satisfying the most usual requirement for In theory, motors with separate windings 8*
constant torque. It has the additional allow any combination of speed and any
advantage that, because nine terminals output ratio. Both windings are arranged in
are available, y/d starting can be used to y connection and are completely
provide smooth starting or to reduce the independent of one another.
starting current for the low speed condition Preferred speed combinations are:
( Section Motor windings,
page 8-50).
Motors with tapped 1500/3000 750/1500 500/1000
winding
Motors with separate 1000/1500
windings
No. of poles 4/2 6/4 8/4 12/6
Code no. low/high 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
*;5V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Pole-changing motors
D\DR $<R$c<\
DAA)$\<DA DAA)$\<DA DAA)$\<DA
Selection of low and high Selection of either speed Selection of either speed
speed only from zero. No from zero. Switching from from zero. Switching back
return to low speed, only to low to high speed possible. and forward between low
zero. Return only to zero. and high speed (high braking
torque). Return also to zero.
1-/ D<%%#
:R D<%%#
** =U%C:>
R1J /0:8 8# *NCJ/%C DR1J /18-
R1J /0:**
*;5*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Pole-changing motors
D\DR $<R$c<\
DAA)$\<DA DAA)$\<DA DAA)$\<DA
Selection of any speed only Selection of any speed from Selection of any speed from
from zero. Return only to zero. zero and from low speed. zero and from low speed.
Return only to zero. Return to low speed (high
braking torque) or to zero.
KC# D<%%#
M8# D<%%#
;DJ D<%%#
** =U%C:>
2DcR TG))'T
The 1:2-speeds tapped windings can follow
in sequence or overlap, as the following 8*
examples show:
1st winding 500/1000 2nd winding 1500/3000 = 500/1000/1500/3000
or
1st winding 500/1000 2nd winding 750/1500 = 500/750/1000/1500
*;5B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor windings
GG)' i<A'<A7
2 speeds
D\DR $<R$c<\ GG)' i<A'<A7
2 speeds with 8-starting at
2 separate windings low speed
3 3 3 3
D3
D
D D DD DD
D3
3 DD D33
D D
3 3
3 3
3 D 3
D3 D3
8* 3 3
3 3
3 DD
D 3 D
D
D DD D3 3
3 D D
8*
* 88
88 *
* 88
8* 8*
Figure, page 8-68
*;3m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Motor windings
GG)' i<A'<A7
3 speeds
D\DR $<R$c<\ D\DR $<R$c<\ D\DR $<R$c<\
2 windings, medium and 2 windings, low and high 2 windings, low and
high speed tapped speed tapped winding medium speed tapped
winding winding
2 2 2
D 3 3
C C D
C C C C D D
D D 3 3 3 3
or 2 or 2 or 2
D 3 3
C C C C D D 8*
D C D 3 C 3 3 D 3
3 3 D D C C
*;3E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\)T
8*
*;3a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed contactors
Certain operating sequences for sequence and indexing facilities of cam
pole-changing motors may be necessary, switches allow for these possibilities.
or undesirable, depending on the nature of Multi-speed contactor switches can
the drive. If, for example, the starting achieve these connecting by interlocking
temperature rise is to be reduced or high with suitable control circuit devices.
inertia loads are to be accelerated, it is
cT) GRD\)$\<DA D2 \:) Dh)R?D' R)?kT
advisable to switch to low speed first and
When a common fuse is used in the input
then to high speed.
wiring, it must not be larger than the
It may be necessary to prevent switching back-up fuses specified on the nameplate
from high to low speed in order to avoid of either overload relay, otherwise each
oversynchronous braking. In other cases, it relay must be protected by its own back-up
should be possible to switch each speed fuse, as shown in the diagram.
on and off directly. The operating
3 D C
8*
*33 *3
3 C % 3 C %
*3> *D3
D & ? D & ?
1> 1% 1> 1%
*D3 *D
D & ? 1! 1? D & ? 1! 1?
*;3^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed contactors
cT)?)TT TcR2$) @DcA\<A7
Pole-changing motors can be protected the advantages of a fuseless circuit.
against short-circuits and overloads by Normally, the fuse in input wiring protects
motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ/PKE the switches from welding.
or circuit-breakers NZM. These provide all
3 D C
3 C % 3C 3 C % 3C
3& 3&
*3 *D
D & ? D & ?
8*
3 C % 3 C %
*3> *D3
D & ? D & ?
*;35
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
GG)' i<A'<A7& E DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DA& a TG))'T
c?\<;TG))' $DA\$\DRT
cT)?)TT, without overload relay, with
motor-protective circuit-breaker or
circuit-breaker.
3 D C
3 C % 3C 3 C % 3C
3& 3&
*3 *D
D & ?
3 C % 3 C % 3 C %
*D3
D & ?
*3>
D & ?
*DC
D & ?
8*
D 3
D
3
C
D 3
*3
*;33
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
Rating of switchgear
Q2, Q17: I1 (low speed)
Q1, Q21: I2 (high speed)
Q23: 0.5 x I2
8*
*;3X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
DAA)$\<DA Hg <7cR)& G7) *;5BI
1 three-way pushbutton
3 3> D3 D3 D3
533@36 3C 1? 3& 3C
J
*J *33
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
3C
3C
3&
3C
3C
3&
3&
*3
3&
3C
*D Three-way pushbutton
3&
I: Low speed (Q17)
D3 0: Stop
J DD II: high speed (Q21 + Q23)
*33 D3 DD Q17: Mains contactor, low speed
Q23: Star contactor
DD D3
3& 3C
Q21: Mains contactor, high speed
3C 3&
8*
3& 3&
*3> *D3
3C 3C
D3 D3
*D3 *3>
DD DD
DD
3&
*DC *DC
D3 3C
3 3 3
*3> *DC *D3
D D D
*;3V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
DAA)$\<DA Hg <7cR)& G7) *;5BI
1 three-way pushbutton
3 Three-way pushbutton
533@36 I: Low speed (Q17)
0: Stop
*J II: High speed (Q21 + Q23)
3> 3> D3 D3 D3
3C
*3 3& 3C 1? 3C 3&
3&
J
3C
*33
D3
D3
D3
*D
DD
DD
DD
3&
3C
3&
3C
3C
3&
3&
D3
J
DD
*33 D3 DD
DD D3
3& 3C
3C 3&
8*
3& 3&
*3> *D3
3C 3C
DD D3
*D3 *3>
D3 DD
D3
3&
*DC *DC
DD 3C
3 3 3
*3> *DC *D3
D D D
Q17: Mains contactor, low speed
Q23: Star contactor
Q21: Mains contactor, high speed
*;3*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
a T)GR\) i<A'<A7T& A DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DA& a TG))'T
Multi-speed contactor , fuseless without
overload relay
3 D C
3 C % 3C 3 C % 3C
3& 3&
*3 *D
D & ? D & ?
3 C % 3 C %
*3> *D3
D & ? D & ?
8*
3 D
3 D
3
C D
*3
Rating of switchgear
Q1, Q17 = I1 (low speed)
Q2, Q21 = I2 (high speed)
*;3B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
a T)GR\) i<A'<A7T& A DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DA& a TG))'T
Multi-speed contactor with fuses and
overload relay
3 D C
3
3
3 C % 3 C %
3> D3
D & ? 1> 1% D & ? 1> 1%
D3 D
D & ? 1! 1? D & ? 1! 1?
8*
3 D
3 D
3 C D
*;Xm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
Connection A ( Figure, page 8-49) Connection C ( Figure, page 8-49)
1 three-way pushbutton 1 three-way pushbutton
3 3
53>@36
*J
1%
3C
3
3 D 1?
3C 1%
3&
3C 1% *3 *D 1?
3&
D D3 3C 1%
3& 1?
D3
*D *D3
3& 1?
J D3
DD
33 D3 DD J
DD
*33 D3 DD
DD D3
3& 3C
DD D3
3C 3& 3& 3C
3C 3&
3& 3&
3> D3 3& 3&
3C 3C
*3> *D3
DD DD 3C 3C
D3 3> DD DD
D3 D3 *D3
D3
*3>
D3
8*
3 3
3> D3 3 3
D D *3> *D3
D D
D3
*33
DD
DD
DD
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
3C
3&
3C
3C
3&
3&
3C
3C
3&
3&
3C
3&
*;XE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
G)R\<A7 GR<A$<G?) Speed can be changed either after
Actuation of pushbutton I energizes the pressing pushbutton 0, or directly by
coil of contactor Q17. Q17 switches on the pressing the appropriate pushbutton,
low speed of the motor and after depending upon the connection. The motor
pushbutton I is released, maintains itself is switched off either by pressing
via its auxiliary contact 13-14 and pushbutton 0, or in the event of an
pushbutton 0. overload, by normally closed contact 95-96
of overload relays F2 and F21.
8*
*;Xa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Control circuit devices for multi-speed contactors
a T)GR\) i<A'<A7T& A DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DA& a TG))'T
DAA)$\<DA ( Figure, page 8-49)
One three-way pushbutton with indicator
lights
*J
1%
*D@D3
1?
D3
J
DD
D3 DD
DD D3
3C
3&
3&
3C 3& 3&
*3> *D3
3C 3C
DD DD 8*
*D3 *3>
D3 D3
3 3
*3> *D3
D D
DD
D3
D3
DD
DD
3C
3C
3C
3&
3&
3&
*;X^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Control circuit devices for multi-speed contactors
DAA)$\<DA ( Figure, page 8-49)
2 three-way pushbuttons
,
+(+!
'
+!
,
++
+!
,
++
+! ++
! !* +!
++ !*
!* !* !
!
!
++ +!
+! ++
! !
!& +!
8* !*
++
!*
++
+! !&
+! +!
+!
+!
+!
+!
+!
++
++
++
++
++
!*
!
!*
!
!*
!
!*
!
!*
!
*;X5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Control circuit devices for multi-speed contactors
DAA)$\<DA ( Figure, page 8-49) T0-1-8210 changeover switch
Always set overload relay to manual reset
3 D3 D 3>
3C 1? 3C
*J 3 J D
3
D
1%
C
3D
*D@D3 &
1?
3 D D &
*3D *3D
3 C
3& 3&
*3> *D3
3C 3C
DD DD
*D3 *3>
D3 D3
*J
1%
8*
*D@D3
1?
D3
J DD
D3
3C
DD 3&
*;X3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Control circuit devices for multi-speed contactors
DAA)$\<DA ( Figure, page 8-49)
2 three-way pushbuttons
3
*J
1%
*D536 1?
D3
J DD
D3
J DD
D3
DD
D3
DD
3& 3& 3& 3& 3C 3C
*3>
3C 3C 3C *D3 3C 3& 3&
DD DD
*D3 *3>
D3 D3
*;XX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Control circuit devices for multi-speed contactors
DAA)$\<DA ( Figure, page 8-49)
2 three-way pushbuttons
3
*J
1%
*D536
1?
D3
J DD
D3
J
DD
D3 DD
DD
D3
D3 DD
DD D3
3& 3& 3& 3& 3C 3C
*3> *D3
3C 3C 3C 3C 3& 3&
DD DD
*D3 *3>
D3 D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
3C
3C
3&
3&
3C
3C
3&
3C
3C
3&
3&
3&
*;XV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
GG)' i<A'<A7& E DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DA& a TG))'T
c?\<;TG))' $DA\$\DR
Star-delta startup at low speed
cT)?)TT
Without overload relay
3 D C
3 C % 3C 3 C % 3C
3& 3&
*3 *D
( ( ( ( ( (
D & ? D & ?
3 C % 3 C %
*3> *D3
D & ? D & ?
8* *DC
3
D
C
&
%
?
*31
3 C %
D & ?
3 3 3
DD D3
DD C D3
DD D3
*3
Rating of switchgear
Q1, Q17 = I1
(low speed)
Q2, Q21 = I2
(high speed)
Q19, Q23 = 0.5 x I2
*;X*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
With 2cT)T and overload relays
3 D C
*3
3 C % 3 C %
*3> *D3
D & ? D & ?
1> 1% 1> 1%
*D *D3
D & ? 1? D & ? 1! 1?
1!
3 C % 3 C %
*DC *31
D & ? D & ?
8*
3 3 3
DD D3
DD C D3
DD D3
*3
Rating of switchgear Overload relays F2 and F21 are not used on
F2, Q17 = I1 multi-speed contactors without motor
(low speed) protection. If F2 and F21 cannot be
F21, Q21 = I2 protected by a common fuse, then use
connection on Figure, page 8-53.
(high speed)
Q19, Q23 = 0.5 x I2
Motor windings Section Motor
F1 = I2
windings, page 8-50
*;XB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
3 DAA)$\<DA
53>@36 Low speed selected
*J only from off position,
high speed only via
3C 1%
low speed without
*3
3& 1? actuation of the Stop
1%
3C
*D *D3 button.
3& 1?
*33 D3 Three-way
J DD pushbutton
3C I: Low speed
3& (Q17, Q19)
3C 3% 3C
0: Stop
&C 3C
*3> *3> *DC *
C *31 II: High speed (Q21,
3& && 3& 3? 3&
Q19, Q23)
D3 CD D3 3C
*31
C3
DD *DC DD 3&
&C
*D3
DD DD 3& &&
*D3 *31 *D3
8*
DD
D3 D3 3C *3>
D3
3 3 3 3 3
*3> *
C *DC *31 *D3
D D D D D
Q17: Mains contactor, low Q19: Delta contactor
3> 3> D3 3> D3 31
speed Q21: Mains contactor, &C 3C 1? 3& DD && 3&
K3: Timing relays high speed J
Q23: Star contactor *33
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
cA$\<DA
3C
3&
3C
3&
3C
3&
*;Vm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
GG)' i<A'<A7& a DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DAT& a TG))'T H'<R)$\<DA GR)T)?)$\)'I
c?\<;TG))' $DA\$\DRT
Overload relays F2 and 3 D C
F21 are not used on
multi-speed contactors
without motor protection. *3
3 C % 3 C %
*33 *3D
D & ? D & ?
3 C % 3 C %
*3> *D3
Rating of switchgear D & ? D & ?
1> 1% 1> 1%
Q11, Q12 = I2 (low and *D *D3
high speed) D & ? 1! 1? D & ? 1! 1?
3 D
3 D
3 C D
*3
*;VE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
3 Five-way
533@36 pushbutton
*J DAA)$\<DA
1% Change of direction
*D 1? FORWARDREVERS
1%
*D3 E after actuation of
1?
D3
Stop button,
J optionally followed
DD
*33 D3
DD by SLOWFAST with
D3 no return to low
DD
D3
D3
*D3 *3>
DD
DD DD
8* *3D D3
DD
*DC D3
DD
*DC
3&
3C
*33
D3
3 3 3 3 3
*33 *3> *DC *D3 *3D
D D D D D
D3 33 3D 3D 3> 33 3> 3>
DA\RD? $<R$c<\ ')h<$)
1? 3C 3C 3& 3C &C 3& D3 0: Stop
J I: Forward (Q11)
*33 II: Back (Q12)
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3&
3&
3&
3&
*;Va
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
GG)' i<A'<A7& a DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DAT& a TG))'T
H'<R)$\<DA A' TG))' T)?)$\)' T<@c?\A)DcT?kI
c?\<;TG))' $DA\$\DR cT)?)TT without overload relay
3 D C
3 C % 3C 3 C % 3C
3& 3&
*3 *D
D & ? D & ?
3 C % 3 C % 3 C % 3 C %
*3> *3! *D3 *DD
D & ? D & ? D & ? D & ?
8*
3 D
3 D
3 C D
3 C % *3
*DC
D & ?
Rating of switchgear
Q1, Q17, Q18 = I1 (low speed)
Q2, Q21, Q22 = I2
Q23 = 0.5 x I2 (high speed)
*;V^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
c?\<;TG))' $DA\$\DR
With 2cT)T and overload relays
3 D C
*3
3 C % 3 C % 3 C % 3 C %
*3> *3! *D3 *DD
D & ? D & ? D & ? D & ?
1> 1% 1> 1%
*D *D3
D & ? D & ?
1! 1? 1! 1?
8* 3
D
3 D
3 C D
3 C %
*DC
D & ? *3
*;V5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
DAA)$\<DA
Simultaneous selection of direction and
speed via one pushbutton. Always operate
Stop button before changeover.
3
53>@36
*J
1%
3C
*3 *D
3& 1?
3C 1%
*D 3&
*D3
1?
D3
J
DD
*DD *3! CD
CD
DD
D3 D3
*D3 D3 *DD *
3
DD DD
D3 DD
D3 DD
DD
D3
DD D3
*33 3& 3C 3& 3C
3C
&C
3C 3& 3&
*
3 &&
DD D3 3& CD &&
3&
*3! *3> *DC *D3 *DC
D3 DD 3C *
3 C3 &C
3C
3 3 3 3 3 3
*3> *3! *D3 *DC *
3 *DD
D D D D D D
Q17: Slow forward
Q18: Slow back
Q21: Fast forward
Q23: Star contactor
K1: Contactor relay
Q22: Fast back
*;V3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
D3 DC 3! D3 3> DC 3! DD Five-way pushbutton
1? DD DD D3 D3 3& CD CD DA\RD? $<R$c<\ ')h<$)
J 0: Stop
*33 I: Slow forward (Q17)
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
3C
II: Slow back (Q18)
3C
3C
3C
3C
3&
3&
3&
3&
3&
cA$\<DA
Desired speed and operating direction can
be selected by actuation of one of the four
pushbutton. Contactors Q17, Q18, Q21 and
Q23 maintain themselves by their contact
14-13 and can be de-energized only by
actuation of pushbutton 0. Contactors Q21
and Q22 can maintain themselves only
when Q23 has picked up and contact
Q23/13-14 or 44-43 is closed.
8*
*;VX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
GG)' i<A'<A7& @)'<c@ A' :<7: TG))'& E DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DA& ^ TG))'T& a i<A'<A7T
c?\<;TG))' $DA\$\DR Motor circuit X Section Motor circuit
Multi-speed contactors i<\: overload X, page 8-51
relay Figure, page 8-79
3 D C
3 C % 3C 3 C % 3C 3 C % 3C
3 C % 3 C % 3 C %
*3> *33 *D3
D & ? D & ? D & ?
8*
3 3 3
D C
D C
D
C C
3 C % *3
*DC
D & ?
*;VV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
Connection of motor winding: X DAA)$\<DA
Connection A Selection of any speed only from zero.
3 No return to low speed, only to zero.
53>@36 DD 33 3> D3 D3
1? 3& 3& 3& 3C
*J J
*3 3C
*D
D3
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
*C 3&
D3
3C
3&
3&
3C
3C
3C
3&
3&
J
DD
DD
3&
D3
*33 DD 3&
3C
DAA)$\<DA
D3 3C
3& 3C 3C 3C Selection of any speed from zero or
*33 *3> *D3
3C 3& 3& 3& from low speed. Return only to zero.
DD DD CD
*3> *33 *33 C3
DD 33 33 3> 3> DC D3
D3 D3
C3 D3 C3 1? 3& 3C 3& 3C 3& 3C
*D3 CD *D3 DD
*3> J
CD
CD DD 3&
*DC *DC *DC *33
D3
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
C3 D3 3C
3 3 3 3
*33 *3> *DC *D3
8*
3C
3&
3&
3C
3C
3C
3&
3&
D D D D
*;V*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
GG)' i<A'<A7& ?Di A' :<7: TG))'& E DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DA& ^ TG))'T& a i<A'<A7T
c?\<;TG))' $DA\$\DR Motor circuit Y Section Motor circuit
Multi-speed contactor i<\:Dc\ overload Y, page 8-51
relay Figure, page 8-77
; M K
;
; K + ; K + ; K +
;F ;; M;
M , G M , G M , G
; K + 9F 9+ ; K + 9F 9+ ; K + 9F 9+
M K ,
M , G 9& 9G M , G 9& 9G M , G 9& 9G
8*
K K K
; M
; M
;
K M
; K + ;
MK
M , G
*;VB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
Connection of motor winding: Y DAA)$\<DA
Connection A Selection of any speed only from
3 zero. No return to low speed, only
J
to zero.
DD 3> 33 D3 D3
1? 3& 3& 3& 3C
D 1%
J
C
& 1? *33
D3
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
J D3
J
3C
3C
3C
3C
3&
3&
3&
3&
DD
C DD 3&
D3 3C
D D3 3& DAA)$\<DA
DD 3C Selection of any speed from zero or
3 3& 3C 3C 3C from low speed. Return only to zero.
3> 33 D3
3C 3& 3& 3& Four-way pushbuttons
DD DD CD 0: Stop
33 3> 33
D3 D3
D3
C3
C3
I: Low speed (Q17)
C3
D3 D3 3> II: Medium speed (Q11)
CD DD CD
CD DD III: High speed (Q21 + Q22)
8* DC
C3
3
DC
D3
3 3
DC
3&
3C
3
DD 3> 3> 33 33 D3 D3
3> 33 DC D3 1? 3& 3C 3& 3C 3& 3C
D D D D J
*33
D3
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
3&
3C
3C
3C
3&
3&
3&
*;*m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
GG)' i<A'<A7& ?Di A' @)'<c@ TG))'& E DG)R\<A7 '<R)$\<DA& ^ TG))'T& a i<A'<A7T
c?\<;TG))' $DA\$\DR Motor circuit Z Section Motor circuit
Multi-speed contactor i<\:Dc\ overload Z, page 8-51
relay Figure, page 8-53
; M K
;
; K + ; K + ; K +
;F ;; M;
M , G M , G M , G
; K + 9F 9+ ; K + 9F 9+ ; K + 9F 9+
M K ,
M , G 9& 9G M , G 9& 9G M , G 9& 9G
8*
K K K
; M
; M
;
K M
; K + ;
MK
M , G
*;*E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors
Connection of motor winding: Z DAA)$\<DA
Connection A Selection of any speed from zero.
No return to low speed, only to zero.
* DD 33 3> D3 D3
,*24*- 1? 3& 3& 3& 3C
J
#< *33
D3
D3
D3
D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
#8 (
#8*
3C
3&
3C
3&
3C
3C
3&
3&
#88 (3
8*
<
88
88
* DAA)$\<DA
8*
#**
*7 Selection of any speed from zero or from
88
*
low speed. Return only to zero.
8* *7
* *7
DD 33 33 3> 3> DC DC
*7 *7
#*2 #8* #** 1? 3& 3C 3& 3C 3& 3C
J
*7 * * *
88 78 88
*33
D3
D3
D3
#** #** #*2 D3
DD
DD
DD
DD
8* 7* 8*
8* 7* 7*
3&
3&
3C
3C
3&
3C
3C
3&
#8* 88 #*2 78 #8* 78
8*
88 78
*
#87 8* #87 *7 #87 7*
* * * *
#*2 #87 #8* #**
8 8 8 8
Q17: Low speed winding 1 Four-way pushbuttons
Q23: Medium speed winding 2 0: Stop
Q21: Medium speed winding 2 I: Low speed (Q17)
Q11: High speed winding 1 II: Medium speed (Q21 + Q23)
III: High speed (Q11)
*;*a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Three-phase autotransformer starter
:R));G:T) c\D\RAT2DR@)R T\R\)R i<\: @<AT $DA\$\DR A' R)T<T\DRT&
a;T\7)& ^;G:T) h)RT<DA
* 8 7
* 8 7 *7
#*
*
#*
8 3
* 7 * 7 * 7
#** #*2 #*3
8 3 8 3 8 3
#8 * #* 8
* 8
* 8
(2 (
8 3
#8
( (3
8*
#
*
Use F2 when using F1 instead of Q1.
Rating of switchgear:
Starting voltage: 0.6 x Ue
Inrush current: 0.6 x direct switching system
Tightening torque: 0.36 x direct switching system
Q1, Q11: Ie
Q16, Q17: 0.6 x Ie
*;*^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Three-phase autotransformer starter
:R));G:T) c\D\RAT2DR@)R T\R\)R i<\: @<AT $DA\$\DR A' R)T<T\DRT&
a;T\7)& ^;G:T) h)RT<DA
3
5*336
*J
1%
3C *D 1?
*3 3&
D3
J
DD
*33 3C
3&
DD CD
3&
*33 *33 C3 *33
D3 3C
3&
*3? 3C
3&
3% *3> 3C
3%
*
3 *
D
8* 3! 3!
3 3 3 3 3
*3? *
3 *3> *
D *33
D D D D D
iD;i<R) $DA\RD? 3
Always set overload relay to 533@36
reclosing lockout *J
3C
*3 3&
*3D
DD CD
*33 *33
D3 C3
*;*5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Three-phase autotransformer starter
:R));i<R) $DA\RD?
*3D
*;*3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Three-phase autotransformer starter
:R));G:T) c\D\RAT2DR@)R T\R\)R i<\: @<AT $DA\$\DR A' T\R\<A7 \RAT2DR@)R&
E;T\7)& ^;G:T)
3 D C
3 C % 3C
3 3
3&
(( (
D & ?
3 C % 3 C %
33
3
D & ? D & ?
33
33
33
D3
D3
8*
D3
1> 1%
D
D
D
D & ?
1! 1?
3 C %
3C
D & ?
*;*X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Three-phase autotransformer starter
3 iD;i<R) $DA\RD?
Always set overload relay to reclosing
J
lockout (manual reset)
3C 1% 3
3 D 533@36
3& 1?
D3 *J
J
DD 1%
33
3C 3C *D
3 1?
3& 3&
%%
*3D
?>
3
3
?! %? %%
?>
3&
DD DD *
3 *
3
?! 1?
3C 3C 33
3C D3 D3 Q16: Step contactor
3 3 3 3
K1: Timing relay
3?
3 33 3C
D D D D Q11: Mains contactor
Q13: Star contactor
:R));i<R) $DA\RD? D
3
3 iD;i<R) $DA\RD? D
3
8*
I: ON 1? 3C 3& 1? %%
J
0: OFF
*33
D3
D3
*3D
DD
DD
3C
3C
3&
3&
*;*V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Three-phase automatic rotor starters
:R));G:T) c\D@\<$ RD\DR T\R\)RT
^;T\7)& RD\DR ^;G:T)
3 D C
3 C % 3C
*3
3&
*3 ( ( (
D & ?
3 C % 3 C % 3 C % 3 C %
*33 D & ?
*3D D & ?
*3C D & ? *3& D & ?
1> 1%
*D
D & ? 1! 1?
8*
*C *D *3
C D 3
C C D 3
C D D
*3
*;**
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Three-phase automatic rotor starters
a;T\7)& RD\DR a;G:T)
3 D C
3 C % 3C *3
3&
*3
D & ?
3 C % 3 C % 3 C %
*33 *3D D & ?
*3& D & ?
D & ?
1> 1%
*D
D & ? 1! 1?
8*
*D *3
D 3
C
D 3
*3
Use F2 when using F1 instead of Q1.
Rating of switchgear
Inrush current = 0.5 2.5 x Ie
Tightening torque = 0.5 to pull-out torque
Q1, Q11 = Ie
Step contactors = 0.35 x Irotor
Final step = 0.58 x Irotor
contactors
*;*B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Three-phase automatic rotor starters
<\: @<AT $DA\$\DR& T\k?) ^;T\7)& RD\DR ^;G:T)
<
(
*7
* 8
* (3
8*
<
88
**
*7 * **
** 7
* *7
78 * * *
*7 *7 7 *8
7* *7 * *7
* * *
* * 8
* *7 *
* * * * * * *
** * * 8 *8 *7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
8*
D3
DD
DD
3C
3C
3&
3&
*;Bm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Three-phase automatic rotor starters
cA$\<DA the rotor slip rings: the motor operates with
Pushbutton I energizes mains contactor rated speed.
Q11: N/O Q11/14-13 transfers the voltage, The motor is switched off either by
Q11/44-43 energizes timing relay K1. The pushbutton 0, or in the event of an
motor is connected to the supply system overload, by N/C 95-96 of the overload relay
with rotor resistors R1 + R2 + R3 in series. F2 or N/O 13-14 of the motor-protective
When the set starting time has elapsed, circuit-breaker or circuit-breaker.
normally open contact K1/15-18 energizes
Step contactors Q13 and/or Q12 with their
Q14. Step contactor Q14 short-circuits
resistors R3, R2 and timing relays K3, K2 are
starting stage R1 and via Q14/14-13
omitted in single-stage or two-stage
energizes timing relay K2. When the set
starting circuits. The rotor is then
starting time has elapsed, K2/15-18
connected to the resistance terminals U, V,
energizes step contactor Q12, which
W2 or U, V, W1. The references for step
short-circuits starting stage R2 and via
contactors and timing relays in the wiring
Q12/14-13 energizes timing relay K3. When
diagrams are then changed from Q13, Q12
the set starting time has elapsed, K3/15-18
to Q12, Q11 or to Q13, Q11 as appropriate.
energizes final step contactor Q13, which
is maintained via Q13/14-13, Step When there are more than three stages,
contactors Q14 and Q12 as well as timing the additional step contactors, timing
relays K1, K2 and K3 are de-energized via
Q13. Final step contactor Q13 short-circuits
relays and resistors have appropriate
increasing designations. 8*
*;BE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Switching of capacitors
DA\$\DRT 2DR $G$<\DRT
Individual circuit without
quick-discharge resistors
3 D C
*3
3 C %
*33
D & ?
8* *3 *3
*3
*3
R1 discharge resistors fitted in
capacitor
*;Ba
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Switching of capacitors
3 3 33 33
533@36 J 3& 3C
,
D3
D3
DD
DD
D3
3C
3C
3&
3&
J
DD
*33
3C
Double pushbutton
DR $DAA)$\<DA D2 2cR\:)R $\c\DRT%
3&
Section Control circuit devices for
star-delta starting, page 8-45
3&
*33
3C
3
*33
D
cA$\<DA
Pushbutton I actuates contactor Q11,
which picks up and maintains itself via its
own auxiliary contact 14-13 and
pushbutton 0 on voltage. Capacitor C1 is
thus energized. Discharge resistors R1 are
not active when contactor Q11 is
energized. Actuation of pushbutton 0
effects de-energization. Normally closed
contacts Q11/21-22 then switch discharge
resistors R1 to capacitor C1.
*;B^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Switching of capacitors
G$<\DR $DA\$\DR $D@!<A\<DA
Capacitors contactor with pilot contactor circuit with and without discharge
and series resistors. Individual and parallel resistors and with series resistors.
3 D C
*3
D3 3C C3 D3 C3
3 3 C % &C 3 3C 3 C % &C
*3& *33
D DD 3& D & ? CD && D DD 3& D & ? CD &&
8*
*3 *3
*D
*3
*;B5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Switching of capacitors
3 3
533@36 533@36
*J *J
J 5C6*3*3%&C3
D3
3 J D
J 3
DD D
C
*33 &
3C D3
3& J
3& DD
*33 *3D
3C *3D
3C
3&
3& 3&
*3& *33
3C
3C
3&
3 3
*33 *3& *3&
3C
D D
3 3
*33 *3&
8*
D D
Q11: Mains contactor
Q14: Pilot contactor
Actuation by double pushbutton S11 Actuation by selector switch S13, two-wire
control S12 (power factor correction relay)
and double pushbutton S11
*;B3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Duplex pump control
c??k c\D@\<$ $DA\RD? 2DR \iD Gc@GT
Starting sequence of pumps 1 and 2 can be P1 Auto = Pump 1 base load,
selected by control switch S12. Pump 2 peak load
P2 Auto = Pump 2 base load,
Control circuit wiring with two float
Pump 1 peak load
switches for basic and peak loads P1 + P2 = Direct operation independent
(operation is also possible with two
of float switches (or pressure
pressure switches) switches)
; M K
V 0; .. .
F! V
& 0;; 0M;
V
F F!
& &! V
&! 0;; 0;M
8* F
0;M 0MM
0;
K
0M
K
*;BX
;; 0;M
V
V
M NJ:
;" M
; NJ:
;
M
K
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
,
+
Duplex pump control
G
F
&
9+ 9+ M ;, M ;, ;, ;,
9
0;M 0MM 0F 0;; 0& 0M; 0;M 0;; ;V
9G 9G ; ;K ; ;K ;K ;K
;;
; ; ;M
0;; 0;M ;K
M M
T0(3)-4-15833
Float switch F7 closes before F8 Q11: Pump 1 mains contactor Q12: Pump 2 mains contactor
cA$\<DA the range of F7 (discharge is greater than In position P1 + P2, both pumps are in operation,
The duplex pump control is designed for intake), F8 starts pump 2 (peak load). When the independent of the float switches (Caution!
operation of two pump motors M1 and M2. water level rises again, F8 is deactivated. Pump Tank may possibly overflow).
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
Control is via float switches F7 and F8. 2 continues running until F7 stops both pumps. On the version of duplex pump control with
Operating mode selector switch S12 in position The operating sequence of pumps 1 and 2 can cyclic load sharing (T0(3)-4-15915), S12 has a
P1 auto. The system operates as follows: be determined using operating mode selector further state: the operating sequences are
When the water level in the storage tank falls or switch S12: Position P1 auto or P2 auto. automatically reversed after each cycle.
rises, F7 switches pump 1 on or off (base load).
If the water level drops below
*;BV
8*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Fully automatic pump control
With pressure switch for air tank and With 3-pole pressure switch MCSN (main
domestic water supply without water circuit)
failure (run dry) safety device
3 F1: Fuses (if required)
D Q1: Motor-protective circuit-breaker
C
switch, manual (e.g. PKZ)
*3 F7: Pressure switch MCSN, 3-pole
M1:Pump motor
Air or pressure tank
*3 ( ( ( Non-return valve
Pressure pipe
Centrifugal (or reciprocating) pump
Suction pipe with filter
Well
*>
C
*3
8*
*;B*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Fully automatic pump control
With 1 pole pressure switch MCS (control
circuit)
3 F1: Fuses
D Q11:Contactor or automatic star-delta
C
switch
F2: Overload relay with reclosing lockout
*33 *3 3 C % F7: Pressure switch MCS, 1 pole
D & ? M1: Pump motor
1%
*D Air or pressure tank
*> 1? Non-return valve
Centrifugal (or reciprocating) pump
Pressure pipe
C
Suction pipe with filter
*3 Well
8*
*;BB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Fully automatic pump control
With 3-pole float switch SW (main circuit)
F1: Fuses (if required)
; Q1: Motor-protective
M
K circuit-breakers, manual
(e.g. PKZ)
0;
F7: Float switch 3-pole
V (connection: pump full)
M1: Pump motor
0; . . .
HW: Highest level
0F NW:Lowest value
Cable with float, counterweight,
pulleys and clamps
K Storage tank
Pressure pipe
0; Centrifugal (or reciprocating)
pump
Outlet
Suction pipe with filter
Well
8*
*;Emm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Fully automatic pump control
With 1 pole float switch SW (control
circuit)
F1: Fuses
;
M V Q11: Contactor or automatic
K star-delta switch
F2: Overload relay with reclosing
0; 0&
lockout
0;; ; K +
F8: Float switch 1 pole
M , G
; V (connection pump full)
9+
S1: Changeover switch
0M 9G
MANUAL-OFF-AUTO
F9: Float switch 1 pole
(connection: pump full)
K 0;
M1: Pump motor
Cable with float,
counterweight, pulleys and
09
clamps
Storage tank
V
Pressure pipe
Centrifugal (or reciprocating) 8*
pump
Outlet
Suction pipe with filter
Water-failure monitoring by
means of a float switch
Well
*;EmE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
?? !Dc\ D\DRT
Fully automatic main transfer switch with automatic release
:A7)Dh)R ')h<$) \D mEmm . R)$\<DA D2 ?Di;hD?\7) <AT\??\<DAT
.JJJ . R\ VE*% AT\??\<DAT 2DR 7\:)R<A7 D2 G)DG?)c\D@\<$ R)T)\\<A7& \:) G:T)
@DA<\DR<A7 R)?k <T T)\ \D%
Pick-up voltage Uan = 0.95 x Un
Drop-out voltage Ub = 0.85 x Uan
3 383
D D83
C C83
*3 (( ( *383 ( ( (
?
?
%
%
&
&
C
C
D
3
3
*
D 3&
33 *
D DD
DD DD
33
*3D *
3 *33 D3
D3
3D 3&
3D 3&
3
*3D
D
3 3
*33 *
D
D D
*;Ema
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
7)
')A\<2<$\<DA D2 )?)$\R<$?
)Lc<G@)A\ <A DR\: @)R<$ B;EX
B;E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Approvals and certifications
Refer to Chapter 23 of the Main Industrial
Switchgear catalogue for additional
information on approvals and product
certifications in general.
www.eaton.com/moeller/support
(Catalogs)
Successful exports are based on more
than just using certified equipment.
In addition to product certifications, a firm
understanding of the standards and market
conventions involved is necessary to
Approval of electrical equipment is based
insure that electrical components and
on the conformity and certification of
assemblies are also properly applied.
components and assemblies to regional
and country specific product and A checklist is a useful tool to clarify
installation standards that are geared important issues and minimize costs during
towards the proper application of these the engineering phase. Special
products in those markets. requirements that are overlooked during
the initial stages, and need to be remedied
Product testing conducted by nationally
after the fact, will not only be costly but
recognized certification agencies is
very time consuming as well.
often required, and product certification
B is also subject to periodic review and
auditing by the certification agency.
In the majority of cases, product
certification is tied to the display of
respective certification marks on the
product themselves.
Product certification ratings may differ
from IEC based technical data and
ratings.
Product certifications are sometimes
subject to additional and specific
conditions of acceptability.
Design flexibility on the part of
manufacturers can sometimes be
impacted by the possible need to
re-certify each subsequent product
modification.
B;a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Approvals and certifications
G)$<? $:R$\)R<T\<$T 2DR \:) )jGDR\ \D
DR\: @)R<$ H& A'I
Technologies that have proven themselves
reliable the world over are not guaranteed
automatic acceptance in North America.
Exports to North America must take into
consideration the following:
North American certification of electrical
equipment,
North American product, application,
and installation standards,
Particular and specialized market
conventions,
Approval of electrical installations by
local inspectors
(AHJ = uthority
aving urisdiction).
B;^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Approvals and certifications
?)$\R<$? )Lc<G@)A\ 7RDcG<A7T <A DR\: @)R<$
There is a differentiation made in North A'cT\R<? DA\RD? Lc<G@)A\
America between products used in Energy UL 508 and CSA C22.2 No. 14
Distribution, such as molded case circuit Contactors
breakers certified per the UL 489 product Control Relays
standard, and those found in Industrial Overload Relays
Control, typically falling under UL 508. Cam Switches
Product standards such as UL 489 and CSA Pilot devices and Limit switches
C22.2 No. 5-09 require significantly larger Solid State relays and equipment
air and creepage clearances in component Programmable Controllers
construction than do the IEC standards and
their harmonized European counterparts
(EN norms).
An example of its impact on component
construction would be the European motor
protective switch which, in North America,
needs to be equipped with a large spacings
terminal on its supply side whenever it is
applied as a stand-alone protective device
in individual motor branch circuits.
B ?)$\R<$? $D@GDA)A\T cT)' <A )A)R7k
'<T\R<!c\<DA
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
UL 489, CSA C22.2 No. 5-09
Molded Case Switches
UL 489, CSA C22.2 No. 5-09
Enclosed Switches
UL 98, CSA C 22.2 No. 4
Fusible Disconnect Switches
UL 98, CSA C 22.2 No. 4
Fuses
UL 248, CSA C22.2 No. 248
B;5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Approvals and certifications
R<\)R< 2DR )Lc<G@)A\ T)?)$\<DA GR\<$c?R
\D DR\: @)R<$A $DAh)A\<DAT
Knowing the type of load and circuit is
especially important in selecting the right
equipment for the application.
Motor starters are used exclusively for
the protection and switching of motor
loads.
Motor starters mounted on busbar
adapters that are supplied from a feeder
must have the larger electrical
clearances on their incoming supply
side.1)
Motor starters mounted on busbar
adapters within a branch circuit are
permitted to have industrial control
electrical clearances on their field
terminations.1)
Supplementary handles are necessary
for supply circuit disconnect switches
equipped with door mounted rotary
handles in applications such as industrial B
machinery.
1) Circuit examples: Refer to diagrams on
page 9-35.
B;3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Fuse classifications in North America
Additional comments on Table page 9-8
c<\!?) 2DR cT) <A% Z :R$\) kG<$?
\A'R'T R<T\<$T RA7)T
A' <A @GT
Class Class
, UL 248-6/7, Fast- 10 kA, 250 V AC 0600
, No. 59 C22.2 248-6/7 Acting 10 kA, 600 V AC
"Code" "Code"
Class Class UL 248-4, Fast- 200 kA, 600 V AC 0.530
C22.2 248-4 Acting
Time
Delay
Class Class UL 248-5, Fast- 100 kA, 480 V AC 2160
C22.2 248-5 Acting 100 kA, 600 V AC 0.520
Time
Delay
Class Class UL 248-8, Fast- 200 kA, 600 V AC 1600
HRCI-J C22.2 248-8 Acting
Time
Delay
B Class
Class
UL 248-9, Fast- 50 kA/100 kA/ 0600
K1, K5 K1, K5 C22.2 248-9 Acting 200 kA,
Time 600 V AC
Delay
Class Class UL 248-10, Fast- 200 kA, 600 V AC 6016000
C22.2 248-10 Acting
Time
Delay
Class Class UL 248-12, Fast- 50 kA/100 kA/ 0600
RK1, HRCI-R C22.2 248-12 Acting 200 kA,
RK5 RK1, Time 600 V AC
RK5 Delay
B;X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Fuse classifications in North America
GG?<$\<DAT D@@)A\T
Protection of Protection of
resistive and inductive and Compact size!
inductive highly cRR)A\ ?<@<\<A7 per UL/CSA Standards!
loads. inductive Non-interchangeable with any other fuse class.
loads.
Compact size!
Appliances, Electrical cRR)A\ ?<@<\<A7 per UL/CSA Standards!
Heaters, Motors, Non-interchangeable with any other fuse class.
Lighting,
Mixed loads
Transformers,
Lighting... D\ @R>)' $cRR)A\ ?<@<\<A7 per UL/CSA
B
in Feeders Standards!
and Branch That's why Class K fuses are often substituted by
Circuits. rejection -type Class RK... fuses.
cRR)A\ ?<@<\<A7 per UL/CSA Standards!
Non-interchangeable with any other fuse class.
B;V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Fuse classifications in North America
The table contains selection and
application information for feeder and
branch circuit fuses commonly used in
North America.
The fuse characteristics and application
guidelines mentioned in the table provide a
general overview only.
Most North American power circuit fuses
also carry DC ratings per UL and CSA
product certification standards.
B;*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Global Codes and Standards Authorities
B;B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Global Codes and Standards Authorities
B;Em
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Global Codes and Standards Authorities
B;EE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Global Codes and Standards Authorities
B;Ea
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Global Codes and Standards Authorities
B;E^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Testing Agencies and Certification Marks
)T\<A7 7)A$<)T A' $)R\<2<$\<DA @R>T )A$DcA\)R)' <A cRDG) A' DR\: @)R<$
Nearly all of Eatons electrical components The CE mark verifies that the marked
in the Moeller line are compliant with component meets all the provisions of the
global standards, including those in the relevant standards and requirements
USA and Canada. pertaining to that product. The marking
Some components, like e.g. obligation thus enables components to
circuit-breakers, meet all relevant gain unfettered access to the European
international standards in their base model market place.
versions and can be universally applied, Because CE marked components are
except in the USA and Canada. A special constructed in accordance with
line of circuit breakers, certified to UL and harmonized standards, certification in
CSA standards, is available for export to individual countries within the European
North America. Union is no longer necessary.
An up-to-date listing of all component An exception would be components that
certifications and classifications can be could also be installed in non-industrial
accessed via the Internet: environments. Accordingly, components
such as miniature circuit breakers and
www.moeller.net/
residual current protective devices are
eaton-approbationen/en
often expected to bear national
In some cases, certain country specific certification marks. The following table
installation and operational requirements, provides a selection of the most commonly
B wiring materials and practices, as well as encountered certification marks from
special circumstances such as unusual international testing authorities.
environmental conditions, must be taken
into consideration.
As of January 1997, all electrical
equipment built in accordance with the
European Low Voltage
Directive and destined for sale in the
European Union must bear a CE mark.
B;E5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Testing Agencies and Certification Marks
Listing
Recognition
A' Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
B;E3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Identification of electrical equipment in North America
)h<$) ')T<7A\<DAT <A \:) A' A' \D EB;amma H ammVI&
^aJaZ ^E3Z^E3
Suitable prefix numbers and/or letters, and j@G?)%
suffix letters may be added to the basic The first control relay initiating a jog
device designations to differentiate function is designated: "1JCR", where:
between components performing similar 1 = number prefix
functions.
J = Jogging function of the component
Where two or more basic device
CR = The type of component is a Control
designations are combined, the function
Relay (Contactor Relay).
designation is normally given first.
B;EX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Identification of electrical equipment in North America
)h<$) DR 2cA$\<DA ')T<7A\<DA ?)\\)RT <A $$DR'A$) i<\: EB;amma H ammVI
A Accelerating
AM Ammeter
B Braking
C or CAP Capacitor, capacitance
CB Circuit-breaker
CR Control relay
CT Current transformer
DM Demand meter
D Diode
DS or DISC Disconnect switch
DB Dynamic braking
FA Field accelerating
FC Field contactor
FD Field decelerating B
FL Field-loss
F or FWD Forward
FM Frequency meter
FU Fuse
GP Ground protective
H Hoist
J Jog
LS Limit switch
L Lower
M Main contactor
MCR Master control relay
B;EV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Identification of electrical equipment in North America
MS Master switch
OC Overcurrent
OL Overload
P Plugging, potentiometer
PFM Power factor meter
PB Pushbutton
PS Pressure switch
REC Rectifier
R or RES Resistor, resistance
REV Reverse
RH Rheostat
SS Selector switch
SCR Silicon controlled rectifier
SV Solenoid valve
B SC Squirrel cage
S Starting contactor
SU Suppressor
TACH Tachometer generator
TB Terminal block, board
TR Time-delay relay
Q Transistor
UV Undervoltage
VM Voltmeter
WHM Watthour meter
WM Wattmeter
X Reactor, reactance
B;E*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Identification of electrical equipment in North America
The use of class designation code letters to should simplify harmonization with
appropriate ANSI/IEEE standards is international standards. The code letters
permissible as an alternative to device are, in part, similar to those of IEC 61346-1
designations per NEMA ICS19-2002 (1996-03).
(R 2007). Class designation code letters
A Separate Assembly
B Induction Machine, Squirrel Cage
Induction Motor
Synchro, General
Control transformer
Control transmitter
Control Receiver
Differential Receiver
Differential Transmitter
Receiver
Torque Receiver B
Torque Transmitter
Synchronous Motor
Wound-Rotor Induction Motor or
Induction Frequency Convertor
BT Battery
C Capacitor
Capacitor, General
Polarized Capacitor
Shielded Capacitor
CB Circuit-Breaker (all)
B;EB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Identification of electrical equipment in North America
D, CR Diode
Bidirectional Breakdown Diode
Full Wave Bridge Rectifier
Metallic Rectifier
Semiconductor Photosensitive
Cell
Semiconductor Rectifier
Tunnel Diode
Unidirectional Breakdown
Diode
D, VR Zener Diode
DS Annunciator
Light Emitting Diode
Lamp
Fluorescent Lamp
Incandescent Lamp
Indicating Lamp
B E Armature (Commutor and
Brushes)
Lightning Arrester
Contact
Electrical Contact
Fixed Contact
Momentary Contact
Core
Magnetic Core
Horn Gap
Permanent Magnet
Terminal
Not Connected Conductor
B;am
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Identification of electrical equipment in North America
F Fuse
G Rotary Amplifier (all)
A.C. Generator
Induction Machine, Squirrel Cage
Induction Generator
HR Thermal Element Actuating
Device
J Female Disconnecting Device
Female Receptacle
K Contactor, Relay
L Coil
Blowout Coil
Brake Coil
Operating Coil
Field
Commutating Field
Compensating Field B
Generator or Motor Field
Separately Excited Field
Series Field
Shunt Field
Inductor
Saturable Core Reactor
Winding, General
LS Audible Signal Device
Bell
Buzzer
Horn
M Meter, Instrument
B;aE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Identification of electrical equipment in North America
B;aa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Identification of electrical equipment in North America
S Switch
Combination Locking and
Nonlokking Switch
Disconnect Switch
Double Throw Switch
Drum Switch
Flow-Actuated Switch
Foot Operated Switch
Key-Type Switch
Knife Switch
Limit Switch
Liquid-Level Actuated Switch
Locking Switch
Master Switch
Mushroom Head
Operated Switch
Pressure or Vacuum
Operated Switch
Pushbutton Switch
Pushbutton Illuminated Switch,
B
Rotary Switch
Selector Switch
Single-Throw Switch
Speed Switch
Stepping Switch
Temperature-Actuated Switch
Time Delay Switch
Toggle Switch
Transfer Switch
Wobble Stick Switch
Thermostat
B;a^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Identification of electrical equipment in North America
T Transformer
Current Transformer
Transformer, General
Polyphase Transformer
Potential Transformer
TB Terminal Board
TC Thermocouple
U Inseparable Assembly
V Pentode, Equipotential Cathode
Phototube, Single Unit,
Vacuum Type
Triode
Tube, Mercury Pool
W Conductor
Associated
Multiconductor
B Shielded
Conductor, General
X Tube Socket
B;a5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North America
?)$\R<$? $<R$c<\ Tk@!D?T \D & ZZZ
The following comparison of electrical
circuit symbols is based on the following
international/national specifications:
IEC 60617 graphic symbol database
(DIN EN 60617-2 to DIN EN 60617-12)
NEMA ICS 19-2002 (R 2007), ANSI Y32.2/
IEEE 315/315 A, CSA Z99
)T$R<G\<DA H I ZZ
DA'c$\DRT& $DAA)$\DRT
Junction of conductors or or
73$74$7"
73$74$7!
Connection of conductors
(node) 73$74$7)
Terminal
73$74$74
B
Terminal strip/block
) 4 3 " ) 4 3 "
73$74$73
Conductors
73$7)$7)
B;a3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North America
Shielding
74$7)$7/
73$73$7! 73$73$70
73$73$)
B;aX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North America
TT<h) $D@GDA)A\T
Variable capacitor
)7"$74$7)
B;aV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North America
Horn, claxon
7$)7$7!
R<h)T
B Manual operation, general use
74$)3$7)
Operated by pushing
74$)3$7!
Operated by pulling
74$)3$73
Operated by turning
74$)3$7"
Operated by key
74$)3$)3
B;a*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North America
Operated by motor
74$)3$40
Emergency switch
74$)3$7
Operated by electromagnetic
overcurrent protection
74$)3$4"
Operated by thermal
overcurrent protection
74$)3$4!
Electromagnetic operation
B
74$)3$43
Electromechanical operating or or 7
device, general symbol, relay
coil, general symbol 7/$)!$7) x device code letter
table, page 9-17
Operating device with special or or 7
features, general symbol
x device code letter
table, page 9-17
B;aB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North America
Electromechanical operating or or 7
device with On-delay
7/$)!$7 x device code letter
table, page 9-17
Electromechanical device with or or 7
Off-delay
7/$)!$7/ x device code letter
table, page 9-17
Electromechanical device with or or 7
On- and Off-delay
7/$)!$7( x device code letter
table, page 9-17
Electromechanical device of a
thermal relay or
7/$)!$4)
DA\$\T
N/O contact or or
B
7/$74$7) 7/$74$74
N/C contact or
7/$74$73
B;^m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North America
DA\RD? ')h<$)T
7/$7/$74
B;^E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North America
7/$)/$73
B;^a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North America
i<\$:7)R
x code letter
Three-pole
switch-disconnector
,&!*,'
Three-pole circuit-breaker
,&!*,
B;^^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North America
Autotransformer or or
70$7($7/
70$7($70
$:<A)T
Generator or
70$7"$7)
Three-phase asynchronous or
motor with squirrel-cage rotor
3
70$7$7)
Three-phase asynchronous
motor with slip-ring rotor
3
70$7$73
B;^5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North America
)@<$DA'c$\DR $D@GDA)A\T
Static input
Static output
)4$4/$7)
)4$4/$))
B;^3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North America
RS flip-flop
)
7
)4$"4$7)
7!$73$7(
B;^X
j@G?) D2 DR\: @)R<$A i<R<A7 T$:)@\<$ cT<A7 Tk@!D?T
;
; 0;;V ;
; ; ; ; 0;
M M M ; 0M
K K K ; 0K
, 0; , 0M
;
+ 0;
; 0; ; 0M ; 0;
; 0; ; ; 0;
; 0; ; 0; ; 0M
+ 0M ; 0M ;
M
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
M 0;
K
M 0; M 0M M 0M M 0; ; M
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
M 0;
M 0M K 0M M 0;MV
B;^V
B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
Circuit diagram examples using North American graphic symbols
<R)$\ @D\DR T\R\)RT& 2cT)?)TT i<\: $<R$c<\;!R)>)RT
DA\RD? $<R$c<\ with fuse
; ; ;
M M
M
K K
K
; ,
; M
; K M ,
; M
; M
; M
;; ;M ; M
;K ;,
;K ;,
; ,
; K M ,
; ,
; M
B;^*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\)T
B;^B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
North American classification for control circuit contact ratings
B;5m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
North American classification for control circuit contact ratings
Switching capacity
B;5E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
North American motor 2c?? ?D' $cRR)A\ ratings HI
c?? D' cRR)A\T& DR\: @)R<$A :R));:T) ?\)RA\<A7;cRR)A\ D\DRTEEI
B;5a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
North American environmental type ratings for electrical equipment
D@GR<TDA D2 DR\: @)R<$A A' Z )Ah<RDA@)A\? R\<A7T 2DR )?)$\R<$?
)Lc<G@)A\
IP ratings per IEC/EN standards cannot be agency, which is the preferred manner in
used as a substitute for North American which ratings are verified in North
Type ratings. :) R\<A7T T:DiA America.
R)GR)T)A\ RDc7: $D@GR<TDA DA?kJ A North American environmental type
precise conversion is not possible since ratings are referenced in the following
tests and evaluation criteria in the relevant standards:
standards differ greatly from one another.
NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code),
UL/CSA and NEMA type ratings are often CEC (Canadian Electrical Code),
used interchangeably. The significant UL 50E, UL 508A,
difference between the two is that a CSA-C22.2 No. 94-M91 (2006),
UL/CSA type rating represents third party
NEMA 250-2008 (National Electrical
certification by an approved testing
Manufacturers Association).
B;5^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
North American environmental type ratings for electrical equipment
B;55
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
North American environmental type ratings for electrical equipment
)R@T )R@AZA7?<T:%
General purpose: general purpose
tropfdicht: drip-tight
staubdicht: dust-tight
regendicht: rain-tight
regensicher: rain-proof
wettersicher: weather-proof
wasserdicht: water-tight
eintauchbar: submersible
eisbestndig: ice resistant
hagelbestndig: sleet resistant
korrosionsbestndig: corrosion
resistant
ldicht: oil-tight
B;53
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
North American conductor cross-sections
DAh)RT<DA D2 DR\: @)R<$A $!?) $RDTT T)$\<DAT <A\D @@a
ZA' cRDG)
@@a @@a
H)j$\I HA)R)T\ T\A'R' T<l)I
22 0.324 0.4
20 0.519 0.5
18 0.823 0.75
16 1.31 1.5
14 2.08
12 3.31 4
10 5.261 6
8 8.367 10
6 13.30 16
4 21.15 25
3 26.67
B 2 33.62 35
1 42.41
1/0 (0) 53.49 50
2/0 (00) 67.43 70
3/0 (000) 85.01
4/0 (0000) 107.2 95
B;5X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
jGDR\ \D DR?' R>)\T A' DR\: @)R<$
North American conductor cross-sections
ZA' cRDG)
B;5V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\)T
B;5*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
7)
DA'c$\DRT Em;5X
DR@c?) Em;35 Em
10
A\)RA\<DA? A<\ kT\)@ Em;3*
Em;E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Marking of electrical equipment
Em;a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Marking of electrical equipment
Em;^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Protective measures
RD\)$\<DA 7<AT\ )?)$\R<$? T:D$> \D Xm^X5;5;5EZ mEmm;5Em
This is divided into basic protection If basic, fault and additional protection is
(previously protection against direct combined in a suitable manner the
contact), fault protection (previously following protective measures result and
protection against indirect contact) and are covered in section 410 of DIN VDE 0100:
protection against both direct and indirect Automatic disconnection of the power
contact. supply (0100-411)
T<$ GRD\)$\<DA Double or reinforced insulation
These are all the measures for the (0100-412)
protection of personnel and working Protective separation (0100-413)
animals from dangers which may arise Safety extra low voltage SELV or PELV
from contact with live parts of electrical (0100-414)
equipment.
c?\ GRD\)$\<DA One of the key amendments to DIN VDE
This is the protection of personnel and
0100-410 of June 2007 was the additional
working animals from fault scenarios protection for final circuits for outdoor
which may arise from accidental contact areas and sockets (411.3.3). This stipulates
with components or extraneous that an additional protection must be
conductive parts.
provided by means of residual current
''<\<DA? GRD\)$\<DA devices (RCDs) with In 30 mA for
If basic or fault protection fails or there is sockets 20 A, as well as final current
a greater potential danger, residual circuits for portable equipment 32 A used
current protective devices with outdoors. The previous recommendation
Em
10 In 30 mA offer additional protection. has therefore been changed to a
Protection must be ensured by either a) the mandatory requirement in order to
equipment itself or b) the use of protective increase safety.
measures when erecting the installation or
c) a combination of a) and b).
Em;5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Protective measures
RD\)$\<DA 7<AT\ <A'<R)$\ $DA\$\ !k @)AT D2 '<T$DAA)$\<DA DR <A'<$\<DA
The conditions for disconnection are
determined by the type of system in use
and the protective device selected.
TkT\)@
A
T: Direct earthing of a point
] N: Chassis (of electrical equipment)
X
directly connected with the power
supply system earth
TkT\)@
A
T: Direct earthing of a point
] T: Direct electrical connection of chassis
X
to earth, independent of any existing
earthing of the power supply system
Em
10
TkT\)@
I: All live parts isolated from earth or one
A
] point connected to earth via a high
X
impedance
T: Direct electrical connection of chassis
to earth, independent of any existing
earthing of the power supply system
Em;3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Protective measures
RD\)$\<h) ')h<$)T A' $DA'<\<DAT 2DR '<T$DAA)$\<DA \D Xm^X5;5;5EZ
mEmm;5Em
Em;X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Protective measures
RD\)$\<h) ')h<$)T A' $DA'<\<DAT 2DR '<T$DAA)$\<DA \D Xm^X5;5;5EZ mEmm;
5Em
Em;V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Protective measures
RD\)$\<h) ')h<$)T A' $DA'<\<DAT 2DR '<T$DAA)$\<DA \D Xm^X5;5;5EZ
mEmm;5Em
kG) D2 TkT\)@
'<T\R<!c\<DA
TkT\)@
(special case)
Em;*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Protective measures
RD\)$\<h) ')h<$)T A' $DA'<\<DAT 2DR '<T$DAA)$\<DA \D
Xm^X5;5;5EZ mEmm;5Em
Em;B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Protective measures
RD\)$\<h) ')h<$)T A' $DA'<\<DAT 2DR '<T$DAA)$\<DA \D
Xm^X5;5;5EZ mEmm;5Em
Em;Em
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Protective measures
The protective device must automatically may there be a touch voltage or an
disconnect the faulty part of the effective duration greater than that
installation. At no part of the installation specified in the table below.
Max. permissible Max. permissible
disconnection time [s] disconnection time [s]
D\)%
A disconnection may be necessary for
different reasons than the protection from
electric shock.
Em;EE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
Cables and conductors must be protected circuit.
by means of overcurrent protective (in depth explanations on new DIN VDE
devices against excessive temperature 0100-430 contained in volume 143, 3rd
rises, which may result both from edition, of the VDE publication series).
operational overloading and from short-
h)R?D' GRD\)$\<DA
Overload protection involves the provision IB Anticipated operating current of the
of protective devices which will interrupt circuit
overload currents in the conductors of a IZ Current carrying capacity of conductor
circuit before they can cause temperature or cable
rises which may damage the conductor In Rated operational current of the
insulation, the terminals and connections protective device
or the area around the conductors.
For the protection of conductors against )@R>%
overload the following conditions must be DR '=cT\!?) GRD\)$\<h) ')h<$)T&
fulfilled (source: DIN VDE 0100-430) A $DRR)TGDA'T \D \:) h?c) T)\J
IB In IZ I2 The current which causes tripping of
I2 1.45 IZ the protective device under the
conditions specified in the equipment
regulations.
Em
10
KK"
C
<U
"K
AG-
KKf
U5<
*X
5<
0
_
g
KK"
C
<
U
5Uf
g
3KU"K5LU5 c8_"L
@( U3" CK@U"U5c" !"c5" ]
@K <U
<U KK"
K K" <U < _
_ _KK" <0
!
U" 0 C5
5C
UU5< K
L"
:DR\;$<R$c<\ GRD\)$\<DA
Short-circuit protection means providing 76 for PVC-insulated aluminum
protective devices which will interrupt conductors
short-circuit currents in the conductors of 141 for rubber-insulated copper
a circuit before they can cause a conductors
temperature rise which may damage the 93 for rubber-insulated aluminum
conductor insulation, the terminals and conductors
connections, or the area around the cables 115 for soft-solder connections in
and conductors. copper conductors
In general, the permissible disconnection Other values for k are given in Table
time t for short circuits of up to 5 s duration 43A of DIN VDE 0100-430. Em
10
can be specified approximately using the
following equation: With very short permissible disconnection
times (< 0.1 s) the product from the
S 2 equation k2 x S2 must be greater than the
t = ,+ k x ---31 or I2 x t = k2 x S2 I2 x t value of the current-limiting device
I
stated by manufacturer.
The meaning of the symbols is as follows: RRA7)@)A\ D2 GRD\)$\<h) ')h<$)T 2DR
t: Permissible disconnection time in the GRD\)$\<DA <A \:) )h)A\ D2 T:DR\;$<R$c<\J
event of short-circuit in s Protective devices for protection in the
S: Conductor cross-section in mm2 event of a short-circuit must be fitted at the
I: r.m.s. value of the current with a start of every circuit and at every point at
maximum short-circuit in A which the short-circuit current-carrying
k: Constants with the values capacity is reduced unless a protective
115 for PVC-insulated copper device fitted upstream can ensure the
conductors necessary protection in the event of a short
circuit.
Em;E^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
D\)% circuit could prove hazardous. In these
Reasons for the reduction in the short- cases two requirements must be fulfilled:
circuit current-carrying capacity can be: The cable must be laid so that the risk of
Reduction of the conductor cross-section, short-circuits is reduced to a minimum.
other conductor insulation. The cable must not be laid in the vicinity
Short-circuit protection must not be of flammable materials.
provided where an interruption of the
Em;E5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
2.In installations without a directly earthed
neutral point H TkT\)@I
Where it is necessary for the neutral
conductor to be included, an overcurrent
monitoring device must be provided in the
neutral conductor of each circuit, to cause
disconnection of all live conductors in the
relevant circuit (including the neutral
conductor).
The overcurrent monitoring device may
however be omitted where the neutral
conductor in question is protected against
short-circuit by an upstream protective
device, such as in the incoming unit of the
installation.
<T$DAA)$\<DA D2 \:) A)c\R? $DA'c$\DR
Where disconnection of the neutral
conductor is specified, the protective
device used must be designed in such a
way that the neutral conductor cannot
under any circumstances be disconnected
before the phase conductors and
reconnected again after them. 4-pole NZM
circuit-breakers always meet these Em
10
conditions.
Em;E3
10
Em
Em;EX
cRR)A\ $RRk<A7 $G$<\k A' GRD\)$\<DA D2 $!?)T A' $DA'c$\DRT i<\:
<ATc?\<DA \D maB*;5& \ a3 ( @!<)A\ <R \)@G)R\cR)
Type of cable or NYM, NYBUY, NHYRUZY, NYIF, NYY, NYCWY, NYKY, NYM,
conductor H07V-U, H07V-R, H07V-K, NYIFY NYMZ, NYMT, NYBUY,
NHYRUZY
Type of A1 b1 m2 C E
installation In heat-insulating In cable conduits On a wall Exposed
walls, in cable conduit
under the surface Single-core Multi-core cable
cables
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
! !
2 hGX ! 2 hGX !
Multi-core cable Cable cores in Multi-core cable in Single or multi-core Multi-core cables or
under the surface cable conduit cable conduit on the cables or insulated insulated cables with a
on the wall wall surface cables
minimum clearance of
0.3 x diameter d to wall
Number of 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
temperature.
DA\<Ac)'
Type of A1 b1 m2 C E
installation
Number of 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
cores
Copper
conductor
cross- Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In
section in
mm2
1.5 16.5 16 14.5 13 18.5 16 16.5 16 17.5 16 16 13 21 20 18.5 16 23 20 19.5 16
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
2.5 21 20 19.5 16 25 25 22 20 24 20 21 20 29 25 25 25 32 32 27 25
4 28 25 25 25 34 32 30 25 32 25 29 25 38 35 34 32 42 40 36 35
6 36 35 33 32 43 40 38 35 40 35 36 35 49 40 43 40 54 50 46 40
10 49 40 45 40 60 50 53 50 55 50 49 50 67 63 60 63 74 63 64 63
16 65 63 59 50 81 80 72 63 73 63 66 63 90 80 81 80 100 100 85 80
25 85 80 77 63 107 100 94 80 95 80 85 80 119 100 102 100 126 125 107 100
35 105 100 94 80 133 125 117 100 118 100 105 100 146 125 126 125 157 125 134 125
50 126 125 114 100 160 160 142 125 141 125 125 125 178 160 153 125 191 160 162 160
Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
70 160 160 144 125 204 200 181 160 178 160 158 125 226 224 195 160 246 224 208 200
95 193 160 174 160 246 224 219 200 213 200 190 160 273 250 236 224 299 250 252 250
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
120 223 200 199 160 285 250 253 250 246 224 218 200 317 315 275 250 348 315 293 250
For overcurrent protective devices with a rated operational current In that does not conform to the values given in the table, select the next lower
available rated operational current value.
Em;EV
Em
10
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
<A<@c@ $RDTT;T)$\<DAT 2DR GRD\)$\<h) $DA'c$\DRT \D mEmm;35m
Em;E*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
DAh)RT<DA 2$\DRT
When the ambient temperature is not 30 C; of wiring or cables in air to VDE 0298-4
to be used for the current carrying capacity Table 17.
Insulation material1) NR/SR PVC EPR
Permissible operating 60 C 70 C 80 C
temperature
Ambient air temperature C Conversion factors
10 1.29 1.22 1.18
15 1.22 1.17 1.14
20 1.15 1.12 1.10
25 1.08 1.06 1.05
30 1.00 1.00 1.00
35 0.91 0.94 0.95
40 0.82 0.87 0.89
45 0.71 0.79 0.84
50 0.58 0.71 0.77
55 0.41 0.61 0.71
60 0.50 0.63
65 0.35 0.55 Em
10
70 0.45
75 0.32
Em;EB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
DAh)RT<DA 2$\DRT \D maB*;5& !?) aE
Grouping of several circuits
RRA7)@)A\ c@!)R D2 $<R$c<\T
1 2 3 4 6 9 12 16 20
1 Embedded or 1.00 0.80 0.70 0.65 0.57 0.50 0.45 0.41 0.38
enclosed
2 Fixed to walls or 1.00 0.85 0.79 0.75 0.72 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70
floors
3 Fixed under 0.95 0.81 0.72 0.68 0.64 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61
ceilings
Em
10
Em;am
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Electrical equipment of machines
j\R$\ 2RD@ Xmam5;E H mEE^;EI
This standard is used for the electrical current of the largest motor in the machine
equipment of machines, unless there is a and the total current drawn by all the other
product standard (Type C) for the type of loads in normal operation.
machine to be equipped. Its Off position must be lockable and must
Safety requirements regarding the not be indicated until the specified
protection of personnel, machines and clearances and creepage distances
material according to the European between all contacts have been achieved.
Machinery Safety Directive are highlighted It must have only one On and one Off
under the heading Safety of machines. position with associated stops. Star-delta,
The degree of possible danger is to be reversing and multi-speed switches are
estimated by risk assessment. The not permissible for use as mains isolating
standard also includes requirements for devices.
equipment, engineering and construction, The tripped position of circuit-breakers is
as well as tests to ensure faultless function not regarded as a switch position,
and the effectiveness of protective therefore there is no restriction on their
measures. The following paragraphs are use as mains isolating devices.
an extract from the standard.
Where there are several incomers, each
one must have a mains isolating device.
<AT <TD?\<A7 ')h<$) H@<A Ti<\$:)TI Mutual interlocking must be provided
Every machine must be equipped with a where a hazard may result from only one
manually-operated mains isolating device. mains isolating device being switched off.
It must be possible to isolate the entire Only circuit-breakers may be used as
electrical equipment of the machine from remotely-operated switches. They must be Em
10
the mains using the mains isolating device. provided with an additional handle and be
The breaking capacity must be sufficient to lockable in the Off position.
simultaneously disconnect the stalled
RD\)$\<DA D2 )Lc<G@)A\
RD\)$\<DA <A \:) )h)A\ D2 GDi)R 2<?cR) This difficulty can be avoided by using
When the power returns following a failure circuit-breakers, with the added benefits of
in the supply, machines or parts of all-pole disconnection, rapid operational
machines must not start automatically readiness and prevention of single-
where this would result in a dangerous phasing.
situation or damage to property. With
h)R?D' GRD\)$\<DA D2 @D\DRT
contactor controls this requirement can
Continuously operating motors above
easily be met via self-maintaining circuits.
0.5 kW must be protected against overload.
For circuits with two-wire control, an Overload protection is recommended for
additional contactor relay with three-wire all other motors. Motors which are
Em
10 control in the input wiring to the actuating frequently starting and braking are difficult
circuit can carry out this function. Mains to protect and often require a special
isolating devices and motor-protective protective device. Built-in thermal sensors
circuit-breakers with undervoltage are particularly suitable for motors with
releases also reliably prevent automatic restricted cooling. In addition, the fitting of
restarting on return of voltage. overload relays is always recommended,
h)R$cRR)A\ GRD\)$\<DA particularly as protection in the event of a
No overcurrent protective device is stalled rotor.
normally required for the mains supply
cable. Overcurrent protection is provided
by the protective device at the head of the
input wiring. All other circuits must be
protected by means of fuses or circuit-
breakers.
The stipulation for fuses is that
replacement must be freely obtainable in
the country in which the fuses are used.
Em;aa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Electrical equipment of machines
DA\RD? 2cA$\<DAT <A \:) )h)A\ D2 2c?\
A fault in the electrical equipment must not device has been actuated, it must only be
result in a dangerous situation or in possible to restart the machine after local
damage. Suitable measures must be taken resetting. Resetting alone must not allow
to prevent danger from arising. The restarting.
expense of using appropriate measures Furthermore, the following apply for both
can be extremely high if applied generally. emergency-stop switch and emergency
To permit a better assessment of the switching off control circuit device:
magnitude of the risk in conjunction with
The handle must be red with a yellow
the respective application, the standard
background
DIN EN ISO 13849-1 has been published:
Emergency switching off devices must
Safety-related parts of control systems
be quickly and easily accessible in the
Part 1: General rules for design.
event of danger
The use of risk assessment to DIN EN ISO The emergency switching off function
13849-1 is dealt with in the Eaton safety must take precedence over all other
manual Safety Technology for Machines functions and operations
and Systems (Order No. PU05907001Z). It must be possible to determine
@)R7)A$k Ti<\$:<A7 D22 ')h<$) functional capability by means of tests,
Every machine which could potentially especially in severe environmental
cause danger must be equipped with an conditions.
emergency switching off device which, in a Where there is separation into several
main circuit may be an emergency Emergency-Stop areas, it must be clearly
switching off switch, and in a control discernible to which area an Emergency-
circuit an emergency switching off control Stop device applies Em
10
circuit device.
@)R7)A$k DG)R\<DAT
Actuation of the Emergency-Stop device It is not clear however from the term
must result in all current loads which could emergency switching off which functions
directly result in danger, being are carried out with this. In order to be able
disconnected by de-energization via to give a more precise definition here,
another device or circuit, i.e. DIN EN 60204-1 describes two specific
electromechanical devices such as functions:
contactors, contactor relays or the
1. Devices for emergency stop
undervoltage release of the mains isolating
This involves the possibility of stopping
device.
hazardous motion as quickly as possible.
For direct manual operation, emergency
2. Devices for emergency switching off
switching off control circuit devices must
Where there is a risk of an electric shock
have a mushroom-head push-button and
by direct contact, e.g. with live parts in
positively opening contacts. Once the
electrical operating areas, then an
emergency switching off control circuit
Emergency-Off device shall be provided.
Em;a^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Electrical equipment of machines
D?DRT D2 GcT:!c\\DAT A' \:)<R @)A<A7T
to DIN EN 60073; VDE 0199
DIN EN 60204-1; VDE 0113-1, Table 2
D?DR )A<A7 kG<$? GG?<$\<DA
GREY Start/ON
Stop/OFF
BLACK Start/ON
Stop/Off (preferred)
Em
10
Em;a5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Electrical equipment of machines
D?DRT D2 <A'<$\DR ?<7:\T A' \:)<R @)A<A7T
to DIN EN 60073; VDE 0199
DIN EN 60204-1; VDE 0113-1, Table 4
D?DR )A<A7 )T$R<G\<DA kG<$? GG?<$\<DA
RED Emergency Warning of potential Failure of pressure in the
danger or a situation lubricating system
Temperature outside
which requires immediate specified (safe) limits
action Essential equipment stopped
by action of a protective
device
YELLOW Abnormal Impending critical Temperature
condition condition (or pressure) different from
normal level
Overload, which is
permissible for a limited time
BLUE Enforced Operator action essential Remove obstacle
action Switch over to Advance
Em;a3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Electrical equipment of machines
2)\k;R)?\)' $:R$\)R<T\<$ h?c)T \D E^*5B;E A' XamXE
A safety-related system can consist of one use of characteristic values provided by
or several components. The assessment of the component manufacturer.
the safety-related parts of a control system Eaton provides the characteristic values of
to EN ISO 13849-1 and IEC 62061 require the all safety-related components in the area
of safety technology.
)?<!<?<\k h?c)T \D E^*5B;E
Em;aX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Measures for risk reduction
<T> R)'c$\<DA <A \:) 2c?\ T$)AR<D
A fault in the electrical equipment must not damage. Suitable measures must be taken
result in a dangerous situation or in to prevent danger from arising.
7) )
4
7
)
74
Em
10
All switching functions on the non- Chassis earth connection of the
earthed side actuating circuit for operational
Use of break devices with positively purposes (not used as a protective
opening contacts (not to be confused measure)
with interlocked opposing contacts)
)'cA'A$k
Shut-down by de-excitation (fail-safe in
This means the existence of an additional
the event of wire breakage)
device or system which takes over the
Circuit engineering measures which
function in the fault scenario.
make undesirable operating states in
the fault scenario unlikely (in this
instance, simultaneous interruption via
contactor and position switch)
Switching of all live conductors to the
device to be controlled
Em;aV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Measures for risk reduction
<h)RT<\k
The construction of control circuits
according to a range of function principles
or using various types of device.
D3
DD
3C
3
3&
3
D
Em
10
Em;a*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Protection types for electrical equipment
RD\)$\<DA \kG)T 2DR )?)$\R<$? )Lc<G@)A\ !k )A$?DTcR)T& $Dh)RT A' T<@<?R \D
Xm3aBU m5Vm;E
The designation to indicate degrees of degree of protection of persons against
enclosure protection consists of the contact with live parts and of equipment
characteristic letters (Ingress against ingress of solid foreign bodies and
Protection) followed by two characteristic dust, the second numeral the degree of
numerals. The first numeral indicates the protection against the ingress of water.
Em;aB
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Protection types for electrical equipment
RD\)$\<DA 7<AT\ $DA\$\ A' 2DR)<7A !D'<)T
Dust-tight
Characteristic letter
First numeral
Second numeral
Em;^m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Protection types for electrical equipment
RD\)$\<DA 7<AT\ i\)R
Em;^E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Protection types for electrical equipment
Em
10
Em;^a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\)T
Em
10
Em;^^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Utilization categories for switching elements
D XmB5V;3;E H mXXm;amm& !?) EI
Em
10 I U
Ie Ue
Em;^5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Utilization categories for switching elements
0.9 1 1 0.9
1 ms 1 1 1 ms
Em;^3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Utilization categories for contactors and motor starters
D XmB5V;5;E H mXXm;Ema& !?) EI
Em;^X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Utilization categories for contactors and motor starters
Em
10
1.5 1.05 0.8 1.5 1.05 0.8
Em;^V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Utilization categories for contactors and motor starters
D XmB5V;5;E H mXXm;Ema& !?) EI
Em;^*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Utilization categories for contactors and motor starters
4) Devices for utilization category AC-3 may be used for occasional inching or plugging
during a limited period such as for setting up a machine; during this limited time
period, the number of operations must not exceed a total of five per minute or more
than ten in a ten minute period.
5) Hermetically enclosed refrigerant compressor motor means a combination of a Em
10
compressor and a motor both of which are housed in the same enclosure with no
external shaft or shaft seals, the motor running in the coolant.
Em;^B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Utilization categories for switch-disconnectors
DR Ti<\$:)T& Ti<\$:;'<T$DAA)$\DRT A' 2cT);$D@!<A\<DA cA<\T \D
XmB5V;^ H mXXm;EmV& !?) aI
Em
10 DC DC-20 A(B)1) Making and breaking without load
current
DC-21 A(B)1) Switching resistive loads including low overloads
Em;5m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Utilization categories for switch-disconnectors
All 1) 1) 1) 1)
values
All 1.5 1.05 0.95 1.5 1.05 0.95
values
All 3 1.05 0.65 3 1.05 0.65
values
Ie 100 10 1.05 0.45 8 1.05 0.45
Ie > 100 10 1.05 0.35 8 1.05 0.35
Ie I U L/R Ic Ur L/R
Ie Ue [ms] Ie Ue [ms]
[A]
All 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
Em
10
values
All 1.5 1.05 1 1.5 1.05 1
values
All 4 1.05 2.5 4 1.05 2.5
values
All 4 1.05 15 4 1.05 15
values
Em;5E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\)T
Em
10
Em;5a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Rated motor currents
\)' @D\DR $cRR)A\T 2DR \:R));G:T) @D\DRT
HR)$D@@)A')' h?c) 2DR TLc<RR)? $7) @D\DRTI
<A<@c@ 2cT) T<l) 2DR T:DR\;$<R$c<\ Rated fuse currents for 8/ starting also
GRD\)$\<DA D2 \:R));G:T) @D\DRT apply to three-phase motors with slip-ring
The maximum value is determined by the rotors.
switching device or overload relay. For higher rated currents, starting currents
The rated motor currents are for standard and/or longer starting times, larger fuses
1500 r.p.m. three-phase motors with normal will be required.
inner and outer surface cooling. This table applies to slow or gL fuses
D.O.L. starting: Maximum starting (VDE 0636).
current: 6 x rated motor A \:) $T) D2
2cT)T i<\:
current, maximum $:R$\)R<T\<$T& 2cT)T R) \D !) T)?)$\)'
starting time: 5 sec. $$DR'<A7 \D \:)<R R\)' DG)R\<DA?
8/ starting: Maximum starting $cRR)A\J
current: 2 x rated motor
current, maximum
starting time: 15 sec.
Motor overload relay in
phase current: set to
0.58 x rated motor
current.
Em
10
Em;5^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Rated motor currents
kW cos [%] A A A A A A
0.06 0.7 58 0.37 2 0.21 2
0.09 0.7 60 0.54 2 0.31 2
0.12 0.7 60 0.72 4 2 0.41 2
0.18 0.7 62 1.04 4 2 0.6 2
0.25 0.7 62 1.4 4 2 0.8 4 2
0.37 0.72 66 2 6 4 1.1 4 2
0.55 0.75 69 2.7 10 4 1.5 4 2
0.75 0.79 74 3.2 10 4 1.9 6 4
1.1 0.81 74 4.6 10 6 2.6 6 4
1.5 0.81 74 6.3 16 10 3.6 6 4
2.2 0.81 78 8.7 20 10 5 10 6
3 0.82 80 11.5 25 16 6.6 16 10
4 0.82 83 14.8 32 16 8.5 20 10
5.5 0.82 86 19.6 32 25 11.3 25 16
7.5 0.82 87 26.4 50 32 15.2 32 16
11 0.84 87 38 80 40 21.7 40 25
15 0.84 88 51 100 63 29.3 63 32
18.5 0.84 88 63 125 80 36 63 40
Em
10 22
30
0.84
0.85
92
92
71
96
125
200
80
100
41
55
80
100
50
63
37 0.86 92 117 200 125 68 125 80
45 0.86 93 141 250 160 81 160 100
55 0.86 93 173 250 200 99 200 125
75 0.86 94 233 315 250 134 200 160
90 0.86 94 279 400 315 161 250 200
110 0.86 94 342 500 400 196 315 200
132 0.87 95 401 630 500 231 400 250
160 0.87 95 486 630 630 279 400 315
200 0.87 95 607 800 630 349 500 400
250 0.87 95 437 630 500
315 0.87 96 544 800 630
400 0.88 96 683 1000 800
450 0.88 96 769 1000 800
500 0.88 97
560 0.88 97
630 0.88 97
Em;55
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Rated motor currents
A A A A A A A A A
0.19 2 0.17 2 0.12 2
0.28 2 0.25 2 0.18 2
0.37 2 0.33 2 0.24 2
0.54 2 0.48 2 0.35 2
0.76 2 0.7 2 0.5 2
1 4 2 0.9 2 2 0.7 2
1.4 4 2 1.2 4 2 0.9 4 2
1.7 4 2 1.5 4 2 1.1 4 2
2.4 4 2 2.1 6 4 1.5 4 2
3.3 6 4 2.9 6 4 2.1 6 4
4.6 10 6 4 10 4 2.9 10 4
6 16 10 5.3 16 6 3.8 10 4
7.7 16 10 6.8 16 10 4.9 16 6
10.2 20 10 9 20 16 6.5 16 10
13.8 25 16 12.1 25 16 8.8 20 10
19.8 32 25 17.4 32 20 12.6 25 16
26.6 50 32 23.4 50 25 17 32 20
32.8 63 32 28.9 50 32 20.9 32 25
37
50
80
100
40
63
33
44
63
80
32
50
23.8
32
50
63
25
32
Em
10
61 125 80 54 100 63 39 80 50
74 125 100 65 125 80 47 80 63
90 125 100 79 160 80 58 100 63
122 160 125 107 200 125 78 160 100
146 200 160 129 200 160 93 160 100
179 250 200 157 250 160 114 200 125
210 250 250 184 250 200 134 250 160
254 315 250 224 315 250 162 250 200
318 400 315 279 400 315 202 315 250
397 630 400 349 500 400 253 400 315
495 630 630 436 630 500 316 500 400
621 800 800 547 800 630 396 630 400
699 800 800 615 800 630 446 630 630
491 630 630
550 800 630
618 800 630
Em;53
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Conductors
<R<A7 A' $!?) )A\R<)T i<\: 7RD@@)\T
Cable entry into closed devices is !?) 7RD@@)\T
considerably simplified and improved by For direct and quick cable entry into an
using cable grommets. enclosure and as a plug.
)@!RA) !?)
D?) !?) DR cT) i<\: !?)
7RD@@)\T )A\Rk '<@)\)R )j\)RA? Z $!?)T& 7RD@@)\
@)\R<$ '<@)\)R 5;$DR) GR\ ADJ
@@ @@ @@a
M16 16.5 19 H03VV-F3 x 0.75 KT-M16
NYM 1 x 16/3 x 1.5
M20 20.5 1 13 H03VV-F3 x 0.75 KT-M20
NYM 5 x 1.5/5 x 2.5
M25 25.5 1 18 H03VV-F3 x 0.75 KT-M25
IP66 with NYM 4x 10
built-in
push- M32 32.5 1 25 H03VV-F3 x 0.75 KT-M32
through NYM 4 x 16/5 x 10
membrane
PE and
thermo-
plastic
elastomer,
halogen
free
Em
10 Detailed information on material properties
Table, page 10-48.
Em;5X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Conductors
<R<A7 A' $!?) )A\R<)T i<\: $!?) 7?A'T
)\R<$ $!?) 7?A'T \D 3maXaU mXEB
with 9, 10, 12, 14 or 15 mm long thread.
Ventilation cable
glands IP69K
1) Not in compliance with DIN EN 50262.
Em;5V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Conductors
\)R<? GRDG)R\<)T
;- ;-
Em
10 Flammability to UL94 V2
Em;5*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Conductors
j\)RA? '<@)\)R D2 $DA'c$\DRT A' $!?)T
c@!)R D2 GGRDj<@\) )j\)RA? '<@)\)R H@)A h?c) D2 hR<DcT @>)TI
$DA'c$\DRT
m3
mV
; ;
Cross section mm mm mm mm mm
mm2 max. max. max.
2 x 1.5 10 11 9 10 12
2 x 2.5 11 13 13 11 14
3 x 1.5 10 12 10 10 13
3 x 2.5 11 13 11 12 14
3 x 4 13 17 14 15
3 x 6 15 18 16 16
3 x 10 18 20 23 18
3 x 16 20 22 25 22
4 x 1.5 11 13 9 11 13
4 x 2.5 12 14 11 13 15
4 x 4 14 16 15 16
4 x 6 16 17 17 18
4 x 10 18 19 23 21
4 x 16 22 23 27 24
4 x 25 27 27 32 30
4 x 35 30 28 36 31
4 x 50 30 42 34
4 x 70 34 47 38
4 x 95 39 53 43
4 x 120 42 46
4
4
x 150
x 185
47
55
52
60
Em
10
4 x 240 62 70
5 x 1.5 11 14 12 14 15
5 x 2.5 13 15 14 17 17
5 x 4 15 17 19 18
5 x 6 17 19 21 20
5 x 10 20 21 26
5 x 16 25 23 30
8 x 1.5 15
10 x 1.5 18
16 x 1.5 20
24 x 1.5 25
Em;5B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Conductors
!?)T A' i<R<A7& \kG) !!R)h<\<DA
)T<7A\<DA D2 TG)$<2<$\<DA
Harmonized specification H
Recognized national type A
\)' DG)R\<DA? hD?\7) Z
300/300V 03
300/500 V 05
450/750V 07
ATc?\<A7 @\)R<?
PVC V
Natural- and/or synthetic rubber R
Silicon rubber S
:)\:<A7 @\)R<?
PVC V
Natural- and/or synthetic rubber R
Polychloroprene rubber N
Fibre-glass braid J
Textile braid T
G)$<? $DAT\Rc$\<DA 2)\cR)
Flat, separable conductor H
Flat, non-separable conductor H2
Em
10 kG) D2 $DA'c$\DR
solid -U
stranded -R
Flexible with cables for fixed installation -K
Flexible with flexible cables -F
Highly flexible with flexible cables -H
Tinsel cord -Y
c@!)R D2 $DR)T ...
RD\)$\<h) $DA'c$\DR
Without protective conductors X
With protective conductors G
\)' $DA'c$\DR $RDTT;T)$\<DA ...
Em;3m
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
D\)T
Em
10
Em;3E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Conductors
\)' DG)R\<DA? $cRR)A\T A' T:DR\;$<R$c<\ $cRR)A\T 2DR T\A'R' \RAT2DR@)RT
Em;3a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Conductors
XBmZ5mm
4% 6% 4% 6%
Em;3^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Formulae
:@QT i
U = I ( R $V" U
I = --- $ A "
U
R = --- $ . "
R I
)T<T\A$) D2 G<)$) D2 i<R)
l Copper: m
R = ------------- $ . " % = 57 ---------------2
%(A .mm
l = Length of conductor [m] Aluminum: m
% = 33 ---------------2
.mm
= Conductivity [m/mm2] Iron: m
% = 8,3 ---------------2
.mm
A = Conductor cross section Zinc: m
% = 15,5 ---------------2
[mm2] .mm
)T<T\A$)T
Transformer XL = 2 ( 0 ( f ( L $ . "
Capacitors 1
X C = ----------------------------- $ . "
2(0(f(C
Impedance R
Z =
2
R + ' XL XC &
2
Z = ------------ $ . "
cos
Em
10 L = Inductance [H] f = Frequency [Hz]
C = Capacitance [F] = Phase angle
XL = Inductive impedance []
XC = Capacitive impedance []
R??)? $DAA)$\<DA D2 R)T<T\A$)T
With 2 parallel resistances: With 3 parallel resistances:
R1 ( R2 R1 ( R2 ( R3
- $."
R g = ---------------- - $."
R g = ---------------------------------------------------------------
R1 + R2 R1 ( R2 + R2 ( R3 + R1 ( R3
--1- = ----
1- + ----
1- + ----
1- + ... $ 1 2 . " --1- = ----
1- + ----
1- + ----
1- + ... $ 1 2 . "
R R1 R2 R3 Z Z1 Z2 Z3
1 1 1 1
--- = ----- + ----- + ----- + ... $ 1 2 . "
X X1 X2 X3
Em;35
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Formulae
?)$\R<$ GDi)R
supports [cm]
= Distance between
conductors [cm]
Em;33
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Formulae
D?\7) 'RDG
Known current
2(l(l 2 2(l(l 2 l(l 2
A = ----------------- $ mm " A = ----------------- ( cos- $ mm " A = 3 ( ----------------- ( cos - $ mm "
( )U ( )U ( )U
Em
10 Di)R ?DTT
DC current Single-phase AC
2(l(P(P 2(l(P(P
P loss = --------------------------------- $ W " P loss = ----------------------------------------------------------------------- $ W "
(A(U(U ( A ( U ( U ( cos
( cos
Alternating current
l(P(P
P loss = ----------------------------------------------------------------------- $ W "
( A ( U ( U ( cos
( cos
Em;3X
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
Formulae
Di)R D2 )?)$\R<$ @D\DRT
Single- P 1 = U ( l ( cos
( $ W " P1
- $A"
l = -------------------------------
phase AC U ( cos
(
Em;3V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
International Unit System
A\)RA\<DA? A<\ kT\)@ HI
DAh)RT<DA 2$\DRT
<l) ?' cA<\ cA<\ )j$\ GGRDj<@\)
Em
10 Force 1 kp
1 dyn
9.80665 N
110-5 N
10 N
110-5 N
Momentum of 1 mkp 9.80665 Nm 10 Nm
force
Pressure 1 at 0.980665 bar 1 bar
1 Atm = 760 Torr 1.01325 bar 1.01 bar
1 Torr 1.3332 mbar 1.33 bar
1 mWS 0.0980665 bar 0.1 bar
1 mmWS 0.0980665 mbar 0.1 mbar
1 mmWS 9.80665 Pa 10 Pa
Tension kp N N
1 ----------2 9.80665 ----------2 10 ----------2
mm mm mm
Energy 1 mkp 9.80665 J 10 J
1 kcal 4.1868 kJ 4.2 kJ
1 erg 110-7 J 110-7 J
Em;3*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
International Unit System
DAh)RT<DA 2$\DRT
<l) ?' cA<\ cA<\ )j$\ GGRDj<@\)
Power kcal kJ kJ
1 ---------- 4.1868 ----- 4.2 -----
h h h
kcal W W
1 --------------
2
- 1.163 ---------
2
- 1.16 ---------
2
-
m hC m K m K
1 Poise Ns Ns
0.1 ------2 0,1 -----2-
m m
1 Poise 0.1 Pa # s
Kinetic viscosity 1 Stokes 4 m
2
4 m
2
1 # 10 ------ 1 # 10 ------
s s
Em
10
Angle (flat) 1 1- 2/ 78 # 10 pla
3
------- pla
360
1 gon 1 2/ 5 # 10 pla
3
-------- pla
400
1 0- 17/ 5 # 10 rad
3
------- rad
180
57,296 1 rad
63,662 gon 1 rad
Em;3B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
International Unit System
DAh)RT<DA D2 cA<\T
Size SI units Symbol Basic Conversion of SI units
name unit
Force Newton N kg # m
1 # -------------
2
-
s
Force Newton Nm kg # m
2
Electric Coulomb C 1 A s
charge
Em;Xm
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
International Unit System
DAh)RT<DA D2 cA<\T
Size SI units Symbol Basic Conversion of SI units
name unit
Capacity Farad F s #A
4
C s#A
2
1 # ----------------2 1 F = 1 # --- = 1 # ------------
kg # m V W
Electrical V kg # m V W
---- 1 # -------------
- 1 ---- = 1 # ------------
field m 3
s #A m A#m
Flux Weber Wb kg # m
2 W#s
1 # ---------------
- 1 W b = 1 # V # s = 1 # ------------
2 A
s #A
Flux density Tesla T kg W V#s W#s
1 # ------------
2 1 T = ------2b- = 1 # ---------- = 1 # -----------
-
s #A m m
2
m A
2
Reactor Henry H kg # m
2 W V#s W # s-
1 # ---------------
- 1 H = ------b- = 1 # ---------- = 1 # -----------
2
2
s #A
2 A A A
Em;XE
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
International Unit System
:kT<$? cA<\T
Obsolete units
)$:A<$? 2DR$)
SI unit: N (Newton)
J/m (Joule/m)
Previous unit: kp (kilopond)
dyn (Dyn)
1N = 1 J/m = 1 kg m/s2 = 0.102 kp = 105 dyn
1 J/m =1N = 1 kg m/s2 = 0.102 kp = 105 dyn
1 kg m/s2 =1N = 1 J/m = 0.102 kp = 105 dyn
1 kp = 9.81 N = 9.81 J/m = 9.81 kg m/s2 = 0.981 106 dyn
1 dyn = 105 N = 105 J/m = 105 kg m/s2 = 1.02 105 kp
R)TTcR)
SI unit: Pa (Pascal) bar
(Bar)
Previous unit: at = kp/cm2 = 10 m Ws
Torr = mm Hg
Em
10 atm
1 Pa = 1 N/m2 = 105 bar
1 Pa = 105 bar = 10.2 106 at = 9.87 106 at = 7.5 103 Torr
1 bar = 105 Pa = 1.02 at = 0.987 at = 750 Torr
1 at = 98.1 103 Pa = 0.981 bar = 0.968 at = 736 Torr
1 atm = 101.3 103 Pa = 1.013 bar = 1.033 at = 760 Torr
1 Torr = 133.3 Pa = 1.333 103 bar = 1.359 103 at = 1.316 103 atm
Em;Xa
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
International Unit System
DR>
SI unit: J (Joule)
Nm (Newtonmeter)
SI unit: Ws (Wattsecond)
(as before) kWh (Kilowatthour)
Previous unit: kcal (Kilocalorie) = cal 103
1 Ws =1J = 1 Nm 107 erg
1 Ws = 278 109 kWh = 1 Nm =1J = 0.102 kpm = 0.239 cal
1 kWh = 3.6 106 Ws = 3.6 106 Nm = 3.6 106 J = 367 106 kpm = 860 kcal
1 Nm = 1 Ws = 278 109 kWh =1J = 0.102 kpm = 0.239 cal
1J = 1 Ws = 278 109 kWh = 1 Nm = 0.102 kpm = 0.239 cal
1 kpm = 9.81 Ws = 272 106 kWh = 9.81 Nm = 9.81 J = 2.34 cal
1 kcal = 4.19 103 Ws = 1.16 103 kWh = 4.19 103 Nm = 4.19 103 J = 427 kpm
Di)R
SI unit: Nm/s (Newtonmeter/s)
J/s (Joule/s)
SI unit: W (Watt)
(as before) kW (Kilowatt)
Previous unit: kcal/s (Kilocalorie/sec.) = cal/s 103
kcal/h (Kilocalorie/hour.) = cal/h 106
Em
10
kpm/s (Kilopondmeter/Sec.)
PS (metric horsepower)
1W = 1 J/s = 1 Nm/s
1W = 103 kW = 0.102 kpm/s = 1.36 103 PS = 860 cal/h = 0.239 cal/s
1 kW = 103 W = 102 kpm/s = 1.36 PS = 860 103 cal/h = 239 cal/s
1 kpm/s = 9.81 W = 9.81 103 kW = 13.3 103 PS = 8.43 103 cal/h = 2.34 cal/s
1 PS = 736 W = 0.736 kW = 75 kpm/s = 632 103 cal/h = 176 cal/s
1 kcal/h = 1.16 W = 1.16 103 kW = 119 103 kpm/s = 1.58 103 PS = 277.8 103 cal/s
1 cal/s = 4.19 W = 4.19 103 kW = 0.427 kpm/s = 5.69 103 PS = 3.6 kcal/h
Em;X^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
International Unit System
7A)\<$ 2<)?' T\R)A7\:
SI unit:
kA A = 12.56 Oe
1 ------ = 1000 ----
m m
1 Oe A kA
= 79.6 ---- = 0.0796 ------
m m
7A)\<$ 2?cj
SI unit: Wb (Weber)
Wb (Microweber)
Previous unit: M = Maxwell
1 Wb =1 Tm2
1 Wb = 106 Wb = 108 M
1 Wb = 106 Wb = 100 M
Em
10 1M = 108 Wb = 0.01 Wb
Em;X5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
International Unit System
DAh)RT<DA D2 @G)R<?Z@)R<$A cA<\T <A\D cA<\T
Em;X3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
\A'R'T& 2DR@c?)& \!?)T
International Unit System
DAh)RT<DA D2 @G)R<?Z@)R<$A cA<\T <A\D cA<\T
Length 1 cm 1m 1m 1 km 1 km
0.3937 in 3.2808 ft 1.0936 yd 0.6214 mile 0.5399 mile
(land mile) (sea mile)
Weight 1g 1 kg 1 kg 1t 1t
15.43 grain 35.27 ounce 2.2046 lb. 0.9842 long 1.1023 short
ton ton
Area 1cm2 1 m2 1 m2 1 m2 1 km2
0.155 sq.in 10.7639 sq.ft 1.196 sq.yd 0.2471 103 0.3861
acre sq.mile
Volume 1cm3 1l 1 m3 1 m3 1 m3
0.06102 0.03531 cu.ft 1.308 cu.yd 264.2 gal 219.97 gal
cu.in (US) (UK)
Force 1N 1N 1N 1N
0.2248 lb 0.1003 103 long 0.1123 103 short 7.2306 pdl
ton (UK) ton (US) (poundal)
Speed 1 m/s 1 m/s 1 1 m/s
m/s
Em
10 3.2808 ft/s 196.08 1.944 knots 2.237 mph
ft/min
Pressure 1 bar 1 bar 1 bar 1 bar
14.50 psi 29.53 in Hg 33.45 ft H2O 401.44 in
H 2O
Energy, 1J 1J 1J
Work
0.3725 106 HPh 0.9478 103 BTU 0.5263 103 PCU
Em;XX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
AC/DC sensitive 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 >*DJ
Accelerating torque 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*?
Accessories contactors 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*3&
Add-on board 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*D?
Analog inputs, easy 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*%C"3*%?
Analog output, easy 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*?3
Anticlockwise rotation field 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*&
Arc fault protective system ARCON 8888888888888888888888888888 J*CD
ARCON quenching device 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*CD
ATEX approval
EMT6 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*3&
Motor protection system ZEV 888888888888888888888888888888888 %*D>
Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM0, PKZM4 ?*&
Overload relays 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*DJ
2B2<*4<2B B+G +<E+B*< , <=
88888888888888888888888888 ?*%
Thermistor overload relay for machine
protection EMT6 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*CC
Automatic stator starters
Engineering starting resistor 8888888888888888888888888888888888 !*3%
Engineering start-up transformer 888888888888888888888888888 !*3%
Example resistors 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*!C
Example start-up transformer 888888888888888888888888888888888 !*!?
Auxiliary contact
Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ, PKE 88888888888 ?*1
Normal 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 >*?
Auxiliary contact module 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*D EE
Auxiliary switches
Early make 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 >*>
Trip-indicating 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 >*?
Basic circuits
easy 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*!3"3*!?
Bimetal
Motor protection 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*3&
Motor-protective circuit-breakers 888888888888888888888888888 ?*&
Overload relay 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*DJ
Braking, oversynchronous 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*%C
Breakdown Torque 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*?
EE;E
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
EE;a
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
EE;^
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
Connection examples
DS4 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*?%
Connection for overload relay 1 pole, 2 pole 88888888888888888!*%
Contact protection relay 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888%*C&
Contact, self-monitoring 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888C*1
Contactor for capacitor 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*1&
Contactor relays circuit diagrams 8888888888888888888888888888888888%*?
Contactor relays reference letters 888888888888888888888888888888888%*C
Contactors
DC operated 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888%*3?
DILM 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888%*3%
General symbol 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888881*CC
Marking 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*D%
Overview 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*!"%*1
Contacts 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*>>
Control circuit devices 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*D&
For direct-on-line start 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*C&
For multi-speed contactors 8888888888888888888888888 !*?C"!*?>
For star-delta 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*&%
RMQ 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888C*D
Control circuit supply motor 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*D&
Control Relays 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*CJ
Control relays easyRelays 8888888888888888888888888888 3*&C 3*&&
Core-balance transformer 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888%*D?
Current Limiter
Current limiters PKZM0, PKZM4 8888888888888888888888888?*!
EE Current limiters PKZM0, PKZM4 8888888888888888888888888888888888888?*!
Current monitoring relays 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*&J
Current peaks 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*&J
Current sensors ZEV 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888%*D!
Current transformer integrated 888888888888888888888888888888888888%*DC
DC motors 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*%
Deceleration ramp 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*33
Deceleration time 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*C!
Delta circuit 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*% D*3%
Delta circuit, motor 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*1?
Dielectric constant 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888C*C&
EE;5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
Floor-standing
Distribution board 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*C>
Enclosure 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*C%
Formulae 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3J*%&
Freely graphical function block diagram 8888888888888888888 3*3CC
Free-wheel diode suppressor 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*&
Frequency generators 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*%>
Frequency inverter 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*D
Control section 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*?!
Design 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*??
Earthing measures 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*>?
Electrical mains connection 88888888888888888888888888888888888 D*>3
EMC-compliant surface mounting 88888888888888888 D*>? D*!3
Filtering measures 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*!J
Functions 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*!?
Installation 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*>?
M-Max 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*!% D*!>
Operating principle 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*??
Power section 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*?!
Shielded measures 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*>!
Frequency-controlled three-phase motor 8888888888888888888 D*>J
Function Block Diagram 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*3CD
Function blocks easy 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*>>
Functions easy 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*&!
Fuseless, Reversing contactor DIUL 888888888888888888888888888 !*CJ
EE
GALILEO Visualization tool 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*3CC
Generator, general symbol 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 1*C&
Global Codes, Standards Authorities worldwide 8888888888 1*1
Group compensation 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*3>
Group protection Motor-protective circuit-breakers 888 ?*!
Guard 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*CD
EE;V
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
EE;*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
Mains
Chokes 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*!C
Switches 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 >*3D
Voltage 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*3J
Voltages in North America 88888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*>3
Maintenance switch 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*>!
Maintenance switches
Circuit diagram 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 &*&
Maintenance switches, cam switches 8888888888888888888888888 &*&
Marking of electrical equipment 888888888888888888888888888888888 3J*D
Markings, contactor 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*D%
Measurement and monitoring relay EMR4 88888888888888888 3*&J
Mechanical interlock 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*3?
Minimum cross-sections for protective conductors 3J*3!
Mirror contact 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*31
MODAN 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*D1"J*C3
Modular PLC 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*33C
Modular switchgear system 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*D1
Monitoring relays 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*&J
Motor
Anticlockwise operation 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*&
Circuit documents 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*31
Clockwise operation 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*&
Control circuit devices for direct-on-line start 888888 !*C&
Control circuit supply 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*D&
Engineering 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*3%"!*3! EE
General symbol 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 1*C&
Information on the rating plate 888888888888888888888888888888888 D*&
Motor windings 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*%J
Multi-speed contactors 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*%C
Operating direction 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*&
Overload 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*D?
Pole changing 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*&>"!*&1
Power supply 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*D3
Separate windings 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*&>
Star-delta of three-phase motors 8888888888888888 !*C%"!*&&
Switching of capacitors 8888888888888888888888888888888 !*1D"!*1%
Switching on three-phase motors 888888888888888 !*D?"!*CC
Tapped winding 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*&>
EE;B
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
EE;Em
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
EE;E5
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
Safety of machinery
DIN EN 60204-1 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3J*D3
EN ISO 12100-1 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*D1
Safety position switches 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 C*3!
Safety product 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*CJ
Safety Relays 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*D1
Safety standards 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*D1
Safety technical data 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3J*D?
Safety Technology 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*D1
Safety-related applications 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*D?
SASY60 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*C!
Sealing power 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*3%
Second environment 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*>C
Self maintaining 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*!C
Sensor belt ZEV 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*D!
Separate windings
Multi-speed switch 88888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*%1"!*?D
Speeds 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*&>
Separation galvanic 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*D
Sequential Function Chart 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*3C3
Series connection 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*!D
Service distribution board 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*C%
Shaft output 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 D*?
Sheet steel housing
IVS 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*C%
MODAN 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*D1
EE
Wall-mounting housing CS 8888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*CC
xEnergy 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*DD
xVtl 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*D?
Shielding, general symbol 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 1*D?
Shift register 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3*1J
short-circuit currents 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 3J*%D
Short-circuit monitoring 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 %*C3
Short-circuit protective device 888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*D?
Short-circuit releases 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 ?*&
Short-circuit strength 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*>
EE;E3
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
Shunt releases
Circuit-breaker remote tripping 888888888888888888888888888888888>*&
Circuit-breakers 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888>*31
PKZ, PKE 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888?*3J
Remote switch-off 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888>*33
Signal modules 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*33&
Signalling units 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*D&
Single-phase motors 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*%
Sinusoidal filter 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*!&
SL signal towers 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888C*3&
Slip speed
888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*?
Slipring rotor Rotor automatic starter 88888888888888888888!*!!
SmartWire-DT 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*D
SmartWire-DT Communication System 88888888888888888888888883*D
Soft starter 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*1
Bidirectional operation 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*CC
Classification types 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*3>
Controlled deceleration 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*33
DM4 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*&&
DS7 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*D>
Examples 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*DJ
Overload current profile 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*33
Parallel connection of several motors 88888888888888888888D*DJ
Selection criteria 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*3C
three-phase controlled 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*3D
EE two-phase controlled 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*3D
Soft stop ramp 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*D1
Special purpose relays 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*C?
Speed 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*?
Speeds, separate windings 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*&>
Spring-cage terminal 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888%*3%
Stairwell lighting 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*!>
Standard auxiliary contact 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888>*?
ON-OFF indication 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888>*3%
Standard transformers, rated and
short-circuit currents 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883J*%D
Star circuit
Motor 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*1>
Principle 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*%
EE;EX
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
EE;EV
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
Tapped winding 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*3J
Cam switch 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 &*>"&*3J
Feed drive 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*CD
Four speeds 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*&1
Marking 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*D%
Multi-speed switch 88888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*%%"!*%!
Multi-speed switch star-delta 888888888888888888888888888888888!*?!
Pole-changing motors 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*&>
Three speeds 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*&!
Temperature compensated 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888?*&
Temperature monitoring 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*3C
Temperature, conversion factors 88888888888888888888888888888883J*31
Terminal 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888J*C?
Terminal assignment
IZMX16 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888>*D%
IZMX40 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888>*D?
Terminal strip, general symbol 88888888888888888888888888888888888881*D%
Testing Agencies, Certification Marks 88888888888888888888888881*3&
Text display, easy 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*1D
Thermal overload relays 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888%*DJ
Thermistor 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*3C
Thermistor motor protection 8888888888888888888888888888888 D*31 %*CJ
Thermistor overload relay for machine
protection EMT6 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888%*CC
Thermistor protection 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888%*CJ
EE Three-phase asynchronous motor 888888888888888888888888888888888D*D
General symbol 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888881*C&
Startup characteristics 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*?
Three-phase automatic rotor starter 888888888888888 !*!!"!*13
Three-phase autotransformer starter 88888 !*3% !*!C"!*!>
Three-phase current slip-ring motor 8888888888888888888888888888D*DD
Three-phase current-automatic starter 88888888888888888888888!*3%
Three-phase monitor 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*&D
Three-phase motors
Connection 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888D*C
Multi-speed switch 88888888888888888888888888888888888888 !*%%"!*?D
Rated motor currents 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883J*&C
Star-delta Multi speed switch 888888888888888888888 !*?!"!*!D
Time selectivity circuit-breaker 88888888888888888888888888888888888>*3?
EE;E*
Eaton Wiring Manual 06/11
A')j
Varistor suppressor 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888%*&
Visual indicator, general symbol 88888888888888888888888888888888881*D!
Visualization 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*1&
Visualization, easyHMI 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*1C
Voltage releases
Interlock with undervoltage releases 888888888888888888888>*3&
Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ, PKE 8888888888?*3J
Starting interlock Undervoltage releases 888888888888888>*3C
Wall-mounting
Distribution system 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888J*C>
Housing 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888 J*CC J*C>
Wide-range overload protection 888888888888888888888888888888888888?*%
Wide-range overload protection, electronic 888888888888888%*DC
Winding, general symbol 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888881*D>
Wiring diagrams 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*DJ
Interconnection diagram 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*DJ
Location diagram 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*DJ
Terminal diagram 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*DJ
Unit wiring diagram 88888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888!*DJ
XC PLCs 888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*33C
XI/ON 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*3D%
EE XIOC signal modules 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888888883*33&
ZEV motor protection system 888888888888888888888888888 %*D?"%*CD
ZW7 current transformer-operated overload relays 88888!*!
EE;am
For service issues please contact your Eaton representative
or the After Sales Service.
Hotline: +49 (0) 180 5 228322 (de, en) 24/7 E-Mail: AfterSalesEGBonn@eaton.com
Tel.: +49 (0) 228 602-3640 Internet:
Fax: +49 (0) 228 602-61400 www.eaton.com/moeller/aftersales